diff options
Diffstat (limited to '21397.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 21397.txt | 10690 |
1 files changed, 10690 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/21397.txt b/21397.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aca8f34 --- /dev/null +++ b/21397.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10690 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Manco, the Peruvian Chief, by W.H.G. Kingston + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Manco, the Peruvian Chief + An Englishman's Adventures in the Country of the Incas + +Author: W.H.G. Kingston + +Illustrator: A.W. Cooper + +Release Date: May 8, 2007 [EBook #21397] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MANCO, THE PERUVIAN CHIEF *** + + + + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + + + + +Manco, the Peruvian Chief, An Englishman's Adventures in the Country of +the Incas, by W.H.G. Kingston. + +________________________________________________________________________ + +Here is another Kingston novel about South America. As usual he makes +the point that the Spaniards were very cruel, especially in the way they +oppressed the Indian tribes. + +The family in the story are English, and they get pulled into helping an +Inca chieftain, Manco, in his flight from the Spaniards. This seems to +mirror several other books by Kingston. There is always a long trek +overland, the point of which usually eludes me, but which gives rise to +all sorts of difficult situations, with Spaniards, with serpents, with +dangerous bridges, with rafts on rivers and so forth. Dated 1853 this +must be one of Kingston's earliest books, and certainly one of the +earliest with this theme: the style is impeccable. This edition is +probably some years later, since there is an inscription in the version +I used dated 1900, and it might have been tidied up if it needed it. + +It makes a good audiobook, though not a very long one, at 11 hours 30 +minutes. + +Enjoy reading the book or listening to it. + +________________________________________________________________________ + +MANCO, THE PERUVIAN CHIEF, AN ENGLISHMAN'S ADVENTURES IN THE COUNTRY OF +THE INCAS, BY W.H.G. KINGSTON. + + + +CHAPTER ONE. + +MY FAMILY AND HOME--WE CONCEAL A FUGITIVE INDIAN. + +It was evening. The sun had just set beneath the waters of the Pacific, +which could be distinguished in the far distance; and the whole western +sky, undimmed by a cloud, was burning with a radiant glow of splendour +such as to the eyes of the untutored Peruvians might well appear an +emanation from the Deity they worshipped. + +I was looking out, with others of my family, from the windows of the +country house we inhabited, on the glorious spectacle. We were residing +in Peru, that romantic region with which the name of the conqueror +Pizarro must be for ever associated--the kingdom of the once powerful +and enlightened Incas, on the western shore of South America. At the +time of which I speak, however, its greatness, its prosperity and +happiness, had passed away; it was a mere province of Old Spain, and +governed by a viceroy sent from that country, while the race of its +ancient sovereigns, though still existing, was humbled and disregarded, +and almost unknown. + +My parents were English, and England was my native land. My father, Mr +Henry Rexton, had been a soldier in his youth; but when he married my +mother, who was the daughter of an eminent British merchant, he quitted +the army; and my grandfather induced him, by advantageous offers, to +take a share in his house of business. The firm traded with Peru; and +certain mercantile transactions of importance requiring for a time the +superintendence of a partner, my father and mother went out there, +taking with them me and a younger sister, their only children then born. +Year after year unexpected circumstances occurred which compelled them, +much against their wish, to remain in the country; and well do I +remember how frequently in our family circle the subject of conversation +was the happiness we expected to enjoy on returning home. On first +going to Peru, we resided in Lima, the modern capital; but at length the +heat of the climate affecting my mother's health, in the hopes of it +being restored by a cooler atmosphere, my father engaged a house in the +country, at a considerable distance from the city. It was situated +among the lower ranges of the lofty Cordilleras, one of those mighty +ranges of mountains which stretches from one end to the other of the +South American continent, the eastern portion of them being more +properly known by the name of the Andes. + +Our house stood on a level spot on the summit of a spur of the main +chain. To the east behind it rose range above range of mountains, the +more distant towering to the sky, and covered with eternal snows. On +either side other spurs stretched out far towards the west, forming deep +gorges below us; while along the side of the ridge on which the house +was situated ran a narrow road, one of the few paths in that +neighbourhood, penetrating among the mountains into the regions on the +eastern side. From our windows westward, over a wide extent of broken +ground among the mounds, many of which might in other countries be +called mountains, would be seen the fertile plains of Peru stretching +away to the ocean, distinguished on clear days by a silvery line in the +horizon. The house was of one floor only, and built of brick and tiled. +The rooms were large and numerous, and it was surrounded by a +court-yard. It was of ancient construction, indeed it appeared to have +been built originally for a fortification to command the pass through +the mountains; but the outer walls had fallen into decay or been pulled +down, though it still retained enough of its former character to enable +it to be speedily prepared to resist any sudden attack by undisciplined +forces destitute of artillery. Around it were plantations of olive and +orange trees, on the slopes near it were vineyards, and on the level +spaces fields of maize or Indian corn, and many trees and plants of a +temperate clime. At the bottom of the ravine rushed a broad and +powerful stream, fed by the snows of the neighbouring mountains; and on +its banks, in a wider part, some little way to the west, was a large +village inhabited chiefly by Indians, the descendants of the hapless +race conquered by the Spaniards. In the neighbourhood, on the other +side of the river, was a silver mine, in working which many of the +inhabitants of the village were employed. + +My father's house had, I believe, advanced money to the owners; and this +was one of the reasons which made him select the locality for his +temporary residence, besides its peculiar healthiness and beauty. He +was a firm friend to the Indians, for he pitied their hard fate; and he +endeavoured by every means in his power to mitigate their sufferings +under the cruel tyranny to which, even at that time, they were +subjected. As he did not own the mine, he could not prevent their +strength from being often overtaxed; but having some knowledge of +medicine, he used to prescribe for them when they were sick, and he to +the best of his means relieved them when overtaken by poverty, so that +they all learned to love and reverence the English stranger who had come +among them. His conduct was uninfluenced by any expectation of a +return, but he afterwards had reason to know that the despised Indians +were not ungrateful for his kindness. My father was a true Christian, +who looked upon all men helpless or suffering, whatever their hue, or +race, or religion, as brothers, whom it was his duty to aid and protect. +He received his reward; and my belief is, that no person ever performs +a good disinterested action without being rewarded for it even in this +world. I, at all events, have met with numerous instances which tend to +show that such is the case. The means of crossing the river to the +mines was by a large hanging bridge, called by the Spaniards "_Puente de +Soga_," which could be seen from the windows of our house. On either +side of the river, some fifty feet above the water, stout posts were +driven into the steep bank, to which four ropes, formed of twisted +cow-hides the thickness of a man's arm, were fastened. These ropes were +laid parallel to each other, a few feet apart; and were again fastened +by thinner ropes laid transversely, and forming a sort of network. On +this foundation were spread roots of the Agave tree, branches of trees, +straw, and earth, so that even beasts of burden could walk across. On +either side of the bridge, and about three feet above it, two other +ropes were carried across to serve as a balustrade; but as it had sunk +in the middle, and the ropes were very slack, it frequently swung from +side to side as passengers went across, in a most terrific way. It +formed a very picturesque object in the landscape. + +I have now given a sufficiently full description of our house and the +scenery surrounding it, to enable my readers to form a tolerably correct +idea of the picture I wish to present to them. + +At the time when the adventures I have resolved to narrate commenced, I +had just attained my fifteenth year. I looked older, for I had grown +rapidly in that warm climate; and, accustomed to exercise and athletic +sports, I was of a well-knit strong frame, and had a very manly +appearance, though possessed of the light hair and complexion of the +Saxon race, somewhat tanned, however, by constant exposure to the sun. +My brothers and sisters, for I had several, all bore the same marked +characteristics of our Northern ancestors, contrasting strongly with the +swarthy hue on the countenances of the people among whom we lived. They +used to call us the fair-haired children of the North; and from the love +and respect with which they regarded us, I believe they associated us in +their minds with the revered race whom their traditions told them once +ruled the country with paternal sway--the family of the fallen Incas. + +I shall have to tell more fully, in the course of my narrative, the +beautiful legend, for so I may call it, regarding the origin of the +Incas; how they appeared suddenly among the ignorant inhabitants of +Peru, claiming to be the children of the Sun, and, gathering their +scattered tribes together, formed them into one people, and gave them +laws and institutions, and brought peace and prosperity to the land, +which continued till the Spaniards arrived, and, with unexampled +treachery and cruelty, overthrew their monarchy and reduced the people +to abject slavery and misery. The Indians around us were nominally +Roman Catholics; but though they conformed openly to the ordinances of +that Church, and partly believed in the power assumed by its priests, +they pertinaciously retained many of the superstitions of their +ancestors, and practised their rites in secret. + +Having given a brief account of my family, and their position in the +country, I must begin to unwind the thread of my Tale. We were seated, +as I have said, in our sitting-room, gazing on one of the most +magnificent of Nature's spectacles--the setting sun. The younger +children were playing about the room, while my sister Lilly and I, with +our father and mother, were seated near the open window. We were +talking, I well remember, about our distant home, when our conversation +was interrupted by seeing a man leap over the wall of the court-yard, +and rapidly approach the house. + +"Who can he be? What brings him here?" exclaimed my mother, while my +father rose to make inquiries on the subject. + +Scarcely had she spoken, when the door was thrown open, and the person +we had seen rushed into the room. He was a tall man, of well-knit, +active frame, and though he looked travel-stained and weary, there was +something in his appearance and manner which betokened that he was not +an ordinary being. His complexion was dark, though scarcely darker than +that of a Spaniard; but the contour of his features and the expression +of his countenance showed that he belonged to the Indian race. His +dress was simple, consisting of a pair of trowsers, and a shirt of the +cotton cloth of the country, of a dark blue colour; a poncho of alpaca +wool covered his shoulders, while a sash was fastened round his waist, +and his feet were protected by sandals, fastened on by leather thongs. +He threw himself on the ground before my father, who went to meet him, +and taking his hand, he looked up imploringly in his face. + +"Save me, Senor!" he exclaimed in Spanish, "you have the power if you +will venture to do it. I am flying from what they call justice--the +tyranny of our cruel task-masters. If I am captured, my death is +certain. You are noble and generous, and I throw myself on your mercy." + +The appeal thus made, with all the energy of despair, was difficult to +resist. My father's feelings were enlisted on the side of the fugitive; +but he looked round at my mother and us, who now stood grouped about +him, and remembered the difficulties to which we might be exposed, +should he yield to the promptings of his heart, from the anger of the +Spanish authorities. The Indian divined his thoughts. + +"You run no danger," he continued. "Far be it from me to cause you to +suffer for your charity. No one saw me approach your house; neither did +your servants observe me enter it. I was on my way through the +mountains to the far interior, but not daring to enter any house for +food and rest, I felt that my strength was forsaking me, and that I +could not hope to combat with the difficulties of the road. If you +cannot shelter me, noble Senor, either I must die from fatigue, or be +captured by my enemies." + +"Of what crime have you been guilty, that you thus seek to fly from +justice?" asked my father. + +"Of no crime, Senor, believe me," replied the Indian in a proud tone, +rising to his feet as he spoke. "Of no crime in the sight of Heaven, or +even of men, if they had regard to justice. I was selected for the +hated _Meta_, I, a descendant of the great Incas, was ordered to work as +a slave--a _Pongo_ in the house of a sub-delegado, a man noted for his +crimes and cruelty. I refused to perform the disgraceful office--I was +dragged there by force--with a thong he endeavoured to frighten me into +performing the work he ordered. His rage surpassed all bounds; he +struck me again and again. Was I tamely to submit? My dormant spirit +was aroused. I at length struck him again; and when he rushed at me in +his fury, I felled him to the ground. I attempted to fly, but I was +captured ere I could do so, and was borne off to prison, there to await +my doom, which would have been death. My name was unknown. They +thought I was an humble Indian; but some of my race were at hand, and, +aided by them, I effected my escape from prison. My friends could not +conceal me, and my only course was instant flight into the mountains." + +"Let us shelter him, Henry," exclaimed my mother, in English; "Heaven +surely will not allow us to suffer injury from doing what is right." + +The Indian at once comprehended by her looks that she was pleading his +cause. + +"May the blessing of the God of my fathers light on you and yours!" he +cried, kneeling at her feet. + +My father thought as she did; but he had learned not to give way on a +sudden to the impulse of his feelings, and he wished to ascertain that +the Indian was not deceiving him before he promised his protection. + +"Who are you?" he asked; "though your tale, alas! is too probable to be +doubted." + +"I am one who would not be guilty of a falsehood to save my life," +answered the Indian proudly; "I am the cousin of the Cacique Tupac +Amaru, the rightful heir of the last Inca of Peru. You see in me one of +the children of the Sun; and though the blood of the conquerors of my +country is mixed in my veins, I feel that of my fathers still burning +strongly within me. I had heard of your charity and kindness to my +people; and for long I have known you, hoping some day to repay you; but +I see that you fear my presence might risk the safety of your family, +and I will not trespass on you. Give me but some food to sustain my +wearied body, and I will depart." + +My father took the stranger's hand. "You shall not go," he said. "I +will trust you, and at all hazards I will endeavour to conceal you till +your strength is recruited. David," he continued, speaking to me, "see +that the servants do not come into this part of the house till I have +concealed this poor fellow; and remember, children, do none of you on +any account speak of what has occurred. Now, my friend," he added, +turning to the Indian, "follow me; I trust in the truth of your story, +and will endeavour to preserve you from injury." + +While I went out to the end of the passage to send any of the domestics +back who might by chance have been coming to that part of the house, my +father led the Indian to a large unfurnished room, which the children +used as a play-room in rainy weather. At one end was a deep recess in +the wall, with a door to it, and from the recess a narrow flight of +steps led to a vault of considerable depth, from whence there was a +passage to the side of the mountains. In the roof of the chamber there +was a small trap-door, through which a thin ladder conducted to the roof +of the house. It had evidently been constructed when the building was +used as a fortification, and was probably intended to enable the +garrison to make a sudden sortie on the enemy at an unexpected point. +The outside entrance was blocked up by rubbish overgrown with +vegetation; and my father had caused a strong door to be placed to the +vault, to prevent any intruder, who might by chance have found his way +through it, from entering the house. He always kept the keys himself; +and as no one ever thought of wishing to enter the recess, a securer +place for the concealment of the fugitive could not have been found. +Our evening meal was, fortunately, spread in the parlour, so that we +were able to supply our guest with the refreshment he so much required, +without exciting the suspicion of the servants. I must remark that +several of them, of the higher class, were Spanish, though the rest were +Indians; and though we believed them to be honest and faithful, my +father did not consider it right to trust them with a secret which might +compromise them as well as himself and all his family. + +He was very sensible, even as it was, of the risk that he was running; +but he had resolved, at all hazards, to preserve the unfortunate man who +had thrown himself on his protection. While I kept watch, my mother +collected some bedding, and took it into the closet; so that in a few +minutes our guest was made as comfortable as circumstances could allow. +He ate sparingly of the food placed before him, and then, expressing his +deep gratitude for the protection afforded him, he threw himself on his +couch, and sought the repose he so much needed. My father having +secured the door, called me to him, and we all again assembled in the +sitting-room as if nothing had occurred, till summoned by the servant to +our evening meal. The arrival of the stranger had, however, an +influence on my future fortunes. + +While our servant Jose, who was a Spanish Creole, was waiting at table, +I could not help looking into his face to try and discover if he +suspected anything; but the look of perfect unconsciousness which his +countenance bore reassured me. I was afraid also that the children +might betray it to their nurses; but our mother had kept them carefully +shut up in the sitting-room while our father was concealing the +stranger, so that they were under the impression that he had gone away. +Lilly and I were therefore the only ones in the secret. + + + +CHAPTER TWO. + +UNWELCOME VISITORS. + +When we retired to rest, all night long I dreamed of the unhappy +descendant of the Inca who was beneath our roof. Some of the incidents +of which I had read in Peruvian history were strongly mixed up in my +mind with the reality, with the indistinctness which generally occurs in +dreams. + +I thought our guest was the mild and unfortunate Huascar, the rightful +Inca of Peru, who was a prisoner in the hands of his fierce brother +Atahualpa when the Spaniards attacked Peru with their small but +determined band of robber-warriors. I thought I was aiding Huascar to +escape from among his brother's army. We had passed the guards, who +were fast asleep, when we came to a broad river. We attempted to swim +across, when I felt my strength failing me. Huascar was bravely +buffeting the stream by my side. Suddenly the bank was lined with +troops. They shouted to us, and let fly a cloud of arrows at the Inca. +He stopped swimming. I endeavoured to drag him on; but as I grasped at +him he sank below the water. The shouts grew louder. I awoke. The +noise was real, for I heard the voices of some men calling in Spanish at +the court-yard gate, and desiring to be let in. + +I trembled with alarm; for I at once suspected that the strangers must +be the emissaries of government come in search of our guest. I jumped +up and began to dress myself, intending to go out to inquire who they +were; but before I had left my room I heard Jose, the servant, hold a +parley with them at the gate. + +"Who are you," he asked, "who come at this unreasonable hour to disturb +a quiet family?" + +"Open in the king's name, and we will let you know," was the answer he +received. + +"I must get my master's leave first, and he is fast asleep," he replied. + +"We are government officers in search of a fugitive malefactor, and are +benighted on our road; so you must awake your master whoever he is, and +he will not refuse to give us shelter," they exclaimed. + +I now went out to join Jose. He was afraid they were robbers; and I +suspected that they by some means knew that the fugitive was harboured +in the house, and only made this a pretext to gain an entrance. +Fortunately my father was not awakened by the noise, or he might have +had more difficulty than had the servant in answering the questions put +by the officers of justice. Opening a slide in the gate through which +he could look out, Jose let the light of the lantern fall on the +strangers, and the inspection convinced him that they were what they +represented themselves to be. + +"Be quick there," said the strangers, "for we have but a short time to +rest, and we must speedily be again on our road." + +"What shall I do, Master David?" said Jose. "If we do not let them in +they will batter down the door; but still I do not like to disturb the +Senor Rexton. They do not look like robbers, so it is all right." With +the knowledge that the Indian concealed in the house was in all +probability the fugitive the officers were seeking, I felt that it was +all wrong, and would have given much to have kept them out; but still I +saw that it would be equally dangerous to attempt to do so. My heart +all the time was beating audibly with agitation; and I was afraid that +even Jose would suspect the secret. However, I replied, "Let them in, +Jose, by all means, and do you attend to what they require." + +He accordingly withdrew the bolts and bars of the gate, and two chief +officers--alguazils they are called--and four subordinates made their +appearance. + +Two of them remained without to take care of their horses. They were +all fierce, rough-looking fellows, armed with muskets, pistols in their +belts, and swords by their sides. The officers of justice (though I do +not think the name is a proper one) were often pardoned banditti, +cut-throats and robbers of the blackest dye, who were glad to accept the +office as an alternative for the garotte; and I believe our visitors +were of that description. The inferiors were Mestizos, half Indian and +half Spaniards by descent, with dark brown complexions and savage +countenances--altogether gentlemen of a very unprepossessing appearance. +They were accompanied by a dog, a huge, savage-looking hound, whom they +called by the very ugly name of Demonio. If he was a bloodhound, as at +first I thought he was, I felt that the detection of the Indian would be +certain. + +"You were a long time opening the gate, friend," observed, one of them +as they strode into the house. "You took us for robbers, I suppose?" + +"O no, Senor, not at all," said Jose; "but a servant should not let +strangers into the house without his master's leave." + +"Is that young senor your master then?" inquired the alguazil. + +"He is my master's son; my master is Senor Rexton, an Englishman, and he +is fast asleep," said Jose. + +"Well, you need not disturb him then; all we want is food and shelter +for the night," replied the alguazil. "Be quick with the former, some +straw and blankets will serve us for beds. While, hark you, do you send +some one to show the way to the stables, that our beasts may be looked +after; they require food as much as we do." + +"All shall be done you request, Senores; in the mean time, follow me," +said Jose; and what was my dismay to see him lead the way to the large +empty room I have spoken of, close to which the Indian was concealed! I +dared not interfere, lest I might excite their suspicions; so I thought +it best to let Jose follow his own course. Having dragged in a table +from one of the other rooms, he placed a lighted candle on it, and then +hurried off to call up some of the other servants to help him, leaving +me alone with the officers. I was afraid of speaking to them, lest they +should ask me questions; so I made signs that the servant would quickly +return with what they required. I dared not even look towards the door +of the secret passage, to which every instant I expected to see some of +them go for the purpose of examining it. However, somewhat to my +relief, they seemed not to notice the door, but throwing themselves on +the ground, stretched out their limbs to rest themselves, while their +hound Demonio crouched down at their feet with his head between his +fore-paws, ready to spring up in a moment. I saw by the glare of his +half-closed eyes that he was all the time wide awake, and eager to +spring upon any one who might molest him or his masters. + +My anxiety made me fancy that Jose was a long time absent, but he had +really been away only a few minutes, when he returned with another +servant, bringing a supply of bread and meat, and wine. Some chairs +were carried into the room; and the officers being joined by their +companions, they attacked the viands with a good will. Had Jose been in +the secret, he might have betrayed it, but his perfectly collected +manner gave no cause for suspicion. + +"You do not chance to have seen or heard anything of an Indian, an +atrocious villain who has escaped from justice, and is supposed to have +taken the path by this up the mountains?" asked one of the officers. + +O how my heart did beat as I heard this! Jose assured them with an air +of perfect disembarrassment that he knew nothing of any Indian fugitive. +His answers seemed to satisfy them. He next brought in some bundles of +straw and blankets to serve as bedding. + +"There, Senores, I hope that you will make yourselves at home, and sleep +soundly after your supper," he observed, as he deposited them in +different parts of the room. + +"No fear of it, friend; we will not forget your hospitality," said the +chief alguazil, as he helped himself to a large tumbler of wine. + +I was glad to see them apparently so well satisfied; but at the same +time I thought I detected a sinister expression in the eye of the +speaker, with which I was not altogether satisfied. The hound Demonio, +too, gave me some uneasiness; for though he came back to catch the +pieces of meat thrown to him by the officers, he employed himself +meanwhile in snuffing round the room in a very suspicious manner. Jose +stood quietly by to attend to their wants. + +"Can I do anything more for you, Senores!" he asked. + +"Another flask of this wine will not be objectionable, and a bundle of +cigars would be welcome," answered the chief alguazil, laughing at the +thought of the comfortable quarters into which he had fallen, and +determined to make the most of them. + +"Certainly, Senores; I am sure my master would not object to afford all +you require," said Jose, going out to fetch what was asked for. + +While he was absent, what was my horror to see the dog, who had now +finished his meal, begin to snuff vehemently under the door of the +secret passage, and then to work away with his paws, as if to try and +open it! I turned pale with alarm, for I knew that all must be +discovered; but still I thought it best to take no notice of the +circumstance. + +"What does the dog want there?" said one of the men. + +"Rats are there, I suppose," remarked another, whose wits the wine had +somewhat dulled. + +"Demonio has a strange fancy for rats," said a third. + +"Rats or not, I should like to have a look behind the door," observed +the chief alguazil, as the dog's excitement increased. + +I said nothing, and the officers seemed to fancy that I could not +understand Spanish, so they did not trouble me with questions. Just +then Jose returned. + +"What is inside that door?" asked the chief alguazil abruptly. + +"Nothing that I know of but an empty cupboard," he answered quietly. +"The room is little used, so that I never saw it opened." + +"Bring the key, and let us see," said the alguazil. + +"I have not the key; and if there is one, my master must have it, and I +cannot disturb him for such a fancy," replied Jose. "The dog smells a +rat; there are many in the house, and he will soon be quiet." + +But the dog would not be quiet, neither was the alguazil satisfied; and +at last Jose was obliged to say that he would go and ask my father for +the key. I followed him out of the room. + +"Jose, I will go to my father and get the key, while you stay with the +strangers," I said to him. "Give them plenty of wine, and amuse them as +long as you can." + +I hurried to my father's room to consult what was to be done; though I +intended not to mention that the key had been asked for till he had come +into the passage, as of course my mother would be very much alarmed at +hearing of it. + +I had got him out into the passage, and was mentioning the unwelcome +arrival of the Spaniards in as calm a tone as I could command, when it +struck me that I might prevent his being implicated in the secretion of +the fugitive if I took the whole blame upon myself. I at last told him +of the suspicions the behaviour of the horrid dog had aroused in the +minds of the officers; and entreated him, by every argument I could +think of, to let me manage the affair as best I could. + +"They can scarcely inflict any severe punishment on me," I observed, +"while they might drag you off to prison, and leave my mother and +brother and sisters without a protector." + +"I must take the consequences of what I have done," he returned. "At +the same time I do not repent having endeavoured to save the poor +fellow. The act was right, and that must be my consolation." + +But I was not so easily to be turned aside from my purpose; and at last +he consented to let me take the key, and to use it if driven so to do, +while he remained in his room. I returned, as may be supposed, in no +great hurry to the hall; and as I got close to it I heard, amid the loud +talking of the Spaniards and Jose, who was doing his best to amuse them, +the scratching and snarling of the savage brute at the door. + +"My master is incapable of breaking the laws; that I can assure your +Excellencies," I heard Jose say. "If the man you seek is inside there, +he did not put him in, you may depend on it. If you find anything, it +will be a rat or a little mouse, perhaps, for which all this fuss is to +be made." + +"What you say may be true, friend; but if the key is not brought we must +break open the door," observed one of the Spaniards. "The dog is not a +pure bloodhound; but he has enough of the race in him to know the +difference between an Indian and a rat." + +At last I thought it better to go in with the key. When I reached the +door of the passage, the brute snarled at me savagely, and I fully +believe would have sprung upon me and torn me limb from limb, had not +his masters called him off. I trembled so with agitation that I could +scarcely apply the key to the keyhole. Luckily the light did not fall +on me, or it would have been perceived. + +"Come, young Senor, be quick about it; somebody is in there--of that I +can be sworn," exclaimed the alguazil. + +"There, take the key yourself, and try and open it," I answered, hoping +that as he did so the Indian would rush out and make his escape, though +his chance was a forlorn one. The officer took the key; some of his men +approached with lights, while others held their swords and pistols ready +for use. Jose looked very much astonished, though in no way alarmed at +the proceedings; but I knew too well what was about to be revealed. The +door flew open, and the men and their hateful dog rushed in. The fate +of the poor Indian was sealed, I thought. I followed, expecting to see +them tearing him to pieces. What, then, was my astonishment and +satisfaction to find not a trace of him remaining! The bedding, and +even the dishes in which his food had been carried to him, were nowhere +to be seen. + +"There, I told you so," exclaimed Jose triumphantly, "there were nothing +but rats." + +But the dog was not so easily satisfied; and to my horror he rushed down +the narrow flight of steps leading to the secret outlet. The door at +the bottom I knew was locked, and I too justly feared that the Indian +would be found there. The officers hesitated about descending; for as +only one could go at a time, they saw that a determined man might kill +them in detail, if so inclined; so they sent their inferiors forward to +make the experiment. I stood by, waiting the result with increased +anxiety; for I felt that if the Indian should kill some of the officers, +the difficulties of our position would be still more increased. The dog +led the way, and I hoped would be the only victim; the others followed +very reluctantly. Some time passed; but still there was no sign of +their having discovered the fugitive. + +"Have you found the rat?" shouted Jose, laughingly, from above. + +"Bring the key of the other door," thundered the alguazil in return from +below. I had got it, but I did not say so. + +"Of what door do you speak?" asked Jose, in real ignorance of the fact +that there was a door. I was anxious to gain all the time possible, +believing that the Indian must have made his escape through the passage; +so I let them talk on till the alguazil peremptorily ordered me to open +the door, threatening me with all sorts of pains and penalties if I +refused to obey. + +"I have heard that there is a long passage leading no one knows where," +exclaimed Jose; "so, Senores, if you are going to explore it, you had +better take some torches, or you may chance lose your way." + +"Bring them here instantly," shouted the alguazil. + +"If you are wise men you will amuse yourselves with the wine flasks +while I go to prepare them," said Jose. The advice was too agreeable to +be neglected, and I was very glad to see the men return and again seat +themselves at the table. While they were drinking and Jose was absent, +the dog however continued running up and down the steps, and smelling in +every direction. + +The officers seemed to enjoy their wine so much that I was in hopes that +their suspicions were lulled, and at all events I rejoiced that the +Indian would have more time afforded him for making his escape. Jose at +last returned with the torches, which were composed of twisted straw +dipped in pitch; and the chief officer descending with less caution than +before, led the way, the rest following. At the bottom of the steps was +a tolerably broad space, which enabled me to pass the men so as to reach +the door, where the hound, snarling at me as I approached, stood ready +to rush through at his prey as I supposed. How the Indian could have +escaped, still, however, remained a mystery to me. After several +attempts I succeeded in turning the rusty lock, and a dark passage cut +through the solid rock opened before us. The wet dropped from the roof +as we proceeded, and, combined with the noxious exhalations which +proceeded from the farther end, almost extinguished the torches. + +"It is folly in me accompanying these men," I thought to myself; and +just then a recess appearing in the rock, I stepped into it and let the +rest pass me. Jose was the last; I touched him as he reached me, and +whispered to him to return. + +He either did not hear me, or wished to watch the proceedings of the +alguazil and his subordinates. As I had no torch, I groped my way with +no little difficulty to the foot of the stairs, thinking Jose was +following me. To my horror, just as I was about to ascend, I heard the +low-muttered growl of the savage hound, and the next instant I found my +leg seized in his jaws. + +"Help, Jose, help!" I cried out, but not loud, lest the officers should +hear me; "the brute will kill me else." + +But Jose was not, as I supposed, at hand. I felt the dog moving his +jaws higher up my leg, as if he evidently was about to pull me to the +ground, while the pain he inflicted almost paralysed me. I certainly +was no coward, but I shrieked in my agony. In another moment he would +have mastered me, when, by the faint light which came through the door +of the room above, I saw a dark figure spring down the steps. The dog +let go his hold of me to fly at the new-comer but was met by the point +of a sharp dagger, which pierced his breast, and uttering a low yell of +pain and rage, the brute fell dead at my feet. The Indian--for my +preserver was the fugitive--without speaking, assisted me in dragging +the dog out of sight under the steps, and then whispering, "Say not a +word about the dog, he will not be discovered," again sprung up the +steps. + +I followed him, fearing that the men in the room above would discover +him. I caught sight of him as he ascended to the roof of the alcove, by +means of a single rope which hung to the ground. In the roof was a +trap-door, through which he disappeared, and closed it silently after +him, having first drawn up the rope. Again going below, I met Jose, and +told him that the dog was dead, charging him to ask no questions, and to +say nothing about it. + +I was much afraid lest the men should discover the dog; for the fact of +his remaining near the stairs might make them suspect that the Indian +was concealed near at hand. My trousers were fortunately only a little +torn, though, as the brute's teeth had met in the calf of my leg, I felt +a considerable amount of pain; but I did my best to conceal it, lest the +men should accuse me of killing the dog. I might with truth have +replied that I had not killed him, but they would then have asked who +did, to which question I could not have replied. As the life of a +fellow-being was at stake, I felt the importance of being very +circumspect in everything I did. + +When we returned to the room, the two men who had been left there +inquired what had become of their comrades. + +"Hunting rats or spirits, for they will find nothing else down there I +am sure," answered Jose, unconcernedly. "They will be back soon, I +warrant, after their fool's chase, begging your pardon, Senores." + +His words were verified more speedily than he expected, for at that +moment cries and shouts were heard, and the officers came tumbling up +the steps as fast as their legs could carry them, with their hair almost +standing on end, and their eye-balls starting from their heads. One had +lost his cap, another his sword, and all their torches; they were also +wet and dirty from scraping against the sides of the cavern. They +declared that they had been set upon by a whole legion of demons, who +had blown out their torches and attacked them with teeth and claws, so +that they were glad to escape with their lives. + +"For the love of heaven shut the door, or they will be up here after +us!" shouted the last of the men, as he rushed into the room. + +I, as may be supposed, hurried down with joyful alacrity to obey the +order, and coming back without encountering any of the demons, closed +the upper door after me. + +"I said you were going on a fool's errand," said Jose; "your pardon for +the remark, Senores. But let me fill up your glasses, the wine will +soon make you forget your mishaps." The men were easily induced to +apply the proposed remedy. + +"But what has become of the dog?" asked the chief. + +"Carried off by the demons," observed Jose. + +"Let him go," growled one who was the most bruised and dirty. "He led +us into the scrape, and deserves his fate; if it had not been for him, +we should not have known of that horrid vault." + +The chief, notwithstanding these remarks, ordered his men to go and look +for the dog; but as he showed no readiness to set the example, none of +the others would obey him, declaring that they would rather be shot at +once than venture again among such horrors. I felt very much relieved +at the turn events had taken. The Indian had escaped, the means of the +bloodhound's death was not suspected, and the officers would probably at +early dawn continue their search after the fugitive. + +"Ask them if they wish to return to the vault; for if not, I will take +the keys up to my father," I whispered to Jose. + +"No, no," answered the men. "We have had enough of the vault, and +demons, and monsters, and spirits it contains. Tell your master all we +want is plenty of this good wine to keep them away." + +Telling Jose to give them as much as they required and to keep a careful +watch over them, I hurried back to my father to inform him that the +danger was over. + +"I never fear the consequence of having performed a good action, my +boy," he replied; "yet we should be grateful to Providence for having +preserved us from much suffering, both of mind and body. The poor +Indian is for the present safe. I can guess the way he escaped; but we +will talk on the matter more to-morrow. Now, David, go to your room and +rest, for you look pale and fatigued." + +I did not tell my father that the dog had bit me, though I should have +been wiser had I done so, as he would have had proper remedies applied, +had the wounds required them. Jose, however, soon after came into my +room and fomented my leg with a mixture which he said was very +efficacious in preventing inflammation from the bite of an animal. It +at all events relieved me from the pain I was suffering; and when Jose +left me to keep watch with the other servants on the officers, I threw +myself on my bed in the hopes of obtaining some sleep. Whenever I +dropped off, my mind recurred to the unfortunate descendant of the +Incas, and the scenes I had just witnessed; and every instant I was +jumping up, fancying I heard the shout of the officers as they +discovered his place of concealment. + + + +CHAPTER THREE. + +A JOURNEY AND THE ADVENTURES WE MET WITH. + +I awoke to perfect consciousness (for I could scarcely be said to have +been asleep all night) just as the first faint streaks of dawn were +appearing in the sky; and hearing the voices of men, and the stamping of +horses in the court-yard, I looked out of the window to learn what was +occurring. At first my mind misgave me that the alguazil and his +myrmidons had by some means seized the Indian; but as I scrutinised the +dark forms which appeared in the cold grey light of the morning, I could +not distinguish his among them. + +The men mounted one after the other apparently in good humour, for Jose +was there among the other servants with a huge flagon of wine to serve +out to them the stirrup-cup at parting, a custom observed in most +countries. It was a great relief to my mind when the gates were opened +and I saw them fairly outside the walls. As the light increased, I +watched them slowly winding along the steep path which led up the +mountain, till they disappeared in a dark gorge which opened before +them. + +"You will have a long ride if you do not intend to halt till you have +caught the fugitive in that direction," said I to myself, just as Jose +entered. + +"I have sent the rogues off in good humour," he observed. "Wine is a +fine thing to raise the spirits, though to my mind last night they took +enough to raise more than they expected--ha, ha, ha! They thought they +were attacked by ghosts and goblins, when in reality only a number of +bats flew out against them after the foul air had already damped their +ardour. The place swarms with the vermin. By the by, if the Senor, my +master, will give me the key of the vault, I will get up that beast of a +dog, and bury him or hang him up to feed the condors." + +I thought Jose suspected something, and said this to learn the truth. I +was inclined to confide the secret to him, but I felt that I ought not +to do so without my father's permission; so I answered that my father +would give him the keys when he required them. When I met my father, he +told me that I was right in not telling Jose, both for our sake as well +as his own, though he was doubtless trustworthy. + +I then asked him what had become of the Indian. + +"He is safe on the roof," he replied. "I have just seen him; he tells +me that he heard the alguazils arrive, and that at first he thought he +was betrayed, especially when the dog began to snuff under the door. He +soon, however, learned from their conversation that his presence was not +suspected; but still, to make sure, he descended the stairs in the hopes +of discovering a means of escape,--finding none, he ascended the ladder, +and forcing open the trap-door, he got through to the roof. He then +returned, when hearing the key asked for, he knew that his bedding would +betray his having been there, so he carried everything up to the roof, +lifting the ladder up after him. His doing so puzzled the dog, and +saved him his life probably, and us from very considerable annoyance." + +We afterwards met at breakfast, when Jose gave my father and mother a +full account of all that occurred. My father having given the Indian +notice to retire to the roof, the body of the hound was removed and +buried, and the family resumed their usual routine of life. Either I or +Lilly twice a day, when no one was observing us, carried food to the +Indian. Upwards of a week had passed since his arrival, when he +expressed a strong desire to resume his journey, saying that he thought +by this time the search for him must be over. My father was very +unwilling to let him go; but he assured us, that now his health and +strength were completely restored, he had not the slightest fear of +again falling into the hands of the Spaniards. All the provision he +would accept was a little maize, and sufficient cacao to replenish his +pouch. The cacao has been in use among the Peruvians from the earliest +times. Its peculiar qualities enable those who take it to undergo great +and continuous exertion, without any other food. It is a plant somewhat +like the vine, and grows to about seven or eight feet in height. The +leaves have a bitter flavour, and are aromatic. Among other qualities, +they act as a sudorific, preserve the teeth, and prevent sleep. On +first awaking in the morning, an Indian will put a quid of his favourite +leaf into his mouth, and he performs the same operation three or four +times in the day. To give it a relish he mixes a little pulverised +unslacked lime, which he carries in a gourd for that purpose. He takes +the lime out the gourd with a thin slip of damped wood, and conveys what +adheres to it to his mouth. The operation of chewing is called +_chakchar_. Many even of the whites indulge in it in secret, though it +would be considered derogatory to chew in public, because the despised +Indian does so. + +The Peruvians, in their love and admiration for this plant, used to pay +it a religious respect, and considered it the most grateful offering to +the spirits they might wish to propitiate. It has certainly a most +wonderful effect in sustaining nature; and I have known people +undergoing great fatigue, exist four or five days, without tasting any +other food, or suffering the slightest inconvenience. The ignorant +conquerors, from observing the reverence paid by the Indians to cacao, +fancied that it must possess some demoniacal properties, and not only +refused to use it themselves, but endeavoured to prevent it being used +by the natives; and a royal decree was actually issued, declaring that +the idea entertained by the Indians that cacao gave them strength, is an +"illusion of the devil." The mine-owners, however, perceived its +importance in enabling the slaves to undergo fatigue; and its use, +therefore, rather increased than diminished. It, however, excites the +brain, somewhat as does opium, and thus its intemperate use for any +length of time would probably wear out mental vigour and activity. +Having procured a supply of this valuable leaf for the Indian, he filled +his pouch with it, while the maize he fastened up in a corner of his +poncho. + +"I am ready to depart," he said, "though my heart yet lingers with you; +and believe, O children of a Northern land, that, though fallen and +despised his race, Manco Tupac Amaru is truly grateful for your generous +hospitality, and more for preserving his life. The time may come, and +shortly too, when he may have the opportunity of proving his gratitude-- +till then, farewell!" + +Taking my father's hand and mine, he pressed his lips to them, and burst +into tears. His words made an impression on me, though at the time I +did not comprehend their meaning. I afterwards had good reason to do +so. It was again evening, the hour at which he had arrived; and when it +was perfectly dark, I went out to see that none of the servants were +near. He then let himself drop from the window, and crossing the +court-yard, scaled the wall, and took his way up the mountain. I had +reason to believe that none of the servants suspected that he had been +with us. This was the first of the many adventures in which, at that +period of my life, I was engaged. We often talked of the Indian Manco, +and were anxious to know his fate; but for long heard no more of him. + +Some time after this, my father invited me to attend him on a journey, +which business required him to perform, to Cuzco, Lima, and other parts +of the country; and, as may be supposed, with no little alacrity I set +to work to make the necessary preparations. We are fond of boasting of +the civilisation of Europeans of the present day; but, however +humiliating to our pride, it must be owned that in many important +respects Peru has retrograded since the time that the Christian Spaniard +took possession of the country, and superseded the mild though despotic +sway of the glorious Incas. Under her ancient sovereigns, magnificent +roads traversed the kingdom from north to south, and from the sea-coast +into the distant interior, across the mighty Andes. Inns for the +accommodation of travellers were built at convenient distances on the +roads, and stored abundantly with provisions, while at each relays of +couriers were stationed, who with wonderful celerity could carry +messages or small parcels through the country. It is said that the +tables of the Incas, when at Cuzco, or still farther in the interior, +were supplied regularly with fish fresh caught from the sea, and other +quickly perishable luxuries, in a mode which has only been accomplished +in England since the introduction of railroads, or perhaps in the latter +days of quick coach travelling. I mention this to show the contrast to +the means we possessed for performing our journey. + +At last the day arrived for our departure. My father rode a steady +mule, but I preferred a horse, though not so safe an animal for the +narrow tracks, up and down steep mountains, on the summit of terrific +precipices, and across rickety bridges which we were about to traverse. + +They were caparisoned much in the same way. Our saddles were huge and +deep, covered with red woolly rugs; our stirrups were of Moorish shape, +large wooden boxes strapped with iron; the girths were broad; and belts +fastened to the saddle, passed round the breast and haunches of the +animals, prevented it from slipping off when going up or down the almost +precipitous declivities in our way. Our luggage was carried in huge +trunks, made of untanned bullocks' hides, fastened with thongs of the +same material, each mule carrying two slung on either side of his back. +In some our clothes were packed, in others our mattresses and bedding, +and in others our mess utensils and provisions; for as there were no +inns, it was necessary to take everything which would be required. We +rode ahead, our peons or muleteers following the beasts of burden. +Before the introduction of horses and mules, the Indians employed the +delicate llama to carry goods through the country. We had heavy spurs, +and sharp bits to our bridles, and wore broad-brimmed hats and ponchos. +The last named garment may be described as a large piece of cloth of +wool or cotton, of a round form, with a hole in the centre. Through +this hole the head is put, while the cloth falls over the shoulders, and +forms a very effectual protection from the weather. It was used by the +Indians before the conquest. + +My mother and Lilly assisted in preparing and packing our provisions and +clothes; and with prayers for our safety, at an early hour one morning +they saw us mount and commence our journey. "Good-bye, mother; +good-bye, Lilly," I exclaimed, as I seated myself in my saddle. "I will +bring you back, like the princes in the Arabian Nights, all the most +wonderful things I can collect." Their hearts were too full to answer, +and their eyes were moist with tears; for they could not conceal from +themselves that there were many very considerable dangers which we must +encounter on the road. They stood watching us while we wound our way +down the steep path, and crossed the bridge which spanned the river at +the bottom of the ravine. I propose giving a very brief sketch of our +journey, and shall dwell only on the more interesting incidents; or I +might otherwise fill my book with an account of what we saw in the +course of a few weeks. + +We arrived one evening at a _tambo_, or post-house, which, from its +appearance and position on a portion of the great high road of the +Incas, we judged had been erected before the conquest. The walls were +very thick, and composed of large blocks of stone. It was divided into +two compartments; one had formerly been the storehouse and granary, the +other the common hall and kitchen. The roof was thatched, as it had +been originally. + +At a little distance off was a village of Indian huts, mostly small; but +some were of larger size, in which the cacique and some of the chief men +resided. The _tambo_ stood in a beautiful valley, through which ran a +clear and rapid stream among meadows of ever verdant tints. The +mountains which rose on either side were to their very summit cut into +terraces. These terraces, or hanging gardens, as they are sometimes +called, were of no great width, but the walls which faced them were +built of large blocks of stone; and though in some places they were +crumbling into decay, in general they were in a perfect state, bearing +witness to the industry and intelligence of the ancient inhabitants of +the soil. These terraces are called _Andenes_, and from thence the +conquerors derived the name Andes, which they bestowed on the whole vast +range of mountains. + +Our peons having taken charge of our mules and horses, and led them to a +shed adjoining the grey and moss-grown _tambo_, we entered the building. +The interior was sombre in the extreme; everybody and everything wore a +subdued look; and even the dogs slunk about as if their spirits were +depressed. The smoke of ages was on the walls and roof, and the tables +and benches at one side had a sadly dilapidated appearance. The master +was an Indian of lightish hue, his long, lank hair already turning grey +with age, and perhaps with care. Several Indian women were moving about +round a fire at the farther end of the room, preparing a meal for a +somewhat numerous company assembled there. The women about the house +were all dressed in loose garments of dark coarse woollen cloth, which +extended from the neck to the ankles, and were secured round the waist +by a broad belt of some gay colour. They wore, folded up on the crown +of the head, a small cloth mantle, a part of which drooped down to the +shoulders behind. Each woman wore over her right shoulder a black +scarf, which I understood was a sign of mourning, not for any relation +lately dead, but for their Inca, long ago murdered by their conquerors. +The dress of most of the men was a dark woollen jacket, with breeches +open at the knees, a gaily embroidered woollen cap, a broad cotton belt, +woollen stockings without feet, and sandals of goatskin. A +broad-brimmed hat, and a small poncho thrown over the shoulders, +completed their attire. Our host soon placed before us a large deep +silver dish, containing some delicious mountain mutton, and a fat fowl, +cooked in the ashes, and garnished with small but very good potatoes. +There were neither knives nor forks in the dish, but one large wooden +spoon, with which it was intended all guests should help themselves. We +had _chicha_, the beverage of the country, offered us in silver goblets; +but for a good reason neither my father nor I felt inclined to partake +of it, though our servants did most willingly. To the taste of +Englishmen nothing can be more disagreeable than the mode in which +_chicha_ is prepared. A quantity of Indian corn is pounded into a fine +powder, round which a number of old men and women sit and masticate it +into a paste. They then roll it into balls, which are dried; and +afterwards water being thrown on them, they are allowed to ferment. + +A number of Indians were sitting apart in a corner of the room. One of +them was a tall, thin, emaciated man, of a yellowish copper hue. His +only garment was a pair of dark trousers; and his long, lank, black hair +hung down over his bare shoulders, giving him a very wild and haggard +appearance. I saw him swallow a large cupful of a mixture which I +thought was _chicha_; but soon afterwards he seemed to fall into a deep +stupor, and I fancied he was going into a fit. His eyes were fixed on +the ground, his mouth closed convulsively, and his nostrils dilated. As +I watched him, his eyes began to roll most horribly, foam issued from +his half-opened lips, and every limb and his whole body became distorted +in the most frightful manner. + +"The man will die!" I exclaimed, springing forward to assist him, and +disgusted with the apathy of his companions. + +"No fear, my son," answered an old Indian, making a sign which checked +me; "our brother has but drunk the tonga; his spirit has departed for a +season to hold communication with the spirits of our ancestors, and when +it returns he will be able to tell us things of wonder, and perchance +they may show him the treasures which lie hid in their _huacas_--their +graves." + +I afterwards found that the Indian had been drinking a powerful +narcotic, prepared from the thorn-apple, and which is called +_huacacachu_, or grave-plant, from the power it is supposed to possess +of enabling those who drink it to see the inhabitants of the graves. +After the Indian had been some time convulsed he fell into a profound +slumber, when his friends covered him up carefully with their mantles +and left him. + +Our meal was scarcely over when the clattering of horses' feet was heard +on the road, and by the sound I judged that a band of horsemen had +ridden up to the _tambo_. Our Indian host rushed out with dismay on his +countenance. I followed him to learn what was the matter; and by the +light of the moon, just then risen over the mountains, I saw about as +ugly a set of fellows as I ever encountered. Their countenances were of +every hue--black, yellow, and olive, disfigured by scars and savage +passions. Their garments, I cannot call them uniforms, of many a shape +and colour, were in rags and tatters. The horses were weary, +ill-conditioned and ill-groomed, and as miserably accoutred as their +riders, with a look in the eye full of vicious meaning. They were armed +with short carbines and long swords, and some had pistols and daggers in +their belts. + +"Los Montoneros, los Montoneros!" exclaimed several of the people behind +me, and rushed back into the _tambo_, the women trying to hide +themselves from the new-comers. + +The horsemen threw themselves from their jaded hacks, and calling to the +Indians to take charge of them, with scant ceremony entered the +building. They regarded, as they did so, my father and me, and our +servants, with no favourable eye; but after a moment's hesitation, they +threw themselves on the benches before the table at which we were +seated, crying loudly for food and liquor. It was speedily placed +before them by the trembling hands of the host; and in silence they +addressed themselves to the tearing the meat with their fingers, as if +they had not eaten anything for a week. After imbibing quantities of +_chicha_, they lighted their cigars; and then their tongues broke loose +in a style which made us anxious to escape their neighbourhood. Some +were Spaniards, or Spanish Creoles, and others were negroes; but most of +them were of a variety of mixed races. The Montoneros are notoriously +robbers in time of peace, and soldiers in war; but from the expressions +they let fall, we judged that these fellows were employed exclusively in +plundering all they met not likely to offer resistance. My father told +the servant to keep a sharp look-out on our horses and mules, which the +gentlemen would with little ceremony have appropriated. + +To avoid them we walked over to where the group of Indians were +collected round the tonga-drinker, who was now awaking from his sleep, +and sitting up, though apparently very much exhausted. His companions +were listening attentively to the mysterious revelations which fell from +his mouth, the result of his spiritual communications with his +ancestors. He spoke of a day of regeneration for the Indians; of +liberty and happiness not far distant, when the yoke of the Spaniard +would be thrown off their necks, and the race of their Inca should again +wear the crimson _borla_ of their monarchy. There was an air of +earnestness and sincerity in his manner which convinced me that he at +all events was deceiving himself as well as his hearers. In his dreams +he had truly seen what he hoped would come to pass. I afterwards had +good reason to know that he had strong foundation for his prophecies. +He was still uttering his awful communications to his wondering and +credulous hearers; the Montoneros were still drinking, smoking, and +feasting; and some other travellers (Spanish, negro, and native, among +whom was a Spanish priest, a landowner near Cuzco, and a shopkeeper) +were either taking their suppers or seeking repose, when we retired to +the deserted granary. + +We were actually provided with bedsteads of a rude construction, on +which we spread our bedding. The noise made by the Montoneros prevented +me from sleeping for some time; till they themselves sought for rest, on +and under the table and benches where they had been sitting. I was +awakened in the middle of the night by a scratching and hissing and +struggling noise under my bed, as if two animals were fighting. I +sprung to my feet, and by the light of the full moon, which streamed in +through a hole in the wall, I saw a large tabby cat engaged in a fierce +combat with a glittering snake. At first I thought it would prove a +hopeless one for poor pussy; but I soon saw by her manoeuvres, that she +had at all events an equal chance of victory. Now the venomous monster +would dart out its forked tongue and try to spring at her; when she, +with equal agility, would leap aside and would sit watching her +antagonist with careful eye, endeavouring to find an opportunity of +catching it by the neck, while she avoided its deadly fangs. The snake +seemed aware of its danger, and was not the less cautious. Indeed puss +had already given it an ugly bite on the neck, which had somewhat +crippled its movements--probably catching it asleep. The snake kept +turning round and round its baneful head, the cat always keeping beyond +the distance she knew it could spring. At last she saw her opportunity, +and rushing in upon it, she seized it by the neck, so that it could not +bite her. The snake wriggled violently, but all in vain; after a few +convulsive struggles even the tail ceased to move, and I left the eat +crunching the bones of her defeated antagonist. + +I was glad to find that I had so good a guardian as puss had proved. I +turned into bed again and went to sleep. In the morning I discovered +that the snake was a very venomous adder, but that the cat was not a bit +the worse for eating it. I afterwards learned that there are certain +sorts of poison which may be swallowed without danger, yet if it should +touch the slightest scratch or excoriation of the skin, would prove +fatal. + +At daybreak the Montoneros were on foot; and to the satisfaction of all +the occupants of the _tambo_, they took their departure up the valley. +It was the direction in which we were going, but we hoped not again to +fall in with them. As we were mounting to proceed on our journey, the +Indian soothsayer (for so I may call him) approached my father, and +whispered earnestly in his ear for some minutes. My father looked +surprised and somewhat anxious, and told him he thanked him for his +advice. The Indian retired into the _tambo_ apparently satisfied. We +had begun to move on, when we were called back; and, turning our heads, +we saw the padre and the other Spaniards mounting their mules. + +"Stay, Senors, for the love of charity," cried the padre; "we are going +your way, and if we go alone and meet with those villains, the +Montoneros, we shall all be robbed and murdered to a certainty. Now you +Englishmen are known to fight bravely, so the rogues may not think it +worth while to attack us." + +"We shall be happy to have your company, Senor Padre," said my father, +smiling; "but I hope our valour may not be put to the proof." + +"I am sure I hope not either," ejaculated the padre, crossing himself. +"May the holy saints protect us; for those fellows care not for the +anathemas of the church, the laws of the realm, or the bullets of the +soldiers." + +The other Spaniards seemed to partake of the alarm of the padre; and as +we rode along, I saw them casting anxious glances around, as if they +expected every moment to see the robbers start out from behind the rocks +which skirted the road. After we had proceeded some distance, my father +called a halt, and summoning the guides, he inquired whether they were +acquainted with a road to the right, which he described. They replied +that they were, but that it was longer and more difficult. + +"Never mind," he replied; "it is the road I intend to pursue. I shall +be glad of the company of those who wish to journey with me." + +Though he did not give his reasons, the Spaniards saw that he had good +cause for his change of route, and agreed to accompany us. They +probably, however, attributed it to the Montoneros; as I observed that +the expression of apprehension on their countenances gradually wore off, +and they no longer cast the same furtive glances at every bush and rock +as before. + +We travelled along the valley for many miles, sometimes passing over a +high ridge, and then again descending to follow up the course of some +stream which had its birth among the snowy ranges above us. My father +had formed the party into military order. Four armed men took the lead, +then came the baggage mules, while the main body of those on horseback +brought up the rear. + +For three or four days we travelled on, each night sleeping at one of +the wretched _tambos_ kept by Indians, similar to that I have before +described. Every day we mounted higher and higher, the scenery becoming +more wild, barren, and desolate. We were now traversing that part of +the Cordilleras called the Puna, a region of level heights, some +fourteen thousand feet above the sea; nearly the only vegetation being a +short, dark yellow grass, scarcely a tree or a shrub to be seen, except +cacti, gentiana, and a few other flowering plants. There were animals, +however, in abundance--vicunas, huanacus, stags, and rock-rabbits; while +condors and other birds of prey hovered aloft, ready to pounce down on +any carcase they might scent from afar. We next entered the region of +the Sierra, the name given to the extensive valleys which either +intersect the Puna, or lie between the Cordilleras and the Andes. These +valleys are generally some thousand feet below the Puna, and the climate +is very pure and healthy. The soil is also very fertile, so that they +were in the days of the Incas, and still are, more densely inhabited by +Indians than any other portion of Peru. These valleys contain many +towns, villages, and hamlets; but as they are surrounded on all sides by +mountains, only to be crossed by dangerous and circuitous routes, their +trade is but limited, and they are seldom visited by the inhabitants of +other parts of Peru. Among them are a few white people, but a +considerable number of mestizos live in the towns. There is very little +money in circulation among them, and in some parts hens' eggs are used +instead of small coin, about fifty being counted for a dollar. The +Indians are the sole cultivators of the soil, which produces wheat, +maize, and barley in abundance, as well as potatoes and other tuberous +plants, and most of the vegetables and fruits of Europe. + +It must be understood that many of the scenes I have to describe took +place in this favoured region; while others, again, were among the +mountains and valleys to the east of the vast range of the Andes. +People when reading of mountains are so apt to picture to themselves the +molehills of Europe, which can mostly be crossed on foot in a day or so, +that I must remind them that the Cordilleras and Andes which I am +describing are an extensive region, the passage over which requires not +only days, but in some places even weeks to accomplish. We had +traversed several of these valleys, and were now about to cross over the +highest ridge of the Andes. Having travelled so far without +encountering the Montoneros, even the most timid of our party had lost +all apprehension on that score. + +One afternoon we found ourselves ascending through a narrow and wild +gorge in the mountains. For three hours we had been mounting higher and +higher, till our beasts began to show great signs of weariness. At last +we saw before us a huge rock which, projecting from the side of the +mountain, completely overhung the road, and looked as if it would +overwhelm all who attempted to pass under it; while on the other side +was a precipice three or four hundred feet in perpendicular height, at +the bottom of which appeared a dark chasm with a wild roaring torrent +running through it. The road, if so the mountain track could be called, +was barely wide enough to allow a loaded mule to proceed along it; and +it was next to impossible for two animals to pass one another, or for a +person to dismount without great risk of falling over the precipice. We +had been scrambling up for a long way over places which it appeared +scarcely possible even goats would surmount, when one of the baggage +mules stopped short and refused to proceed. Several others followed his +example, and the whole cavalcade in the rear was brought to a +stand-still. Blows could not be administered, for the muleteers could +not get up to the beasts; and entreaties, coaxings, and persuasions were +all in vain. I could not help laughing at the variety of expressions +the men made use of to induce the animals to move. First they addressed +them by every endearing epithet they could think of, then they appealed +to their courage, their magnanimity, their perseverance--the deeds of +their ancestors. + +"Have not I always treated you well?" exclaimed our muleteer Juan to his +beast. "Have not I always seen you housed and fed before I thought of +caring for myself? Have not I slept by your side and watched over you +as a father his son? Ungrateful as you are thus to behave at this +pinch! If we meet another party, we shall be all hurled headlong over +the rocks, or we shall have to fight desperately and have to hurl them +over, and all for your obstinacy, sons of donkeys that you are!"--and he +broke forth in a torrent of vituperation and abuse which it is not +necessary for me here to repeat. + +"If the Montoneros should meet us now, what will become of us?" cried +the padre. + +"It is the last place they would think of attacking us in," observed my +father. "Their object is to get possession of our purses and our +beasts; now if they attacked us here, the greater number of us would be +tumbled over into the torrent below, so they would lose their booty." + +"That's a satisfaction truly," observed the padre; "but I wish the +beasts would move." + +The beasts, however, seemed not a bit inclined to stir, and we had no +remedy for it but to wait patiently, or throw them and our luggage over +the precipice. As I looked up and saw the huge boulders of rock which +hung above our heads, appearing as if the touch of a vicuna's hoof would +send them rushing down to overwhelm us in their fall, I certainly did +feel anxious to get out of their way. At last the leading mule, +somewhat rested, began to move, the others followed him for a few +minutes, and they all stopped again. The same process of entreating, +coaxing, and abusing was gone over again; when the refractory cavalcade +moved on once more for a few paces, but only in like manner to try our +patience and our nerves by stopping at a worse spot than before. After +resting a few minutes, the leading mule, which kept the others back, +appeared to gain strength, and his stoppages each time being of shorter +duration, he at length began to climb up the steep ascent before him, +the rest readily following. + +The cold, at this great height we had now attained, was excessive to our +feelings, accustomed to the warmth of the lower country. Great, +however, as was the elevation, the peaks which rose above us on every +side appeared not to have lessened in the least in height. Snow of +brilliant whiteness was around us, some of which in the more lofty spots +had perhaps not melted since the days of the flood. Mists were floating +about, and below our feet was collected a dense mass, which obscured the +view beyond. A few flakes of snow began to fall, which every instant +increased in number. + +"Forward, forward, Senores!" shouted our chief peon, who acted as guide. +"If a Cordillera storm catches us before we get under shelter, the days +of some of us may be numbered." + +We did not neglect the warning. The animals even seemed to perceive the +necessity of pushing on; and away we all went, tumbling, sliding, and +leaping over the rough track which led down the mountain. The snow +increased in density, so that we could scarcely see the person +immediately preceding us; and the chilling wind blew stronger and +stronger from off the icy peaks above. Not a moment was to be lost--the +guides shouted, "On, on, on!" and we whipped and spurred, and urged on +our weary beasts by word and bridle. Still the ground was far too rough +to enable us to get them into a trot, far less to gallop; and besides, a +tumble would in many places have proved fatal both to horse and rider. +The descent was very rapid, for we were scarcely ever on a level. + +"I'll will it fare with any unfortunate fellow in the rear who falls," +said my father. "Remain close to me, David; I am afraid of your horse +stumbling." + +"No fear," I answered, "I keep a tight rein on him, and he knows well +that he must not be careless." + +There was little time to contemplate the scene as we rode along, but +still I could not help being struck by the solemn stillness, and the +wildness of the desolation around. The voices of the men, as they +shouted out, appeared strange and unnatural from their very +distinctness, as did the tramp of the animals; while not another sound +was heard from any direction. + +"On, on, Senores!" were the only words we could hear. The snow had +ceased; but dark clouds seemed gathering around us, when, without +warning, a flash of forked lightning darted across our path, ploughing +up the ground before us, and followed by a peal of thunder which seemed +to rend the mountain tops. Flash succeeded flash in every direction, +the very atmosphere quivering with the uninterrupted peals repeated a +thousand-fold by the mountain echoes; while cataracts of fire appeared +to be rushing down the rocks on either side. Our trembling animals +refused to move; the Spaniards crossed themselves, and shrieking, as +they slid off the backs of the animals they rode, they called on their +saints for protection. + +We dismounted and endeavoured to lead our horses under an overhanging +rock. At last we succeeded in obtaining some shelter; and there we +stood, every instant expecting to be struck by the electric fluid, which +rushed zigzagging before us. Feelings such I had never before +experienced came over me. I was at the same time inspired rather with +awe than with terror. It was as if the heavens were pouring out their +full wrath on man--as if the foundations of the world were about to be +uprooted, and the mighty mountains hurled over on the plains below. + +Rocks and earth came hurtling down from the lofty peaks above us; crash +succeeded crash, and flashes of the most intensely vivid lightning +dashed before us without intermission, till the air itself seemed on +fire, and the faculties of sight and hearing both failed from +over-exhaustion of their energies. It appeared as if the dreadful +strife of the elements would never end; but as we were despairing of +reaching a resting-place before night should set in, the thunder rolled +away, the lightning ceased, and our party emerging from the caves and +crevices where they had taken shelter, we found that providentially all +had escaped injury. We mounted once more. As we proceeded, the rays of +the setting sun came streaming along a beautiful valley which opened on +our right. Descending rapidly, in little more than an hour we found +ourselves before a _tambo_. It was wretched enough in appearance, and +neither food nor beds did it afford. As, however, we had with us a +supply of provisions, and our cloaks and saddle-cloths spread on the +floor, with our saddles for pillows, served us for couches, we were not +worse off than we frequently had been; and I know that I slept soundly +till morning. + + + +CHAPTER FOUR. + +ATTACKED BY ROBBERS--A MERCIFUL DEED RETURNED WITH INTEREST. + +The scenery we passed the next day was very similar to what I have +already described; but the valley, which, on being contrasted with the +snowy region we had just left, appeared so attractive, was, I found, +when seen by the morning light, owing to its high elevation, a very +barren and desolate place. + +We rode on for some hours through scenery such as I have before +described, when in the afternoon, as we were beginning to fancy that we +were near the termination of our day's journey, we entered a deep gorge, +with the dark rocks towering up, wild and rugged, on either side of us. +It was just such a place as one might have expected an ambush to have +been placed in; as a few resolute men might have held the road, aided by +others sheltered by the rocks, against a whole army attempting to pass. +An oppressive gloom invaded the spot, and the air seemed damp and heavy, +as if the warming rays of the sun had never penetrated below the tops of +the cliffs. + +I was riding on in advance of the main body, when, on reaching the spot +where the gorge opened somewhat, I saw at a considerable distance before +me what I took to be a mark on the cliff in the shape of a horse with a +rider. As I advanced, however, I perceived that it was a lonely man on +horseback. He was too far off, standing as he was in shade, for me to +distinguish his dress or appearance. He seemed to be stationary, as if +watching our approach. A sharp turn in the road shut out the view +beyond him. Had I been an old soldier, I should have fallen back on my +companions and reported what I had seen; but I fancied that the horseman +was a traveller like ourselves, and so I continued to ride carelessly +on. I was very nearly falling a victim to my neglect. I had advanced +some two hundred yards farther, when my friends reached the spot from +which I had first caught sight of the horseman. He was still there, but +no sooner did he see them than he wheeled round his horse and +disappeared behind the cliffs. This I thought suspicious. My first +impulse was to gallop on to overtake the man; but fortunately the chief +guide had just then come up with me, and urged me not to go on. I +therefore shouted out to my friends to let them know what I had seen, +and reined in my steed till they came up. The information did not +hasten the advance of any of the party; indeed some of them were +evidently anxious to cede the post of honour in the van to their +friends. The cry of "The Montoneros, the Montoneros!" arose from every +mouth. Some tumbled off their horses, as if to shelter themselves +behind them from the expected volleys of the dreaded banditti; others +sat still and began to count their beads; and not a few turned their +horses' heads preparatory to running away. I must do the padre the +justice to say that he looked as brave as any of them, except a few who +advanced to the front. + +"Where are the enemy, David?" asked my father, who led them on. + +"I only saw one man, whom our friends here have multiplied into a band +of Montoneros," I replied. + +"Come on, my friends, then!" exclaimed my father. "If the man my boy +saw is a robber, he and his companions are more likely to run away than +to attack us, if we show a bold front." + +His words and tone of confidence restored the fast evaporating courage +of the party; and having halted to get them into something like order, +with the armed men in front and the baggage mules and their drivers in +the rear, we again moved forward. We had not, however, advanced far, +when the man I had before seen again appeared; and directly afterwards a +troop of horsemen wheeled round the sharp angle of the rock, and with +loud cries galloped rapidly towards us. + +"Steady, steady, for your lives!" shouted my father, as he saw in many +of our companions strong evidence of a disposition to turn round and +fly. "If we break our ranks, we are lost." + +That the horsemen now approaching were banditti, I had no doubt, from +their varied and fantastic dresses, the different hues of their faces, +and their wild appearance. We could not escape them, even had we been +better mounted than they were, as the baggage mules in the rear would +have prevented us. This they probably calculated on, or perhaps they +would rather we had escaped and left them our baggage, which was what +they most wanted, with the exception, perhaps, of our horses. They +invariably appropriate the best horses they can find, as it is important +for them to be well mounted. My father and I, two Spaniards, a mestizo, +and our chief Indian guide, formed the first rank. When we saw the +Montoneros, and could no longer doubt their intentions, we halted and +presented our firearms. These were of various lengths and calibres, and +some were better fitted to frighten an enemy than to do harm. When the +Montoneros saw the determined front we presented, they checked their +speed, but it was only for an instant. + +"Do not fire until they get close to us," cried my father. + +On came the banditti, their horses' hoofs clattering over the hard road, +while uttering loud and discordant yells, they waved their swords above +their heads. They made their intentions very manifest of cutting us to +pieces if they could; so we felt perfectly justified in trying to knock +them out of their saddles. + +Many of our party gave themselves up for lost; and certainly the +appearance of the banditti was enough to make a stout heart +uncomfortable, to say the least of it. Their untrimmed moustaches and +long hair escaping from under their broad-brimmed hats, their fierce +countenances and dark flashing eyes, the many hues of their skins, and +their motley costume, gave them altogether a very savage look, which was +increased by the fiery bloodshot eyes of their horses, whose shaggy +manes and the fringe of their housing streamed in the wind, while their +riders shook their weapons, and shrieked out threats of destruction on +our heads. + +"Steady, my men, and fire when I do," cried my father, levelling his +rifle; in which I, Jose, and the rest, followed his example. The +Montoneros had got within a dozen paces of us, when we gave the word. +We fired together, our friends behind handing us their still loaded +weapons. Two of the robbers rolled in the dust, and the horse of a +third was shot dead, and fell across the road, so as somewhat to impede +the progress of those behind. On they came, however, and were up to us +as we fired our second round, and received a discharge of their carbines +in return. Some of the shot took effect on our companions in the rear, +who, instead of reloading the firearms, threw them down and endeavoured +to escape. In an instant the banditti were upon us. My father's horse +was shot under him. I saw Jose knocked over; and then I recollect +nothing that happened for some minutes, except a confusion of sounds, +shouts, and shrieks and groans. When I returned to consciousness, my +first thought was for my father. He was not near me, but I saw Jose at +no great distance, leaning on his arm, as if unable to move, and looking +along the road the way we had come. I turned my eyes in the same +direction, towards which the tide of the fight had gone. A few of our +companions were still contending against a greatly superior number of +the banditti, most of whom, however, were engaged in a work more +congenial to their taste, that of plundering our baggage. I could not +doubt that my father was among the combatants; for without his example I +did not think the others would have fought, and I trembled for his fate. +I tried to rise, to rush to his assistance, or to die with him; but I +found I was too weak to stand, much less to use a weapon. I gave up all +for lost, for I perceived that the resistance of the gallant little band +of my friends was every instant growing weaker; while the robbers were +quitting their plunder to join their assailants. Meantime some of the +baggage mules were trotting off in the direction where Jose and I lay; +seeing which, some of the banditti came in pursuit of them. On seeing +that I was alive, a savage-looking fellow lifted his carbine, and was +about to give me a quietus on my head with the butt of it, while another +threatened to perform the same office for Jose, when a shout, different +from any I had before heard, reached my ears. + +"Los Indios, los Indios!--the Indians, the Indians!" cried the brigands; +"fly, fly, or we are lost!" + +I looked up; for when I thought my brains were about to be dashed out, I +had instinctively shut my eyes. What was my surprise to see the cliffs +on either side of the road, and which I had thought inaccessible, +swarming with Indians, mostly dressed in their ancient costume, and +armed with bows and slings, with which they sent a shower of arrows and +stones among our enemies! Several of them were wounded; and the +suddenness of the attack threw them into confusion. Before they could +recover from it, the Indians came leaping down the cliffs, and threw +themselves between the three parties of the robbers, while others +advanced along either end of the road, so as completely to hem them in. +With the wildest fury, animated apparently by the most deadly hatred, +the Indians rushed on our assailants, who, though they fought for their +lives, could not withstand the onset. + +I mentioned that at some distance from me I had observed a few of my +friends, among whom I had no doubt was my father, hard pressed by a +number of the robbers, who seemed intent on their destruction. The +latter had now to defend themselves from the Indians; and my father and +his party attacking them in return, they were either cut down at once, +or attempted to escape by flight. A few of the more determined had +fought their way back to where I lay, and I fully expected to receive my +death-wound from some of them, as the fight passed over me, when I felt +myself lifted in the arms of an Indian who I saw was dressed in the +costume of a Peruvian chief; and just as the combatants reached me, he +carried me out of the _melee_, and bore me up the cliff to a spot which +none were likely to reach. As he placed me on the ground, I caught a +sight of his countenance, and recognised the fugitive whom we had +protected, the Indian, Manco Tupac Amaru. Before I had time to utter a +word of thanks, he had again leaped down the cliff and joined in the +combat. Some ten or a dozen of the robbers, who were still on +horseback, and had kept together, were attempting to cut their way along +the road among the mass of Indians who opposed them. Being well +mounted, and with superior weapons, they had a great advantage; but the +Indians were inspired with a courage I little expected to witness. They +rushed in upon them, cut their bridles, and dashed their spears in their +faces; and seizing them by their clothes, hung on them, in spite of the +cuts and thrusts of their swords, till they dragged them from their +saddles. No quarter was given; the instant a robber was unhorsed he was +speared; and before the tide of the fight had rolled on many yards, not +one was left alive. Many of our party had fallen. Indeed I was +surprised to observe, nor could I account for it, that the Indians took +no pains to preserve the lives of the Spanish travellers, though they +did their utmost to protect the Indian guides. The padre and two or +three others alone escaped. The road below me indeed presented a sad +spectacle; for, as far as I could see, it appeared strewed with the +corpses of my late companions--of robbers and Indians, many of whom had +fallen in the last desperate struggle. I looked anxiously for my +father, and my heart beat with joy as I saw him coming along the road, +and evidently looking for me. My preserver, Manco, had observed him; +the recognition was mutual, and they soon approached the spot where I +lay. I need not describe my father's feelings at finding that I was +alive. I endeavoured at first to conceal the pain I suffered, and which +made me fancy that my thigh must have been broken. At length, however, +I could not help giving expression to the anguish I experienced. + +"Wait a few minutes," said the Indian chief, "and when I have performed +some duties which are urgently required, I will cause my people to form +a litter to transport you to a place of safety. What has occurred must +remain secret for a time. I can trust you; but some of the people in +your company who have escaped, might betray our proceedings to the +authorities. Their lives are safe, but we must keep them prisoners till +they can no longer injure us by being at liberty." + +Neither my father nor I could understand what he meant, and before we +could ask an explanation, he had left us. We watched his movements, and +saw him place each of the survivors of our party between a guard of four +armed Indians. Some of his followers took charge of the baggage mules; +others lifted up the dead bodies of their friends; while the rest were +busily employed in collecting the arrows and the other Indian missiles +and weapons; and they then again formed in marching order. A few had +constructed a litter, and brought it to the foot of the cliff, down +which Manco, with my father's aid, now conveyed me. + +"I wish to have no sign of our having taken share in the fray," observed +the Indian. "The lions and condors will take good care that none shall +discover how those men died." + +As he spoke, I looked up, and observed several of those mighty monsters +of the air hovering above our heads, ready to pounce down on their prey +as soon as we should have left them to enjoy their banquet undisturbed. + +At a sign from Manco, whom the Indians seemed to obey with the greatest +zeal and respect, they lifted up my litter, and bore it along at a rapid +rate. My father mounted a horse which was brought him, Manco rode +another, and the priest was accommodated with a mule; but the rest of +the Spaniards were compelled to walk, except poor Jose, who was carried, +as was I, on the shoulders of some Indians; but they did not seem at all +to like the office, nor to regard the rest of their prisoners with any +feeling of good-will. Every arrangement was made with great +promptitude; and as I watched from my litter the Indian warriors filing +before me, I could scarcely help thinking that I saw a portion of the +very army which the great Incas were accustomed to lead to victory. + +We proceeded along what might be called the high road for some miles, +when we struck off across the mountains to the left, the latter part of +the time being guided by torches, for it had become too dark otherwise +to see our way. At last we arrived at a small hut, built on the side of +a rugged mountain. It afforded shelter from the cold night-wind; and as +many as it could hold took up their quarters within it, while the +remainder bivouacked without. + +Fortunately for me, the padre was something of a surgeon, and on +examining my leg, he assured me that my leg was not broken, but only +severely bruised, and that perfect rest with fomentations would recover +it. It was impossible, however, to obtain that rest, as we journeyed on +without stopping, except for our meals and a few hours' rest at night, +for several days; and though I was carried all the time, the jolting of +my litter, as we ascended or descended the steep hills, was very +inconvenient. But the Indians collected a variety of herbs, and making +a decoction of them, fomented my leg whenever we stopped, so that the +swelling gradually subsided, and the pain diminished. + +At length we reached a collection of deserted huts, among rugged and +inaccessible crags, with the snowy peaks of the Andes towering high +above us. The lower parts of the mountains were clothed with pine +trees; and long grass grew on the borders of several streams which run +through the neighbouring valley. With the pine trees the Indians formed +rafters to the cottages, and thatches with the long grass and reeds. In +a short time they thus rendered them in some degree habitable. I +observed that though my father was allowed to go where he liked, the +rest of the party were narrowly watched, so that they could not attempt +to make their escape. When he spoke to Manco on the subject, and +expostulated with him on detaining the rest of the travellers, the +Indian chiefs reply was short but firm. + +"It is necessary for the sake of Peru that they should be kept +prisoners," he observed; "had it not been for you and the padre, they +would probably have lost their lives. I can trust you if you will give +me your oath not to betray what has occurred or what you suspect, but I +cannot trust them. When your son is able to move, you shall proceed on +your journey; but they must remain here till it is safe to set them at +liberty." + +"I do not seek to pry into your secrets, and should be guilty of the +greatest ingratitude by saying a word even to injure you or your +people," said my father. "I am doubly anxious to reach Cuzco, lest my +family not hearing of me from thence, should become alarmed." + +"Write a few lines to assure your family of your safety, and it shall +reach them long before they could hear from you were you to write from +our ancient capital. Trust that to me," answered Manco, and he was +afterwards found as good as his word. + +The observations which the Indian chief let fall made me suspect that +some plan was forming among the Indians to emancipate themselves from +the Spanish yoke; and when I mentioned my surmises to my father, I found +that he was of the same opinion, but he warned me not to mention my +thoughts to any one. + +"The less we know on the subject the better for us," he observed. +"Living under the protection of the Spanish government, it might be our +duty to warn them of danger, while it is equally our duty not to betray +those who have trusted us." + +"A curious sort of protection they afford us, when they allow bands of +robbers, who were near cutting our throats, to scour the country +unmolested," I answered. "For my part, I think the Indians would be +perfectly right to emancipate themselves from the galling chains which +enthral them." + +"But were they to make the attempt, they could not do so," said my +father. "The discipline and gold of a civilised people will always in +the end prevail over a half savage one, in spite of their bravery and +resolution." + +Our conversation was interrupted by the entrance of Manco. No longer a +hunted fugitive, he now walked with the air of a chieftain, his costume +also being that of an Inca noble of old. Although the dress had long +been disused, except on festive occasions, he had now assumed it to give +him greater authority among his countrymen. + +We found at the huts a considerable number of women and children, some +of them belonging to the Indians who were with us, and some, I +concluded, related to others who were absent. They were evidently +collected here to be beyond the reach of the Spaniards, and to avoid the +flagitious Repartimiento and Meta, the more rigid imposition of which +was about that time, I knew, causing great discontent among the people. +The Spaniards, long accustomed to treat the Peruvians as inferior +beings, destitute alike of feeling and courage, forgot that even a worm +will at times turn and attempt to bite the foot that presses it. + +I had observed at times a larger number of persons than had accompanied +us to the village; and I remarked several strangers, dressed in skins +and feathers, who came and went, and again speedily returned, as if they +had gone only to a short distance. I told our host that I had observed +this, and inquired where the people came from. + +"From a place where the foot of a white man has never trod," he replied. +"If you were strong and well. I might take you to it, and might show +you wonders you little expect to behold, so fully do I trust; but the +time may come when, free of danger, I may gratify your curiosity." + +I expected that he alluded to one of those ancient villages which I had +heard of as existing in the heart of the mountains, and never discovered +by the Spaniards; where the inhabitants had continued in the enjoyment +of liberty, and the laws and customs of their ancestors. I had often +wished to visit one of those remnants of antiquity, and I became doubly +eager to do so, on finding myself in the proximity of one of them; but +Manco assured me that it would be utterly impossible to conduct me there +for a long time to come. + +We had now spent a week at the huts, and I was so far recovered as to be +able to mount a horse and move about on foot with the aid of a stick; +and as my father was very anxious to proceed on his journey, we agreed +to start the following day. On hearing that we were about to depart, +the other travellers wished to accompany us; but the Indians would not +hear of it, and, I observed, kept a stricter watch than usual over them. +Manco showed great unwillingness to part with us. + +"Go as you desire it, my friends," he said. "You are at liberty to do +as you judge best; but for your own sake, as well as mine, I would have +had you remain. However, as go you must, I will send some of my people +to escort you on your way; and one of them shall follow you as your +servant till you return home. He will obey you in all things, but you +must not blame him if he is absent during a few hours at times from you. +You must pay him no wages, but you must not send him from you; and if +you are asked where you found him, say in a mountain village, and that +he wished to come with you to see the world." + +The next morning our new attendant made his appearance. He was a small, +active-looking man, of a lightish rusty-red colour. His dress was much +as is usually worn at the present day, consisting of loose trousers of +coarse brown cloth, fastened round the waist by a girdle, and a woollen +shirt of a dark blue colour. His poncho, which served as his outer +garment, was of alpaca wool of the same hue as his shirt; and on his +head he wore a broad-brimmed hat, while his sandals were of untanned +leather, just covering his toes, and secured by a thong round the ankle. +He took charge of a mule laden with our clothes and a supply of +provisions. + +Manco took an affectionate farewell of us as we were mounting our horses +at the door of the hut. He pressed our hands as he said-- + +"We may meet again, dear friends, at some future time, when the children +of the sun may dare to lift up their heads in the land where their +fathers ruled. Till then, farewell." + +We found, a little farther on, a band of a hundred men, well armed with +muskets and rifles, ready to escort us; and a young man of the Inca +family, their leader, told us that they were to accompany us to help us +to cross the difficult barriers which surrounded the spot we were in, +and to watch us till we reached the neighbourhood of Cuzco. + +Accustomed as I was to mountain scenery, I should not before have +thought it possible for any four-footed animals to climb up the rugged +precipices, over which the Indians led and pushed our horses and mules. +In some places they were literally hauled up with ropes, and let down +again on the other side. My kind guides assisted me up and down also, +though I had nearly recovered my usual strength. A number of streams +crossed our path, adding not a little to its difficulties. + +Our animals were generally driven into the water and compelled to swim +across, being then hauled up on the other side. We passed by means of a +curious kind of bridge called a Huano. It was formed of a thick rope, +which is carried by means of a lighter line across the chasm. The +lighter line was carried across by some powerful swimmer, or by a man +holding on to the mane of one of the horses or mules. On the rope ran a +roller, to which was fastened a piece of wood, and to the wood the +passenger was secured; the transit was made more easy by two light +lines, by which the piece of wood was drawn from side to side. Several +of the Indians went first across. I watched them in their dizzy +transit, and I thought, if the rope breaks, what will become of them? +When it came to my turn to cross, I held my head as high as I could, and +crossed my legs over the thick rope, which I grasped with my hands. I +did not dare to turn to look into the deep gulf below; for strong as my +nerves were, I felt that if I did, I should have let go my hold. I was +not sorry to find my head knocking against the shrubs and rocks on the +opposite side. My father followed me; and then the whole body, one by +one, passed over. Having got into rather less intricate country, the +captain of our escort told us that from this place forward we must no +longer remain in company, though he had orders from his chief to watch +us till all probability of danger was past. + +Accordingly, my father and I, and our new Indian servant, prepared to +proceed alone. We were still several days' journey from Cuzco. We +slept as before at those most wretched of all inns the Indian tambos, +though wherever we stopped we could not help remarking that we were +treated with more than usual kindness and respect, which we suspected +was owing to our being under the special protection of their chief. +That also we were not deserted by our guardians, we had reason to know. +On more than one occasion I had observed one or two figures hovering on +the brow of some hill, or appearing from behind trees, bushes, or rocks. +I perceived once one of them started up close to us. I pointed him out +to our attendant, who had likewise seen him. With a significant look he +answered, "Fear not them--they will not injure us." + +We encountered but few travellers, and I do not recollect any other +occurrence worthy of being narrated daring our journey. + + + +CHAPTER FIVE. + +CUZCO DESCRIBED--WE ARE MADE PRISONERS--ANXIETY FOR THOSE AT HOME. + +"Behold Cuzco!" exclaimed our Indian guide, as, throwing himself from +his horse, he knelt in adoration of the glorious luminary, whose rays +were just then throwing a mantle of gold over the crumbling walls of a +mighty fortress, which protected the holy city of his ancestors, the +capital of the Incas. + +We had just reached the brow of an elevated ridge which forms one side +of the fertile and extensive valley in which Cuzco stands, built, like +ancient Rome, on a number of hills or slight rises. To the north of the +city, on the summit of a lofty eminence, appeared the still dark and +frowning fortress of Cyclopean architecture, composed of stones of vast +magnitude. When I afterwards visited it, I was surprised to find the +extraordinary nicety with which, without any cement, they were joined +together; and I cannot tell with what machinery the Peruvians could have +raised blocks so enormous to such heights, or how they could have fitted +them, shaped as they are in so many various forms, with exactness so +remarkable. Had I believed in the existence of giants, I should have +supposed that they alone could have lifted such vast masses into the +positions they hold. Many of the modern residences of the conquerors +stand on the foundations of the ancient buildings of the Peruvians, and +from among them we saw towering upwards the spires and towers of the +magnificent cathedral, of the convents of Saint Augustine and La Merced, +and of a number of other fine churches. We had not long to contemplate +this scene of the ruins of the past and of modern splendour, as it was +necessary to reach the city before dark; and the setting sun warned us +that we had not much time to lose. We were questioned, when we entered, +whence we had come; but before we could speak, our Indian attendant +stepped forward and gave an answer that satisfied the guard, and we +passed on. + +The inn we went to was the best in the city, but it could boast of +affording us little comfort, though, as we were accustomed to rough +fare, that mattered little. At daybreak I was on foot, as I was anxious +to see the city; and with our Indian attendant as my guide, I wandered +through the larger portion of it before breakfast. We reached a +collection of ruined walls, composed of huge masses of rock. + +"On this spot," said the Indian, bending reverentially towards the sun, +just then rising over the walls of the city, "stood the great temple +where our fathers worshipped the God in whom they trusted; away to the +right, where now those convent walls appear, were the residences of the +beautiful virgins of the sun; and in these fields of corn and lucerne +which surround us were once laid out the magnificent gardens of the +temple, filled with menageries of all the animals of our country, with +aviaries of birds of many-coloured plumage, with fountains, and trees, +and flowers, and ornaments of vast size, of gold and silver and precious +stones, many in the form of the shrubs and plants among which they +stood, and of workmanship so admirable that they seemed to vie with them +in elegance and beauty. But the greedy spoiler came, and behold, +stranger, what he made it! Alas! this garden is but an example of the +condition to which our unhappy country has been reduced." + +The Indian was silent, and seemed lost in gloomy reflection. I, too, +thought of the past; and as I did so, the magnificent Temple of the Sun +appeared before me, with its walls resplendent with the golden ornaments +which surrounded them, and its wide courts crowded with votaries in +their many-coloured costumes and head-dresses and robes of feathers, +eagerly watching for the rising of the luminary they worshipped. I +fancied I could hear their voices, and could see the mighty mass below +me, their plumes waving in the breeze as they joined the joyous shout +raised by their friends above them. + +"Yes, a day of bitter retribution will ere long arrive," exclaimed my +companion. The deep, low, and concentrated tone of his voice roused me +from my reveries, he appeared unconscious that he had spoken. "Come, +sir," he said, "we will proceed." + +As I walked through the streets of Cuzco. I was struck with the air of +antiquity which many of the buildings wore; and I could not help +regretting the worse than Gothic cruelty and ignorance of the Spaniards, +which had destroyed the numberless magnificent edifices of its former +inhabitants. We spent three days in the city, and on the fourth took +our departure, accompanied by Ithulpo. I learned that twenty leagues +only from the city commence the territories of the unsubdued Indians, +who will allow no stranger to enter their country. As I looked towards +the distant mountains which form their bulwarks, I fancied that it must +be a land full of romance and interest, and I longed to penetrate into +it. I was before long to have my wish gratified, through means I little +contemplated. + +Our course was, however, now in a contrary direction, north and west, +towards the sea. We had proceeded two days' journey, when, at the +urgent request of Ithulpo, we turned aside to rest at a town among the +mountains. + +"It is inhabited chiefly by my people," he observed. "To-morrow they +perform a ceremony, at which I wish to assist, and which you will like +to behold." + +We ascended by a narrow and winding path among the mountains to the +town, where we were lodged in the best house it possessed, and where the +inhabitants vied with each other in paying us attention. The next +morning, when I went out, I was surprised to see the place crowded with +Indians dressed in the ancient costume of the country, of which +certainly the pictures I have since seen in England and France do not +give at all a correct idea. They wore feather head-dresses, and their +cloaks and trains were likewise trimmed with feathers; and if not quite +so picturesque, were more suited to their convenience than the scanty +feather kilts in which they are made to appear. Having breakfasted, my +father and I followed the crowd at a little distance to see what was +going to occur. Among them we observed, raised above their heads, a +gaily ornamented litter or covered palanquin, in which sat a person +richly dressed with the regal border or red fringe of the Incas on his +head. We learnt that he was intended to represent Atahualpa. On +pressed the crowd with shouts and songs towards a large square before +us; there they halted, when from some buildings in which they had been +concealed, appeared another party dressed in armour with guns in their +hands, and one or two small pieces of cannon following them. They all +wore masks, and were intended to represent Spaniards. One more hideous +than the rest was evidently Pizarro, and by his side stood the priest +Vicente de Yalverde. They approached the litter, and the monk addressed +the Inca in a long harangue. Atahualpa replied, when a terrific shriek +was heard; the litter was overthrown, and the Inca was dragged among the +Spaniards. A mock combat took place, but the Indians were driven back; +and then arose the most melancholy cries and groans ever heard. It was +no imitated grief, for to such a pitch had they worked up their +imaginations, that they really fancied that their Inca was again torn +from them. At last they retired, and a new scene in the drama +commenced. + +A number of Spaniards came forth from the building to which they had +carried off the Inca, and seated themselves as if holding a council. +Atahualpa was next brought out. He stood, with downcast looks and hands +bound, before his judges, waiting his doom. One man only pleaded his +cause, the others brought forth numberless arguments for his +condemnation--a good satire on those by which the real Inca was judged +to be worthy of death. At length one standing up, pronounced the +representative Atahualpa guilty, ordering him to immediate execution. +No sooner were the words uttered, than there arose from the crowd such +shrieks and cries, that I could scarcely believe them to be feigned. +Amid them the Inca was led to the place of execution, already prepared, +where stood a man with ferocious aspect with an axe uplifted in his +hands. The axe fell, and while the cries and groans increased, as I saw +a bloody head lifted up before me, I thought for an instant that the man +had really been killed. I soon, however, saw that the bloody head was +merely a block of wood, while a piece of cloth was thrown over the +person who had represented the Inca to conceal him from view. The +Indians, however, appeared to be as deeply affected with grief as if +they had really just seen their beloved monarch slaughtered before their +eyes, to such a pitch were their imaginations worked up by the scene +which had been acted. Had I not witnessed what I describe, I could +scarcely have believed it possible; and as the Cholas sang their songs +of mourning, the tears streamed down their cheeks, the groans seemed to +come from the hearts of the men, and every countenance wore an +expression of the most profound sorrow. Just at that moment I saw a man +hurrying up the path which led into the village from the valley below. +Almost breathless with exertion, he uttered a few words to the first he +met. His communication flew like lightning among the crowd. They +scattered in every direction, as if a thunderbolt had fallen among them. +Masks were torn off and hastily concealed, dresses were changed, and +the block and axe, and all the things connected with the representation, +were carried away, while the people ran along the streets, and shut +themselves up in their houses in evident fright. + +We were not long in ascertaining the cause of the commotion. As I +watched the approach to the town, I caught sight of the bayonet and +shako of a soldier rising above the brow of a hill. Another and another +followed, till about twenty men and two Spanish officers formed in the +square of the town. That they had come for no good purpose, was soon +made manifest by their charging a small party of the Indians who had +neglected to escape from the square. So unexpected was the attack, that +some were captured, while others were cruelly wounded before they could +conceal themselves. The soldiers having thus whetted their thirst for +blood, hurried from cottage to cottage, breaking open the doors and +dragging out the terrified inmates. Those who were found with a mask, +or any portion of the ancient Indian costume about them, proving that +they had taken part in the forbidden representation, were without mercy +shot, in spite of the entreaties and cries of their wives and children. +A considerable number were also dragged from their huts and bound +together with ropes, preparatory to being carried off as prisoners. + +We had hitherto remained concealed in the house where we had rested for +the night, and which had been unvisited by the soldiers. Had we been +able to leave the village unobserved, we would gladly have done so to +avoid contact with the troops, though we had no reason to apprehend +ill-treatment from them. My father had desired Ithulpo to have our +horses and baggage ready to start at a moment's notice. While we +remained shut up in the house, we could only judge of what was going on +by the sounds we heard. The shots and cries had grown fainter, and +thinking that the soldiers must have got to a distance, we considered +this a good opportunity to set out. Ithulpo had been watching them +through a hole in the wall of an enclosure, at a little distance from +the cottage within which our animals were to be kept ready. I looked +cautiously out of the door of the cottage, and seeing no one near, I ran +round to where Ithulpo was posted. I told him that we were ready to +start. + +"I was coming to tell you that now is our time to start," he replied. +"I wish that I was certain that all the soldiers are together, for I am +afraid that some may be left to guard the outlet to the village; but we +must run the risk." + +We accordingly brought the horses round. Our baggage was soon strapped +on, and mounting immediately, we set off at a brisk pace, followed by +the well-wishes of our host, towards the only outlet to the village. +Several houses were in flames, and more than one apparently dead Indian +met our view. A short hour had made a sad change in the peaceful +village, which now looked as if it had been stormed and sacked by a +cruel enemy. We had no time to stop to examine whether any of the +prostrate forms we saw were still alive, so we pushed on. Just, +however, as we reached the top of the pathway down the mountain, a party +of soldiers, with an officer at their head, appeared suddenly before us. +It was impossible to escape notice, so we attempted to pass them. + +"Stop!" cried the officer, presenting a pistol. "Who are you?" + +"English travellers, on the road to Lima," answered my father. + +"Say rather English abettors of rebels," exclaimed the officer fiercely. +"We find you in a village encouraging the ignorant people by your +presence to break the law. You are our prisoners." + +My father pleaded in vain that we had no intention of breaking the law, +or encouraging others to do so. + +"You may make your excuse to the government of Lima," answered the +officer; and he ordered us to remain where we were on pain of being +shot. + +A number of prisoners were collected together, and we had no doubt that +he had heard from one of them of our being present at the forbidden +ceremony we had witnessed. The bugle now sounded the recall, and soon +afterwards the rest of the soldiers returned, dragging after them a +number more of wretched prisoners. They appeared to be the principal +people in the village; and whether guilty or not of the crimes charged +against them, they were dragged away from their homes, to undergo more +suffering on their road to their place of trial than they would deserve +even if proved guilty. + +The unhappy men were lashed together by the wrists two and two, all +being likewise joined by a single stout rope; while blows and curses +urged them on if they did not move fast enough to please their tyrants. +Had the inhabitants of the village united bravely, they might have +overpowered the soldiers and rescued their friends; but terror-stricken, +they were afraid to show themselves. + +Neither my father nor I were in any way molested, but a soldier was +placed on each side of us and our Indian attendant, with orders to shoot +us if we attempted to escape, a command they seemed very ready to obey. +The word was then given to move on, and we commenced our descent of the +mountain, a body of eight soldiers bringing up the rear. We addressed +the officers several times to learn why we were thus treated, but the +only answer the one in command deigned to make was-- + +"You are found in communication with rebel Indians, and there are +suspicions against you." + +I thought of our having aided the escape of the Indian chief Manco, and +feared that by some means the circumstance might have become known. If +such were the case, I trembled for the safety of my dear mother and +brothers and sisters. I thought of all the insults and annoyance to +which they must have been subjected while our house was being searched, +and my father's papers and books being examined, which I knew they would +be, by the officers of justice. I did not, however, communicate my +thoughts to my father, as I felt that if it suggested the same idea to +him, it would cause him much pain and anxiety. + +I endeavoured therefore, as we rode on, to amuse him by conversation; +but I am afraid I succeeded very ill. Ithulpo was very gloomy and +silent, evidently brooding over the wrongs his countrymen had so long +endured, and were still receiving, from their oppressors. At the foot +of the mountain we found another party of soldiers concealed in a wood, +and guarding the horses of our escort. The whole then mounted; and as +we proceeded at a more rapid rate, the captive Indians were goaded on +more cruelly to keep up with us. Ithulpo still said not a word; but as +his eyes were now and then turned towards his countrymen, I observed +that looks of intelligence were exchanged between them. Some shrieked +with pain; others returned glances of rage at their tormentors; a few +almost fainted, till stirred up again to proceed; and two, who had been +wounded, actually dropped down, and as they were left in the rear, the +report of musketry told what had been their fate. The fear of a similar +catastrophe deterred others from giving in while they had any strength +remaining to drag onwards their weary limbs. + +My father's kind heart was bursting with indignation and grief; but from +the surly answers he received, he saw that it would be hopeless to plead +for the unhappy beings. + +"A day of bitter retribution will come, ere long, for this tyranny," he +observed. "Such conduct must arouse even the most long-enduring from +their apathy. Even as it is, how entirely has Spain failed to reap any +benefit from her apparently glorious conquest of this new world! or +rather, I may say, from the mode in which that conquest was conducted, +it has brought on her a heavy curse instead of a blessing. Since she +gained America, she has gradually declined in wealth, intelligence, and +power; and if I mistake not the signs of the times, these beautiful +provinces will soon be wrested from her, though, alas, the seeds of +misgovernment and bigotry which she planted, will take ages more to +eradicate." + +Subsequent events, as my readers know, proved the correctness of my +father's observations. Spain no longer holds sway over any part of the +American continent; and the colonies she has planted, ever since +constantly plunged in civil war and anarchy, have been far outstripped +in civilisation by those peopled by the Anglo-Saxon race. + + + +CHAPTER SIX. + +ATTEMPT TO CROSS A DESERT--THE DISASTERS WE ENCOUNTERED. + +Our journey was irksome and disagreeable in the extreme. We marched on +each day as long as the horses and men could move; and we rested at +night, sometimes in farm-houses, or in the public _tambos_; but +frequently we took shelter within the ruins of forts or other buildings, +and often we were obliged to sleep on the hard ground, with our saddles +for our pillows and the starlit sky above our heads. As it was the +height of summer, this mattered little. We suffered, however, much from +the heat in the day-time, and we were compelled frequently to dismount +to lead our horses over the rugged places we had to pass. Day after day +the poor captives dropped through fatigue, till their numbers were much +thinned; but still we pushed on. We passed through a number of Indian +villages, the inhabitants of which looked out from their mat doors with +sad eyes on their unhappy countrymen; and we now discovered that the +object of the Spaniards in carrying them on was to strike terror into +the hearts of the people. When governors cannot manage a people so as +to gain their love, they attempt to rule them through their fears; but +such a government is never of long duration, and must ultimately bring +destruction on itself. We had marched for three days without finding +any habitations, when I saw the officers holding consultation together, +and evidently much perplexed. A halt was ordered, and inquiries made if +anybody knew the road. We had lost our way. The Indians had no +knowledge of that part of the country, nor had any of the soldiers. I +detected a gleam of intelligence in the countenance of Ithulpo, which +made me suspect that he could give the desired information if he chose; +but when asked, he denied all knowledge of the way. We took shelter +that night within the walls of a ruined village, which, from its +appearance, I judged had not been inhabited since the time of the +conquest, except as a temporary abode in the same manner as we used it. +It must have been a place of some extent, but the greater part was +concealed by trees and shrubs, and creeping plants, which had grown up +among the walls. Most of the buildings were of sun-dried bricks; but +others, within one of which we were placed, were of masses of stone, +like the fortress of Cuzco. It had probably been the residence of a +chief or noble. It seemed strange that the Spaniards should not have +known so remarkable a spot; but though they did not, I was certain that +the Indians were well acquainted with it. + +The prisoners were all driven together like a flock of sheep within one +of the enclosures, and a sentry was placed over them, with orders to +shoot any who might attempt to escape. After the horses had been +picketed in a grassy spot close to the ruins, the soldiers lighted their +fires to dress their evening meal, while the two officers sat themselves +down on a fragment of stone and smoked their cigars, taking no notice of +us. Our horses and luggage mule had been placed with the others under a +guard; so they thought, I suppose, that we should not attempt to escape. +Meantime my father and I sat at a little distance, watching the +proceedings of our very unwelcome companions, while Ithulpo stood near, +casting every now and then towards them glances expressive of the most +intense hatred, and a desire of vengeance. The sun was still low, but +his rays yet tinged the topmost branches of the trees and the lofty +ranges of mountains in the distance. The soldiers had brought skins of +wine and plenty of good cheer with them; and when they had eaten, they +passed the wine-skins round right merrily, the officers joining in the +carouse. Instead of pouring the wine into cups, they lifted the skins +high above their heads, and without touching the vessel to their lips, +allowed the wine to run down their throat in a gentle stream. As we +were close enough to them to be easily watched, the officers, I suppose, +thought that we should not attempt to move away. Ithulpo had stowed a +sort of knapsack he carried with some dried meat and bread, which he now +produced, and it served to satisfy our appetites; but we had no wine, +and our surly guards did not deign to offer us any. + +"Do not repine, sirs, at the want," he observed. "I will show you a +pure stream, the water of which, ere to-morrow's sun has set, those +soldiers will value more than the finest wine their country can +produce." + +The sun went down, and the shades of night came rapidly on, but still +the Spaniards continued their debauch. They had apparently forgotten us +and their other prisoners; for though by the light of their fires we +could clearly see them, sitting as we were under the shadow of a wall, +we were no longer visible to them. Ithulpo came and sat himself down +beside me. + +"Could we not manage to get away from these people?" I asked in a +whisper. + +"Not now," he answered. "The sentries would give the alarm if we +attempted to take the horses, and without them we cannot move. +To-morrow we shall have a better opportunity, and we may help some of my +poor countrymen to escape at the same time." + +"Why do you expect that a good opportunity to escape will occur?" I +inquired. + +"I cannot at present reply to your question," he said. "Those who now +guard us will no longer be able to do so. Trust to me. You will enter +Lima as free men, and no one will appear as a witness against you, to +support the false accusation these people have made." + +I forbore to question him further, but there was something very +mysterious in his look and manner; and at first the horrid idea occurred +to me that he had by some means contrived to poison the Spaniards, for +otherwise I could not account for the confidence with which he +pronounced his prediction. However, I endeavoured to banish the +suspicion as too dreadful to be entertained. At length the commanding +officer seemed to recollect that he had duties to attend to. Fresh +guards were set over the prisoners and the horses, wood was collected +and the fires were made up, and a sentinel was posted near the spot, +under shelter of a wall, which we had selected for our place of rest. +Ithulpo got leave to bring us our saddles and horse-trappings to serve +us for beds, and he likewise brought us our portmanteaus and +saddle-bags, which he placed near us. The soldiers threw themselves on +the ground, and were very soon fast asleep. Our sentry also, from the +manner his head every now and then gave a sharp nod, was evidently very +drowsy. The heat of the weather, the exertion he had undergone, and the +wine he had drunk, were quite enough to account for this. I also at +last fell asleep. My eyes had been closed for about a couple of hours, +when I was awakened by Ithulpo touching my shoulder. I sat up, and +observed that he had the wine-skins emptied by the soldiers hanging on +his arm. + +"Follow me," he whispered. "We are not going to escape; but you are +thirsty, and I will show you a pure spring, where you may drink your +fill, and you will be better able to endure the heat of to-morrow's +sun." + +Silently following him, as he led the way among the ruins, I found that +we had reached a thick and apparently impenetrable wood. Without +stopping, however, he went direct to a spot where the branches yielded +easily to his hand. A winding path appeared before us, proceeding along +which, we arrived in an open forest glade. On one side rose a high +rock, which seemed part of a range of cliffs forming the side of a +mountain. The murmuring sound of water met my ear, and by the faint +starlight I discovered a stream gushing forth from the rock, and finding +its way in a narrow rivulet through the glade. + +"The white man thinks that the discovery of a gold mine will bring him +all the wealth he can desire; but the time has come when he would gladly +exchange all the gold and silver hidden within yon mountains for one +draught of that pure stream," muttered Ithulpo, as I stooped my head to +drink at the fountain. "Drink--drink while you can," he continued in +the same low tone. "It is more than wealth, it is life itself; it +fertilises, it invigorates, it cleanses, it blesses. Without it the +world would be but a sterile desert, unfit for the habitation of man; +while gold, which the white men value so much, has ever proved the curse +of our country. They value it because they think it scarce, while we, +who know the deep mines where in vast heaps it lies hid from their +sight, place it at its true worth, below iron and copper, or even silver +or tin." + +While Ithulpo was thus speaking, he was employed in washing out and +filling the skins he had brought with water. I also filled a couple of +flasks with the pure fluid. We then retraced our steps by the way we +had come, I assisting him in carrying the somewhat heavy burden. We +reached the camp unobserved by the drowsy sentries. I was wondering +what the Indian intended doing with the skins, when, begging me to lie +down and rest, he took up two of the skins, and crept cautiously away +towards the enclosure where his countrymen were confined. After a +little time he returned, and again took the path to the fountain to +replenish the skins. I was afraid he would have been discovered, but he +went about the work so cautiously and silently, that he altogether +escaped the observation of the sentries. After he had given the +prisoners all the water they required, he came back to where we were +lying, and threw himself on the ground near us. The rest of the night +passed quietly away; and notwithstanding the painful position in which +we were placed, I slept soundly. I was aroused by the sound of a bugle, +and found the soldiers getting under arms and preparing to march. Our +baggage was replaced by Ithulpo, who I saw watched it carefully. The +men mounted, the prisoners were dragged out from their resting-place, +and we commenced our day's journey. + +An extensive plain was before us, with a few rugged and barren heights +scattered over it. As we proceeded vegetation grew more and more +scanty, till after we had marched scarcely half a mile, it ceased +altogether. We had slept, we found, on the borders of a desert. The +ground was at first composed of a mixture of rock and clay, over which +the sea had evidently rolled in former ages; but as we proceeded it +became more loose and broken, till it changed into a soft shifting sand, +into which our horses' feet sank deep at every step they made. + +The poor prisoners, already worn out with their long journey, appeared +scarcely able to drag on their weary limbs through it. Of its extent we +were unable to judge, but the commander seemed to fancy that in a short +time we should reach firmer and more fertile ground, where we should +find water and halt to breakfast. The sun, which rose in a cloudless +sky on our right, showed that we were proceeding in the direction we +wished to follow--towards the north. + +"Forward, my men," shouted the officer. "In an hour or two we shall be +out of this ill-conditioned spot, and find rest and refreshment." + +The soldiers lighted their cigars and urged on their horses, while they +dealt their blows freely on the backs of the Indians to quicken their +speed. + +I observed a peculiar smile on the countenance of Ithulpo, as the +officer spoke of soon reaching a place of rest. Our attendant had, I +found, managed to distribute a supply of the highly prized cacao among +his countrymen; and while their features wore a look of sullen +indifference as they received the ill-merited blows, I remarked that +they seemed to bear up against the fatigue better than they had before +done. As the sun rose higher the heat increased, till it became almost +insupportable. The officers spoke earnestly together for some time, and +were evidently growing anxious as to the road we were taking. At length +their voices grew louder and louder, as if disputing on the point, for +there was very little semblance of discipline among them. Then they +called up several of their men one after the other, but could not gain +the information they required. Some of the prisoners were next brought +up, but they either could not or would not say whether we were pursuing +the proper course, their countenances assuming an expression of the most +perfect ignorance and apathy. Still we pushed on, the Spaniards trying +to urge their horses still faster through the heavy sand. Before us +rose a bright glittering haze, through which objects every now and then +appeared seemingly in the far distance--hills, and trees, and rocks, and +lakes, and streams of pure water; but as we advanced they vanished, and +a few barren mounds and loose stones alone were found, while the +supposed water was altogether a mocking deception. To the right hand +and to the left, the same inhospitable desert seemed to stretch out far +away; and we had already advanced so deeply into it, that the officers +probably supposed that there would be as much risk in returning as in +going on. On therefore we went, the soldiers having no mercy on the +prisoners, whom they urged forward, whenever they attempted to slacken +their pace, with the points of their swords, till the blood trickled in +streams down the backs of these miserable beings. We were riding just +behind the main body of the soldiers, followed by Ithulpo and the +baggage mules. The generous, kind heart of my father was almost +bursting with indignation, as he saw this piece of cruelty. + +At last, as an Indian more weary than the rest sunk to the ground, and a +soldier was about to plunge his sword into his body, he could restrain +himself no longer. + +"Hold, wretch!" he exclaimed. "Add not murder to your cruelty." + +The soldier, taken by surprise, did not strike the fatal blow till his +horse had carried him past the fainting Indian; but, balked of his prey, +his anger was kindled against my father, and turning round, he made a +cut at him with his sword. Fortunately I carried a heavy riding-whip, +with which I was able to parry the blow. The man did not attempt to +repeat it, for the junior officer turning round, observed the act, and +called him to order; but it showed us what we were to expect if we +excited the anger of our captors. I could not withstand the despairing +look the poor wretch cast on us as he thought we were about to pass him +and to leave him to his fate; so throwing myself from my horse, I lifted +his head from the ground. My father stopped also, and so did Ithulpo. + +"On, on!" shouted the rear-guard of the Spaniards. "On, or we will fire +at you." + +"We will follow immediately," replied my father. "On my word of +honour--on the word of an Englishman." + +The Spaniards had never known that word broken, so they allowed us to +stop to help the Indian. One of our baggage mules was lightly laden, +and in spite of the threats of the soldiers we lifted him upon it. I +had, as I mentioned, filled a small spirit-flask with water, and unseen +I poured a few drops down his parched throat. This much revived him, +and by urging on our animals, we were soon able to overtake the already +weary horses of the Spaniards. + +The time for breakfast had long since passed, but still no signs of a +resting-place appeared. On the contrary, the sand became finer and +deeper, and the dreary expanse before us seemed to lengthen out to the +horizon. As the sun also rose higher in the sky, his unobstructed rays +darted down with greater force upon our heads. There had been a slight +breeze in the morning, blowing fresh from over the snowy summits of the +Cordilleras; but that had now died entirely away, and not a breath of +air stirred the stagnant atmosphere. The heat at length became almost +insupportable, while our eyes could scarcely bear the glare of the sun +on the white glittering sand. + +To do the Spaniards credit, they bore up bravely for a long time against +the heat and thirst and fatigue which assailed them. The horses, +however, which had only been scantily supplied with water the night +before, began to knock up--their ears dropped, their heads hung down, +and their respiration became thick and fast. Ithulpo had supplied my +father and me with cacao, by chewing a piece of which occasionally, we +avoided any feeling of hunger; and as we also wetted our lips, when they +became parched, with the water from our flasks, we did not suffer much +from thirst. Still the sensation of oppression and fatigue was very +painful. We received too, ere long, a warning of what might be our +fate, in the spectacle which met our sight. The sun had reached his +meridian height, and was descending towards the waters of the Pacific, +and still it appeared that we had made no more progress than in the +morning, when we came upon the bleached bones of several mules and +horses, and by their side appeared, just rising above the sand, the +skeletons of three human beings. It appeared as if they had all been +struck down together by the same fiery blast. The soldiers, as we +passed, turned their looks aside, without uttering a word, each one +feeling that he might shortly become like those ghastly remnants of +mortality. I observed that the heads of the animals were all turned +towards the south, by which I judged that thus they had probably +travelled over a greater distance of the burning desert than we had yet +passed, so that we were yet not half over our difficulties. + +"Those skeletons show that we are on the high road across the desert," I +remarked to my father. + +"I am afraid not, David," he answered. "They may have lost their way, +and we have stumbled on them by chance." + +Such, I at once saw, was too likely to be the case. + +The gauze-like mist of which I had before spoken, now appeared to grow +more dense, and to lose its transparent appearance; at the same time +that the rays of the sun struck down with fiercer heat, and the +atmosphere grew more stagnant and oppressive. Some of the soldiers had +lighted their cigars, in the hope that the fumes of tobacco would +alleviate their thirst; and as the tiny jets of smoke left their mouths, +they went straight up towards the sky, not a breath existing to blow +them aside. Suddenly, as I turned my head to the left, I saw what +appeared to be a dark cloud rising from the earth. I pointed it out to +my father. Ithulpo had at the same time observed it. + +"Muffle up your heads in your ponchos, and push on for the love of +life," he exclaimed. "It is the sand-drift swept before a whirlwind. +On! on! or it will overwhelm us!" + +It was indeed an object to appal the stoutest heart. On it came, like a +black wall, rising higher and higher, and curling over our heads, till +the sky and the sun himself were obscured. The soldiers saw it and +trembled, for they knew its deadly power; whole regiments had before +been buried beneath that heavy canopy. Their only chance of safety, +they fancied, was to gallop through it. With frantic energy they dug +their spurs into the sides of their panting steeds. They no longer +thought of their miserable prisoners. Without a sensation of +commiseration, they left them to the dreadful fate they themselves +strove to escape. Neither could we do anything for them: if we stopped, +we also should lose our lives. As we followed the soldiers, we found +the Indians all huddled together, with looks of despair on their +countenances, watching the approach of the sand-drift. They had no +prospect of extricating themselves either; for the Spaniards had not +even cut the cords which bound them all together. I glanced at the +black wall of sand; it was still some way off. Could I leave my +fellow-creatures thus to perish horribly, without an attempt to save +them? No burning thirst, thanks to Ithulpo's precautions, had yet dried +up the sympathies of my heart. + +"What are you going to do, David?" asked my father, as he saw me throw +myself from my horse. + +"To give these poor fellows a chance of life," I answered, drawing out +my knife, and cutting away at their cords. + +"Your mother and sisters, my lad, must not be forgotten," he muttered; +"but stay, I will help you." + +As he said this he set to work to release the Indians, in which we were +directly joined by Ithulpo; the rear-guard, as they passed by, bestowing +many curses and threats of vengeance on our heads for our interference; +but they were too anxious to save their own lives to prevent us. +Scarcely a minute was lost. + +"Mount! mount! and ride on!" cried Ithulpo. + +Throwing our knives to the Indians, we leaped on our horses, and again +followed the direction we supposed the soldiers had taken. We had not +proceeded many yards when the wall of sand seemed to wheel round like an +extended line of infantry, and then to advance at double speed. To +escape it by galloping from it was now hopeless; so we turned our +horses' heads to face it. As we did so, a clear break appeared in one +part. + +"Let us make for yonder lighter spot," shouted my father. + +We did so. On came the dark wall; the sand swept by us, whirling round +and round our heads, blinding our eyes, and filling our ears and +nostrils. It was with difficulty even that we could breathe, as with +each respiration our mouths became choked with the sand. I endeavoured, +as well as I was able, to keep close to my father, though for a time it +was only by our voices, as we shouted to each other, that we were aware +of each other's position. We did our utmost to keep our horses' heads +in the direction the sand-storm came from, that we might the more +speedily pass through it. They breasted it bravely, though their +thick-drawn breath showed the pain they suffered; but they seemed to be +as well aware as ourselves of the necessity of exertion. It was with +difficulty, however, that we could even keep our seats, as, with our +hats pressed over our eyes, our ponchos drawn tight around us, and our +bodies bent down over their necks, we encouraged them to proceed with +bit and rein. We were making all the time, in reality, but little real +progress, as I soon discovered; their utmost exertion being required to +lift their legs out of the sand, which was rapidly collecting round us. + +On a sudden, a dark mass swept towards us. I know not how it was,--I +believe I must have turned to my right,--I kept calling to my father as +before; but oh, what horror--what agony seized my soul when he did not +answer! and as I endeavoured to pierce the thick mass of sand which +surrounded me, I could nowhere see him. I could not tell which way to +turn. I felt lost and bewildered, and I believed that my last moment +had arrived--a dreadful death was to be my lot. I did not regard +myself; it was for my noble father I felt. "O that I could have died +with him!" I thought. My brave horse, however, still exerted himself +to save his own life and mine, when I had ceased to care what became of +me, by continuing to lift his feet above the overwhelming sand-drifts. +My only wish was to find my father; but so completely was I bewildered +that I knew not whether to turn to the right hand or to the left. His +horse might have sunk down, I thought, and then in a few moments he +would for ever have been covered up from mortal sight; or, overcome with +fatigue and the suffocating atmosphere, he might have fallen, and been +unable to regain his steed. Or happily he might have passed through the +sand-drift in safety, and have been all the time suffering with anxiety +for my sake. But this hope was very transient; the predominant feeling +was that my father was lost, and that I was about to share his fate. I +was thus giving way to despair, when I was aware of a considerable +decrease in the density of the sand-laden atmosphere; the last breath of +the fierce whirlwind passed by; the sun shone forth bright and clear, +and I stood alone amid a sea of glittering sand. Oh, with what an +aching anxious heart I looked around, to see if the one object I sought +was visible on that dreary white expanse! Before me, there was nothing; +a few mounds and rocks alone were to be seen between me and the horizon; +but as I turned round just as the column of sand swept on, not thirty +paces behind me, with joy such as I cannot describe, I saw my father +stooping down and endeavouring to extricate his horse from the sand, +which had partially covered him. I hurried towards him, and leaping to +the ground, threw myself into his arms. For the moment all sensations +of fatigue or thirst were forgotten in the joy of recovering him. + +Knowing that my horse was strong, he had felt less anxiety on my account +than I had on his. With some exertion we cleared away the sand, and +once more got his horse upon his feet, though the poor animal appeared +scarcely able to move, much less to bear a man of my father's weight. +We had still one flask of water untouched. We drank a little, and with +a portion of the remainder washed the mouths and nostrils of our horses, +and poured a few drops down their throats, still keeping a little for +any further emergency. This very much revived them; and once more +mounting, we endeavoured to find our way across the desert. + +Since the sand-drift first overtook us, scarcely as much time had +elapsed as it has occupied to read the account I have given; but so +dreadful were the sensations I experienced, and so intense my anxiety, +that to me it appeared an age. The heat soon became almost as great as +before the storm, and the atmosphere as oppressive, warning us that, +though thus far preserved, we were still placed in a position of great +peril. It was now that I felt the benefit of the firm reliance in the +goodness of Providence, which my father had ever inculcated, and which +at this juncture supported him. + +"Courage, my dear boy," he exclaimed. "God has thus far preserved us. +He will still find the means of rescuing us." + +As he spoke, the dark wall of sand, which had been receding from us, +after whirling in various directions, seemed to settle down in a line of +undulating mounds in the distance; and on every side the horizon once +more became entirely clear. + +We naturally first tried to discover any traces of the Spanish cavalry; +and after straining my eyes for some time, I perceived a few dark +objects which seemed to be moving on towards the point which, from the +position of the sun, we judged to be the north. Some other objects +beyond them afforded us a fair hope of being able to find our way out of +this dreadful desert. I could not doubt that what I saw were the tops +of some tall trees, though at such a distance that their base was not +visible; indeed my father, who agreed with me that they were trees, was +of opinion that they grew on ground somewhat elevated above the sandy +plain. + +Towards them, therefore, we steered our course, as the Spaniards were +also probably doing. Our horses, we fancied, must have seen them +likewise, or their instinct told them that water was to be found in the +neighbourhood. We looked round in vain for Ithulpo and the Indians. +Not a sign of them could we perceive, and it would have been madness to +have attempted to search for them. Indeed, had we found them, we could +have rendered them no assistance. I was in hopes, indeed, that Ithulpo, +whose horse was strong, and who I suspected knew the country better than +he pretended to the Spaniards, would have found some means of escaping, +and of aiding his countrymen. We had, in truth, still too much to do in +attempting to preserve our own lives, to allow us to think much of +others. It would be assuming to be above humanity, did I not confess +this. + +The sun was already sinking low; and should we be unable to reach the +trees before dark, and be compelled to rest on the plain or wander about +it all night, we could scarcely hope to survive. The ground we passed +over was as smooth as if the receding tide had just left it. Not the +sign of a footstep of man or beast was to be seen, though here and there +a slight rise showed that some harder substance had offered an +impediment to the drifting sand. After toiling onwards for half an hour +at a very slow pace, we came upon a horse's head just rising from the +sand. He had died probably in attempting to extricate himself. Several +heaps showed that others--human beings, too probably--also lay beneath. + +They, at all events, were beyond all help. The horse I recognised, from +the head-trappings, as belonging to the officer commanding the party. +We were passing on, when we observed, a little on the right, a man +extended on his back. A movement of his arm showed me that he was not +dead, and that probably he was endeavouring to call our attention to +himself. + +"Though he is one of those who showed no pity to the poor Indians, we +must try what we can do for him," said my father; and we turned our +horses towards him. + +As he saw us approach, he mustered all his strength and tried to rise. + +"Water, water!" he muttered. "In mercy give me a drop of water!" + +It was the cruel officer himself. Still he was a fellow-creature. We +had a small portion of water in the flask. We might want it ourselves, +but still we could not leave him thus to die. So I dismounted, and +approached him with the flask, while my father held my horse, who showed +signs of an eagerness to rush on to the oasis we had discovered. The +officer, when he saw the flask, would have seized it, and drained off +the whole of its contents; but I held it back, and pouring out a few +drops in the cover, let them trickle down his throat. I thought of what +Ithulpo had said of water being of more value often than gold. Truly +those drops were more precious to the dying man; they had the effect of +instantly reviving him. Brightness came back to his glazed eyes, his +voice returned, and he was able to sit up, and even to make an attempt +to rise on his feet; but to do so was more than his strength would +allow. + +"Give me more water or I shall die," he said as he saw me replacing the +flask in my pocket. "My rascally troopers have deserted me, to try and +save their own worthless lives, and I have only you foreigners to depend +on." + +"I cannot give you more water," I answered. "I have but a few drops +left to moisten my father's and my own lips." + +"O leave them for me. I will give you your liberty, I will give you all +I possess in the world, for that small flask of water," he exclaimed. +"You will not require it, for beneath yonder trees, in the distance, you +will find a fountain where you may drink your fill. Have mercy, +stranger, have mercy!" + +It was difficult to withstand the poor wretch's earnest appeal. I +poured out a little more water, which he drank off at once. I then gave +him a small lump of cocoa; and scraping up a heap of sand, I placed him +leaning against it, so that he might feel any breath of air which might +blow; promising faithfully to return to bring him to the oasis, if we +were fortunate enough to reach it in safety. + +"But the voracious condors and the lions will come and destroy me, if I +remain here during the night alone," he shrieked out. "O take me with +you, generous Englishman, take me with you!" + +To do this was utterly impossible. My horse could scarcely carry me, +much less another person in addition. + +"Come, David," said my father; "you have done your utmost for this +miserable man. We risk our own lives by further delay." + +In spite, therefore, of the entreaties of the Spaniard, I again mounted +my horse. It just then occurred to me that if he had his pistols, he +might defend himself against any wild beasts. On my offering to load +them for him, he told me that he had thrown them away. So I gave him +one of my own, with a little ammunition, that he might reload it, if +required. He seized the weapon eagerly as I presented it. + +"Then you will not stay to help me, or carry me with you!" he exclaimed +fiercely as I rode off. "You will not!--then take that;" and levelling +at me the pistol which I had just given, he fired. The ball just grazed +my side, but did no further mischief. + +"The poor wretch is delirious with fear," observed my father, when he +found that I was uninjured. "Let us ride on." + +On we rode, but though we made some progress, the oasis was still in +appearance as far off as when first seen. The sun was sinking rapidly-- +it reached the horizon--it disappeared; the short twilight changed into +the obscurity of night; and the beacon by which we had hitherto directed +our course was no longer to be seen. The stars, however, shone brightly +forth; and I had marked one which appeared just above the clump of +trees. By that we now steered, though, I had too soon strong proof, the +instinct of our horses would have led them towards the oasis without our +guidance. Although it was night, the heat was intense; our throats were +dry, our lips were parched, and we were experiencing all the terrible +sensations of intolerable thirst. We had kept the remnant of the water +for a last resource, in case we should not reach the fountain. + +I think that for nearly another hour we had ridden on, my father not +having spoken a word all that time, when to my horror, without any +warning, he fell heavily from his horse. His hands had let go the +reins, and the animal, relieved of his burden, set off towards the +oasis. I threw myself from my horse. To lift him up and to pour some +water down his throat was the work of a moment. It instantly restored +him to consciousness. He appeared to have suffered no injury from his +fall. While I was thus engaged, my horse escaped from me and set off +after his companion. So engrossed, however, was I in tending my father, +that I scarcely noticed the occurrence. It was, of course, utterly +hopeless to attempt to recover the animals, and thus were we two left in +the middle of the desert without a prospect of escaping. + +O the horrors of that night! They can never be obliterated from my +memory. At first I thought of attempting to reach the oasis by walking; +but my father, though having sufficient strength to sit up, and, had he +not lost his horse, to ride, felt himself utterly unable to accomplish +the distance on foot. I had bitterly, indeed, to regret my momentary +carelessness in allowing my horse to escape from me. It might have been +the cause of my father's and my destruction. I have often since +thought, from being for one instant only off our guard, how much misery +and ruin may occur--how much wickedness and suffering may be the result! + +The air was still very sultry, and even the sand, on which we rested, +was very hot. Our last drop of water was consumed. My father did not +know it, but I had given it to him. I had begun to suffer dreadfully +from thirst. My throat seemed lined with a coating like the face of a +file, and my lips were hard and cracked; while the skin, from the drying +effects of the sun, the wind, and the sand, was peeling off my face. My +father did not feel so much pain as I did; but my strength, I fancied, +had in no way failed me, and I thought that, if I had kept my horse, I +could easily have walked by his side till we reached the fountain we +expected to find. We sat for some time without speaking. The stars +were shining in undimmed brilliancy above our heads from the dark blue +sky; not a breath of air was stirring, not a sound was heard. I never +endured a silence so profound, so solemn, and so painful. For a time I +almost fancied that I had become deaf. At length my father's voice, +which sounded deep and hollow, convinced me of the contrary. + +"David," he said, "I must not let you, my boy, remain here to die. You +may still be able during the night to reach the oasis, and the cool of +the morning will bring you renewed strength. If you reach it in safety, +you are certain to find our horses there, and you can return with them +and the flasks full of water to me. I feel quite certain that I can +hold out till then." + +I scarcely knew what to answer my father. Though I thought that I might +possibly reach the oasis, I saw the great difficulty there would be in +again finding him, without any means in that vast plain of marking his +position; and I felt far from confident that his strength would endure +till my return. + +"No, father," I answered; "I cannot leave you now. I should not find +you again, so that my going would not preserve you; and I will therefore +stay and share your fate." + +I need not mention all the arguments my father used to persuade me to +leave him, and how I entreated him to allow me to remain. At last he +consented that I should stay with him till just before daybreak, which +is in that, as in most climates, the coolest time generally of the +twenty-four hours. He then proposed that I should plant my whip, with a +piece of handkerchief tied to the end of it, on the top of the highest +rock or piece of ground I should find near, to serve as a mark for his +position, should he not by that time have sufficiently recovered his +strength to set out with me. + +"Perhaps I may be able to accompany you part of the way, and then you +will have a less distance to return to look for me," he observed. + +As he spoke, however, I could not help remarking, with grief, that there +was a hollow tone in his voice which betokened failing strength, while +his words were uttered with pain and difficulty. I could too well judge +of his sensations by my own; and gladly would I have given the room full +of gold which the unfortunate Inca, Atahualpa, promised to the greedy +Spaniards, for a flask of water to quench the burning thirst which was +consuming us. + +Hour after hour passed away, as we sat side by side on the sand. We +spoke but little; indeed I soon fell into a state of dreamy +unconsciousness, which was not sleep, though at the same time I could +not be said to be awake. All sorts of strange sights passed before me, +and strange noises sounded in my ears, though I was sensible that they +were not realities. I saw horses galloping before me, some with riders, +and others wild steeds with flowing manes. Troops of Indians came by in +their feathers and gay dresses, and soldiers marched past with colours +flying and bands playing; and hunters, and dogs, and animals of every +description. Indeed there appeared no end to the phantom shapes which +met my sight. + +In vain I endeavoured to arouse myself. A weight I could not throw off +pressed me to the ground. I cannot more particularly describe my +sensations; I only know that they were very dreadful. I was aware that +my father was near me, and that I wished to preserve him from some +danger; but I thought sometimes that we were at sea on a raft; at +others, that we were sliding down a snowy mountain, and that, though I +tried to catch some of the snow in my hand to cool my tongue, it +vanished before it reached my mouth; and then I felt that we were +sinking into the earth, which, as we sunk, grew hotter and hotter, till +it scorched my skin, and I shrieked out with the pain. I started and +lifted up my head; a pair of fierce glowing eyes met my view--a huge +jaguar or tiger stood before me! We eyed each other for a moment with a +fixed gaze. I was more astonished than alarmed; for owing to the state +of stupor from which I had been aroused, I had not time to be aware of +the peril in which we were placed. Fortunately, when I lay down, I had +taken my pistol from my belt, and placed it by my side, ready to grasp +it at a moment's warning. My first impulse was to seize it; and while +the jaguar still stood apparently considering whether he should spring +upon me and carry me off to the mountains to serve him as a banquet, I +lifted the weapon and fired it directly in his face. Startled by so +unexpected a reception, instead of springing forward, he turned round +with a roar of rage and pain, and galloped off across the desert. + +The report of the pistol aroused my father, who could scarcely believe +what had occurred. I regretted not having been able to kill the brute; +for, driven to extremity as we were, we should eagerly have drunk his +blood to attempt to quench our thirst. I reloaded my pistol in the +expectation of his return; and grown desperate as I was, I almost hoped +that he would do so, that I might have another chance of shooting him. +The possibility of this served effectually to prevent me from again +falling into a drowsy state, and I believe it was of essential service +to me. + +Another risk now occurred to me. Though at present perfectly calm, the +wind might suddenly arise, and should we fall asleep, the sand might be +drifted over us, and we should certainly be suffocated. No mariner, +whose ship is drifting on an unknown lee-shore, ever more earnestly +wished-for daylight than I did for the appearance of dawn, though I was +afraid it could but little avail my poor father. + +At length a faint streak appeared in the sky. It was a sign that we +must attempt to proceed on our way or abandon all hope of escape. I +called to my father, whose eyes were closed. + +"Yes, my boy," he answered, "I will come;" but when he attempted to +rise, I saw that his strength was not equal to the exertion. + +I felt also, when I tried, but little able to walk even by myself, much +less to help him onward. Still the effort must be made. I got myself +on my feet, and raised him also. We staggered onward in the direction, +I supposed, of the oasis. With a melancholy foreboding, however, I felt +that at the pace we were going we should never be able to reach it. +Still I resolved not to give in. Onward we went like two drunken men. +Every instant I thought we should fall to rise no more. I was certain +that if I quitted my father, it would only be to die apart from him, +when death would be doubly bitter. I could no longer see the star which +had before guided us. Either clouds had obscured it, or a mist had +arisen, or my eyes were growing dim. My father was pressing more +heavily on my arm. I tried to support him, but my strength was +insufficient. In the attempt we both fell together. All hope abandoned +me. + +"O God, protect my wife and children!" murmured my father. + +I also tried to pray, but with difficulty I could collect my thoughts +for a few moments together. I lifted myself on my knees by my father's +side, and raised his head from the sand. Daylight was now coming on, +and with anguish I saw by the expression of his features that if aid was +not speedily afforded, it would be too late to preserve his life. + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN. + +HOPE REVIVES--LIMA AND ITS SCENES AND CHARACTERS. + +As a shipwrecked seaman, on the wild rock in the middle of the ocean, +anxiously scans the horizon to search for a sail in sight, so did I cast +my eager gaze over the barren sandy waste, to discover if providentially +any succour was at hand. The shades of night melting away before the +rays of the sun, the wished-for oasis appeared in the distance; and by +the marks on the sand, I could not doubt that we had been wandering away +instead of approaching it. How eagerly I looked towards the spot where +I believed the means of reviving our fast-failing strength could be +found! As I gazed at it, it seemed to approach nearer, and tantalised +me the more that I knew that I could not reach it. + +The sun rose slowly and majestically in the sky, and his burning rays +began again to strike down upon our heads. Still I kept my senses; but +I felt that death must soon terminate my dear father's sufferings, and +mine as well. Once more I cast my glance round the horizon. I gazed +steadily--I saw a dark object moving in the distance. O how earnestly I +watched it! I could not be mistaken--it was approaching us. As it came +on, I discerned the figure of a man on horseback. He was leading +another animal with a load on his back. Now he seemed to be verging off +to the right hand. He might pass and not observe us. I shouted; but it +was folly to fancy that my feeble voice could reach him. Again he +turned. I saw him dismount and stoop down on the sand. He stopped, +however, but a minute, perhaps not so much, though to me it seemed an +age, and he again mounted and came on. He was directing his course, I +judged, for the oasis. As he came still nearer, I recognised Ithulpo, +and he was leading our baggage mule. I could not doubt, also, but that +he was searching for us. Again I tried to shout, but my voice failed +me. I lifted up my hand and waved it above my head; but I could no +longer stand upright, or I should have attracted his attention. He rode +on. He had already passed, when he turned his head and caught sight of +the handkerchief I was waving in my hand. He spurred on towards us. To +spring from his horse, and to take one of the saddle-bags from the back +of the mule, was the work of a moment. From the saddlebag he produced a +skin of water. Without speaking, he poured out a cup, from which he +allowed a few drops to fall into my father's mouth. When once I felt it +to my lips, I could not withdraw it till I had drained it to the bottom. +The pure draught so much revived me that I could sit up and help +Ithulpo to tend my father. This he did with the greatest care; but +human care, alas! seemed to be of little avail. He loosened his dress +to admit of perfectly free circulation; he then washed his mouth, and +after bathing his temples, he allowed a few more drops to trickle down +his throat. This judicious treatment had, after a time, the most +beneficial effect. My father languidly opened his eyes, and attempted +to sit up; and I saw that his first act of consciousness was to turn +them towards me with an inquiring glance. Finding that I was alive, his +countenance brightened; and after slowly drinking some more water, in +the course of three or four minutes he revived sufficiently to propose +proceeding on our way. + +"Wait a little longer, Senor," said Ithulpo. "Water has restored you to +life, but you require food to give you strength; see, I have brought +some." + +As he spoke, he opened a basket full of bread and dried meat, and +several sorts of the most delicious and cooling fruit. There were figs +and grapes and pomegranates, fragrant chirimoyas, yellow bananas, and +several pine-apples; indeed many others too numerous to name. + +Never shall I forget the exquisite delight with which I ate the first +fig Ithulpo handed to me. It cooled my burning thirst more than all the +water I had swallowed, and served both for meat and drink. It was a +large soft fig with a white pulp. I instantly put out my hand for +another, and he gave me a black fig with a red pulp, which vied with the +first in excellence. Then he handed me a bunch of juicy grapes, but I +still asked for more figs; and when I had finished as many as he thought +were good for me, he tore open a chirimoya, and let me eat its +snow-white juicy fruit. Outside it did not look tempting, for the skin, +though green, was tough and hard, and covered with black spots. The +platanos or bananas were cooked; and though I could not have swallowed a +piece of dry bread, I was enabled to eat some of them with much relish. +Altogether, never was a repast eaten with greater appetite, or, I may +add, with more gratitude; for it certainly was the means of preserving +my father's life as well as mine. Ithulpo had taken the precaution to +tether the animals, so that they could not escape; and as he sat by us, +distributing the food, he informed us of what he had done after we had +lost sight of him in the sand-storm. + +"You must know, Senores," he began, "I was so busy in liberating my poor +countrymen from the ropes which bound them, that I did not observe which +way you were taking. I shouted after you to turn back, but you did not +hear me; and then the dreadful sand-cloud came on, and it was too late. +I am well acquainted with this dreadful desert, and I was aware that we +were out of the right path; but I also knew where that path was; so, as +soon as all the poor fellows were free, we set off towards it. They +were all well able to run without the ropes, and out of sight of our +tyrants. Fortunately the sand-cloud wheeled round before it reached us, +and we were safe. + +"You must know that on the previous night I had stowed away the +wine-skins full of water in your portmanteaus, and I thus had enough to +give a good draught to each of the men, and to my beasts also. Our +first care was then to get out of the desert. I knew where the ground +was hard, so I led them to it, and we then could travel at a fast rate. +About a league beyond where we were, there is a fountain of pure water +gushing up out of a hard black rock. Here we were all able to refresh +ourselves; and still a little farther on, marks are to be seen, by which +I could direct my companions how to escape from the desert. They +quickly availed themselves of my advice, and are now on their way to +hide themselves among the mountains, where there is no fear of the +Spaniards searching for them." + +"But what did you do, my friend?" I asked, stretching out my hand for +another bunch of tempting grapes. + +"Just as I was parting from them I saw a party of fruit-sellers crossing +the desert, with several mules laden with fruit. I purchased some, as +also some bread and baked platanos, and then set off to search for you. +I knew, by the feel of the atmosphere, that there would be no more +sand-storms; and hoped, it you had escaped that of yesterday, to find +you. I know my way across any part of the desert blindfold, for I can +tell by the smell of the sand alone where animals have before passed. +As soon as it was daylight I returned to where I last had seen you. I +saw where the sand-cloud had settled down, forming huge mounds, beneath +which many of the Spaniards, I found, lay overwhelmed. At last I fell +in with the tracks of your two horses. I guessed they were yours, for I +thought the Spaniards would have kept together. I followed them up +steadily. I came to where you had found the Spanish officer, and given +him a pistol with which to defend himself." + +"What, did he tell you so?" I asked, interrupting Ithulpo. + +"Oh no; his voice has ceased for ever," he replied, with a dark smile. +"He had been dead some time, and the fowls of the air were feeding on +him; but I knew him by his dress, and I recognised your pistol, which he +had fired. Here it is. I next reached the spot where you dismounted, +and your horses had run away. I began to fear that I was too late to +save you; and when following up the track of your footsteps, I saw that +a number of the Spanish cavalry had escaped, and had gone towards yonder +clump of trees. Several have fallen in the way, as the wings of the +condors I could see flapping above the ground, one beyond the other, +told me plainly. And now, Senores, it is time to mount and proceed. +Two hours' riding beyond those trees will carry us free of the desert; +and may you never again enter it without a proper guide." + +My father rode Ithulpo's horse; and while I clambered upon the back of +the baggage mule, he walked. It was almost as hot as on the previous +day; but I kept my mouth cool by occasionally eating a grape, and +sometimes one of my favourite figs; and with little suffering we drew +near the oasis. + +"Are you not afraid of falling into the hands of the Spaniards, and of +being accused of liberating their prisoners?" I asked. + +He looked up, and, smiling significantly, answered. "I tell you, Senor, +not one of our enemies live to bear false witness against us. I have +marked among yonder trees signs not to be mistaken of their fate." + +I asked no further questions. We passed, as we rode along, several +bodies of horses and men; and as we approached the trees, Ithulpo +shouting with all his might, several condors rose slowly on the wing, +and a huge tiger stalked slowly away, looking round every now and then +at us with an angry glance, for having disturbed him at his repast. I +thought I recognised him as the monster who had paid us a visit during +the night; and I have no doubt that he was the same. + +I can scarcely describe the dreadful scene which met our sight as we at +length reached the longed-for oasis. In the centre existed a small +shallow pool, filled by a stream which bubbled up through the earth. It +would allow scarcely more than a dozen horses to drink therein at a +time. We at once perceived what had occurred. The survivors of the +cavalry had reached it in a body. Some of the front ranks, both horses +and men, overcome by weakness, had, in their attempt to drink, fallen +in, and prevented the others from getting their mouths to it. The first +lay trampled on and drowned, making the once clear pool a mass of mud +and filth. The rear ranks, rushing over them, had died of raging +thirst, in sight of the water which might have saved them. Both men and +horses were mingled in a dreadful heap, torn and mangled by the birds +and beasts of prey. We crossed as rapidly as we could to the other side +of the oasis, where Ithulpo produced a skin full of clear water from one +of the saddle-bags. + +"We must not disappoint our poor beasts," he observed, as he gave them +to drink. + +Just then the horse my father rode gave a neigh. It was answered from a +distance; and to our no little satisfaction and astonishment, our two +horses were seen trotting up towards the oasis. They had evidently been +prevented taking shelter in the oasis by the presence of the tiger, but +had kept in the neighbourhood, in the hopes of his taking his departure. +Ithulpo at once enticed them to him by the offer of water, which they +drank eagerly; and having secured them, after allowing them to crop a +little of the grass which grew beneath the shade of the trees, we +mounted, and prepared to recommence our journey. As we left the now +polluted oasis, Ithulpo looked carefully round to examine the traces on +the sand, and declared that of all those who had reached the spot, not +one had left it. + +"A just vengeance has overtaken the tyrants who yesterday so cruelly +ill-treated us, Senores," he remarked. "I knew it would be so. We may +now, without fear, proceed to Lima." + +In two hours we reached the confines of the desert, and once more got +among streams, and trees, and cultivated fields. We slept that night at +an Indian village, where Ithulpo's influence procured us a warm +reception; and after a rest of two days, we proceeded on our journey to +Lima. As we rode along a fine straight road, shaded by an avenue of +lofty willows, peculiarly grateful in a hot climate, we at length came +in sight of the steeples and domes of the far-famed city of Lima, with +the blue ocean on one side of us, and the interminable ranges of the +snowy Cordilleras reaching to the sky on the other. + +"What a magnificent city!" I exclaimed. "Well worthy, indeed, does it +appear of its great founder, the conqueror Pizarro." + +"Wait till we get within the walls before you pronounce an opinion," +remarked my father. "Like the deeds of the founder, it gains more +admiration when observed at a distance than when examined closely. We +admire Pizarro when we regard alone the wonderful conquest he achieved; +but when we learn the wrongs, the injustice, the misery he inflicted, +the blood he spilled, and the ruin he caused, he and his companions +appear monsters of iniquity, worthy of detestation rather than +admiration." + +We entered the city by a handsome gateway, and immediately found +ourselves in a long street, with low, mean, ruinous houses on either +side. The houses had porches in front, and _patios_ or court-yards. +The shops were small, with their goods placed on tables at the doors; +there was no glass to the windows, and no display of articles of +commerce. The street was badly paved, though there was a rough footway +on each side. The walls of many of the houses were composed of double +rows of bamboo, but some were of brick; the roofs were flat, and very +few of the houses had two stories. As we rode on, however, the +appearance of the place improved; and in and near the principal square I +observed some fine buildings, with handsomely ornamented _facades_, and +many fine churches and convents; but altogether I had to own that the +outside beauty was sadly deceptive. + +The streets were crowded with persons of every variety of costume, and +every hue of skin; from the people of Northern Europe, and the +bright-complexioned native of Biscay, to the red Indian and the +jet-black African. Some were on horseback, and others in carriages of +very clumsy and antique construction; and of the lower order, some were +riding on mules and donkeys, and others were driving animals laden with +ice from the mountains, skins of brandy, and fruits and provisions of +every description. Among this motley crowd we forced our way, till we +reached the house of my father's agent, a Spanish merchant, Don Jose +Torres de Santillan by name, a very honest and good man. + +As the plan of his house was similar to that of most of the larger +dwellings in Lima, I will describe it. In what may be called the front +of the house were two doors; one, the _azaguan_, was the chief entrance, +and the other led to the coach-house. By the side of the _azaguan_ was +a small room with a grated window, where the ladies of the family were +fond of sitting to observe the passers-by. This building formed the +street side of a spacious court-yard or _patio_, on either side of which +were a number of small rooms, and on the farther side was the +dwelling-house, round which ran a balcony. In it were numerous doors; +the largest opened into the _sala_ or hall, which was furnished with +several net hammocks, a row of chairs, and two sofas; while +straw-matting covered the floor. Inside of it was a smaller +well-furnished room, called the _quadro_, which was the usual +reception-room; and beyond it were the dining and sleeping rooms, and +the nursery. They all opened into an inner court-yard, the walls of +which were ornamented with fresco paintings; and part of it was laid out +as a flower-garden, with a fountain in the centre. From it one door led +to the kitchen, and another to the stable. The windows were mostly in +the roof, as were those in Pompeii and many ancient cities; indeed it +was very similar to the plan of building followed in the south of Spain. + +On hearing of our arrival, Don Jose hurried out and received us with the +greatest attention. Our animals were led off to the stables by a number +of servants, and we were conducted to the _quadro_, where he instantly +ordered refreshments to be brought. We begged leave in the mean time to +be allowed to change our dusty dresses. On our return we found hammocks +slung, in which our host invited us to rest ourselves. In a hot climate +there cannot be a more luxurious couch than a net hammock, as it allows +the air to circulate freely round the body in the coolest part of the +room. The softly-stuffed sofa of an English or French drawing-room +would be insufferable. A young negress slave then brought in a tray +with cups, into which she poured out some chocolate, making it froth up +till they overflowed, and then handed them round to us. Cigars were +next offered to us, and we smoked them till suppertime. + +For this meal we adjourned to the dining-room, where our host insisted +on waiting on us. It was a repetition of dinner, which the family had +taken according to custom at two o'clock. The wife of Don Jose, and her +maiden sister and three daughters, pretty, palefaced, black-eyed girls, +with hair like the raven's wing, were present, as were the family priest +and two gentlemen, cousins of our host. We first had an insipid kind of +soup, and then their principal dish, called _puchero_. It contained all +sorts of meats and vegetables mixed up together--beef, pork, ham, bacon, +sausage, poultry, cabbage, _yuccas camotes_ (a sort of potato), +potatoes, rice, peas, _chochitas_ (grains of maize), quince, and banana. +The meat was brought in on one dish and the vegetables on another, and +they were afterwards mixed to suit our individual tastes. + +At the same time a dish of _picante_ was served. It was composed of +dried meat and some pounded roots, highly seasoned with cayenne pepper, +and coloured with grains of the _achote_, which gave it a brilliant +vermilion tint. After the meat, a sort of pudding was brought in, +consisting of a great variety of fruits stewed in water,--a dish I +cannot praise; and then followed a dessert of delicious fresh fruits and +sweet cakes, which were washed down by a tumbler of fresh water. Such +is the usual dinner of a gentleman's family in Lima. A little light +sweet wine was the only liquor drunk, though in compliment to the +supposed taste of our countrymen, strong wine, brandy, and other spirits +were placed before us. After dinner the servant brought in a piece of +lighted charcoal and a tray of cigars, which the men and the elder +ladies smoked with much apparent relish; but my three fair friends +declined using them. + +I soon became perfectly intimate with these young ladies. They were +troubled with no tiresome bashfulness to keep them silent, and they were +full of life and spirits; so we rattled away in conversation in the most +agreeable manner, till it was announced that some guests had arrived, +and were waiting in the _sala_ to commence dancing. Musicians appeared, +and, with much spirit, boleros, fandangos, and cachuchas, and other +dances, well-known in Old Spain, were commenced and kept up for some +hours. As we were in the height of the amusement, the cathedral bell +struck three slow measured sounds, the signal of the _Oration_. It was +repeated by the belfries of all the churches in the city. Instantly, as +if by magic, every movement was suspended. Each one said the evening +prayer in a low whisper, and then made the sign of the cross; those of +most consequence turning to the persons near them, uttering the words +_buenas noches_ (good night), which was repeated by all present. It is +a simple but beautiful custom, and is intended to remind people of their +duty to God in whatever occupation they may be engaged. It may often do +good; but unless people are possessed of the true spirit of piety, +custom will make them callous, and it will fail to have any beneficial +effect. + +I have observed this custom in many other Roman Catholic countries. In +a public place full of people of different ranks, the effect is still +more curious. The lively conversation of the smart lady and the gallant +cavalier is cut short, the donkey-driver with uplifted arm ceases to +belabour his beast, the oath dies on the lips of the rough seaman or +uncouth black, the workman drops his tool, the shopman lays down his +measure, children refrain from their play, men quarrelling suspend their +dispute, lazy monks engaged in their constant game of draughts neglect +to make the intended move, vendors of fruit no longer utter their cries, +and one and all engage in silent prayer till the bell has ceased to +toll, and then in a moment the noise and bustle of active life once more +goes on. + +When I retired to my room for the night, not a little tired with my +exertion, Ithulpo made his appearance. + +"How long, Senor, may I ask, does your father purpose remaining here?" + +"Some short time; a week or two perhaps," I replied, rather surprised at +his question. + +He went to the door and looked cautiously out, and then, speaking almost +in a whisper, as if he were afraid the walls might convey the +intelligence, he said-- + +"You have a mother and sisters and young brothers at your home in the +mountains. As you love them, press your father not to remain here +longer than you can help. Two or three days at furthest is all you +should take, and then by travelling fast we may arrive in time. My +orders are to accompany you to your home; but I tell you that it shortly +will no longer be a place of safety for you or those you love. More I +may not say." + +"You have already been of infinite service to us, Ithulpo; and I know +that you would not, without good reason, alarm us; but cannot you tell +me more particularly what sort of danger we have to apprehend?" I +asked. + +He shook his head as he answered-- + +"Indeed, Senor, I cannot; and you must caution your father not to give a +hint to any one of what I have said, or the worst consequences may +follow. I rely on your discretion." + +I promised to be cautious, and Ithulpo, saying that he would call me at +an early hour as I desired, left me. Tired as I was, I could not for a +long time go to sleep, but continued thinking of what Ithulpo had told +me, and trying to discover to what he alluded. I heard my father enter +his room, which was next to mine, but I would not run the risk of +depriving him of his night's rest by telling him of what I had heard. + +As my object is not only to describe my own personal adventures, but to +present my readers with a picture of Peru as it was at the time I speak +of, I will now give a short description of Lima, the capital. Lima +stands on the river _Rimac_, from a corruption of which word its name is +derived. The valley through which the river runs is called by the +Indians _Rimac Malca_, or the place of witches; from the custom they had +formerly of banishing there persons accused of witchcraft. The city was +founded by Pizarro soon after the conquest. He there built a palace for +himself, in which he was assassinated by Almagro. He called his beloved +Lima, La Ciudad de los Reyes, from its being founded on the day of the +Epiphany. I always think of Pizarro with much more satisfaction when I +contemplate him engaged in the peaceful occupation of laying out the +city, and superintending the labours of the workmen, than when I regard +him as the blood-stained conqueror of a race who had given him no cause +of offence. He laid the foundation of the city on the 8th of January +1534, and was murdered on the 26th of June 1541. + +Besides the river Rimac, which runs through the city, there are a number +of small streams, which add much to the cleanliness of the streets, and +serve to irrigate the gardens, and to feed the fountains and canals +which adorn them. The ground on which it stands slopes towards the sea; +the great square, or _plaza mayor_, near the centre, being about four +hundred and eighty feet above its level. + +The climate is agreeable, as the heat is seldom very excessive; but as +there are several marshes and swampy places in the vicinity, fevers and +agues are common. In summer a canopy of clouds hangs over it, which +mitigates the heat of the sun; but rain very seldom falls throughout the +year. Earthquakes occur nearly every year, and some have caused most +devastating effects. + +Lima is about two miles long from east to west, and a mile and a quarter +broad. The streets are all straight, and about twenty-five feet wide, +and there are no less than one hundred and fifty-seven _quadras_ or open +spaces. It is enclosed by walls built of _adobes_, sun-dried bricks +made of clay and chopped straw. These bricks are considered better +calculated than stone to resist the shocks of earthquakes. The walls +are about twelve feet high and ten thick at the bottom, narrowing to +eight at the top, with a parapet of three feet on the outer edge. It is +flanked by thirty-four bastions, and has seven gates and three posterns. +On the south-east is the citadel of Santa Catalina, with small guns +mounted on it. Across the Rimac is a bridge of stone with fine arches, +leading to the suburb of San Lazaro. This bridge is the favourite +evening resort of the citizens. There are a number of churches, with +handsome fronts of stone, and lofty steeples, which must be strongly +built not to be overthrown by the earthquakes. + +Lima contained about 80,000 inhabitants, of whom 20,000 were whites, and +the rest negroes, Indians, and various half-castes. There were +sixty-three noblemen who enjoyed the title of count or marquis, and +about forty who were noble without titles. The Spaniards considered +themselves belonging to a race of beings far above the native Indians, +or even the Creoles; and would much more readily give their daughters in +marriage to a poor countryman of their own than to a rich American-born +person. The people of Lima are much addicted to gambling, especially +the higher orders; but public gambling-houses are not allowed. The +white inhabitants have sallow complexions, with little or no colour on +their cheeks. The ladies have generally interesting countenances, with +good eyes and teeth, and a profusion of black hair. The walking-dress +of females of all ranks is the _saya y manto_. The _saya_ consists of a +petticoat of velvet, satin, or stuff, generally black or of a cinnamon +tint, plaited in very small folds. It sits close to the body, and shows +the shape to advantage. At the bottom it is so narrow that the wearer +can only make very short steps. The skirt is ornamented with lace, +fringe, spangles, or artificial flowers. The ladies of higher rank wear +it of various colours, purple, pale blue, lead colour, or striped. The +_manto_ is a hood of thin black silk, drawn round the waist and then +carried over the head. By closing it before, they can hide the face, +one eye alone being visible, or sometimes they show only half the face. +A gay shawl thrown over the shoulders and appearing in front, a rosary +in the hand, silk stockings, and satin shoes, complete the costume. It +seems intended to serve the purpose of a domino, as the wearer can thus +completely conceal her features. At the present day, however, the +European costume has been generally adopted. They delight in possessing +a quantity of jewellery; but they appear to be still fonder of perfumes +and sweet-scented flowers, and spare no expense in procuring them. + +The Indians who reside in Lima endeavour to imitate the Spanish Creoles +in dress and manners. They are chiefly engaged in making gold and +silver lace, and other delicate gold work; while some are tailors and +vendors of fruit, flowers, and vegetables. + +The African Negroes are numerous, and, though slaves, are well treated +by their masters. Those of the same tribe or nation find each other +out, and form a sort of club or association, called a _Confradia_. They +generally hold their meetings in the suburbs on a Sunday afternoon. At +the time I speak of, there was an old slave-woman who had lived in a +family for nearly fifty years, and who was the acknowledged queen of the +Mandingoes. She was called Mama Rosa; and I remember seeing her seated +at the porch of her master's house, when a number of her black subjects +who were passing knelt before her, and kissing her hand in a true loyal +fashion, asked her blessing. Her mistress had given her a silver +sceptre, and the young ladies of the family would lend her jewels, +artificial flowers, and other ornaments; bedecked in which, on certain +days, she would be carried off by her subjects in great state, her +sceptre borne before her, to the house of the Confradia, where a throne +was prepared to receive her. Here she held a regular court, when as +much respect was shown her as to any sovereign in Europe. I shall have +to speak of her again. + +The next morning at an early hour Ithulpo called me, and accompanied me +through the city. On my return I took an opportunity of telling my +father what I had heard. He treated the subject lightly, observing that +the Indians were very fanciful; at the same time, that he was anxious to +return home as soon as he could arrange the affairs for which he had +visited Lima. However I observed the following day, either from some +information he had received, or from something Ithulpo had said to him, +that he had begun to think more seriously of the matter, and he desired +me to make preparations for our departure. + +While strolling out in the afternoon, I happened to pass the abode of +Mama Rosa, the black queen of the Mandingoes. A large crowd of negroes +were assembled before the door, decked in all the finery they could +command. They wore garments of all fashions and of every gay-coloured +hue imaginable--the women with wreaths of flowers round their heads, and +necklaces of coral and beads on their necks and arms. There were silk +coats a century old, and round jackets, and shirts, blue, red, yellow, +and white; and naval and military uniforms curiously altered to suit the +taste of the wearer--not an uncommon mode of wearing trousers being +round the neck instead of on the legs, with the upper part hanging down +the back, and the lower on either side in front like a shawl. Some +acted the part of guards of honour, and others appeared as ministers of +state. A select body bore a sort of _palanquin_ or litter, which they +placed before the door till Mama Rosa descended into the street, when +she was conducted with great ceremony to her seat in it. She was very +old and ugly; but her subjects did not love her the less for that. Her +dress was resplendent with flowers and jewels, and all the ornaments she +could hang about herself. + +A band was in attendance, the instruments of which were somewhat +curious. The most important was a drum, made of a section of the trunk +of a tree, with the skin of a kid drawn over one end. Another was a +bow, the string being of catgut, which was struck with a small cane. A +third was the jaw-bone of an ass with the teeth loose in the socket, and +which, when struck by the hand, made a capital rattle. If there was not +much harmony in the music, there was plenty of noise, which was not a +little increased by the voices of a party of singers, who frisked about +before the sovereign's state carriage as she advanced. The +sceptre-bearer stepped out with her majesty's insignia of office in his +arms, looking back as he did so to ascertain that the queen was +following. Her people shouted, the palanquin-bearers moved on, the band +struck up a negro sort of "God save the Queen," and away they all went +towards the quarters of the Confradia. I followed to see the end of the +ceremony. After passing through a number of narrow and somewhat dirty +streets, with the houses built of bamboo and mud, we reached the palace, +for so I may call it. The hall was of good size, and the walls were +ornamented with what I suppose were intended for likenesses of other +sable monarchs. If they were correct, I am compelled to own that the +royal Rosa's predecessors, both ladies and gentlemen, were a very ugly +set of personages. The band played louder, and the people shouted more +vehemently, as her majesty ascended the throne at the end of the hall. +She seemed perfectly at home, and sat down with right royal dignity. +The sceptre-bearer presented the sceptre. She seized--it in her right +hand and waved it around to command silence. Her ministers of state +formed on either side of the throne, and doffed their cocked hats, or +straw hats, or hats with three corners, or their red caps, or whatever +covering adorned their heads. She then made them a speech, which I have +no doubt was much more original than the Queen's speech in England, but +as I did not know a word of the Mandingo language, I was not much the +wiser for it. When it was concluded, her Chancellor of the Exchequer +made a report of the financial condition of her kingdom, while her Home +Secretary described the good behaviour of her subjects, and her Minister +for Foreign Affairs assured her that she was on good terms with all her +neighbours. This part of the business being concluded, they squatted +down about the throne, and filling their pipes with tobacco, began to +smoke; while her other subjects, one by one, stepped forward, and +dropping on both knees, each one gave her hand a kiss, not bashfully as +if they were afraid of it, but with a hearty smack, which sounded +through the hall. Her ancient majesty in return bestowed a blessing on +them, and told them all to behave well; and especially to be contented +with their lot, if their masters and mistresses treated them kindly. +After the speech, all the people shouted, and the musicians struck up a +magnificent flourish with the drums, and the bows, and the jaw-bones of +the asses; and if there was not much harmony, there was a great deal of +enthusiasm. Several slaves then stepped forward, and preferred +complaints against their masters for ill-treatment. + +The Queen listened to them attentively, and I thought seemed to judge +their cases very judiciously. To some she replied, that it was through +their own neglect of their duty that they had been punished. Others she +advised to bear their ill-treatment patiently, and to endeavour, by zeal +and attention to the wishes of their masters, to soften their tempers, +and to gain their good-will; but there were two or three who had been +treated so barbarously and unjustly, that she promised them that the +_Confradia_ should make every effort to purchase their freedom. + +"You shall be freed," she observed; "but remember you will have to work +as hard as you have ever before done, to repay the _Confradia_ the money +they have advanced for your emancipation." + +These were not exactly her words, but what she said was to this effect. + +The serious business of the day being over, the negroes and negresses +set to work to dance; and though I cannot speak much of the grace they +exhibited, I never saw any human beings frisk and jump about with so +much agility. Who would have thought they were for the most part +slaves, groaning under their chains? Never did dancers enter more +thoroughly into the spirit of dancing. The black beaus did not waste +their time in talking or doing the amiable to their sable partners; nor +did the latter seem to expect any such attention--they came to dance, +and their great aim seemed to be to get through as much of it as the +time would allow. As I looked on I could scarcely refrain from rushing +into the sable throng, and joining them in their frisks and jumps; +though I dare say, had I done so they would have considered me a very +contemptible performer. At length the Queen's chamberlain clapped his +hands, and gave notice that the court must break up, as her majesty was +desirous of retiring to attend to her duties in putting to bed the +children of her mistress to whom she was nurse. The bearers of her +palanquin came forward, the Queen stepped into it, the sceptre-bearer +marched before it, the band struck up their loudest tune, the people +shouted till they were hoarse, and the procession returned in due state +to old Mama Rosa's abode; where, like Cinderella when the clock had +struck twelve, she was again converted into the old negro nurse. + +I give but a very brief account of our return journey, which commenced +the next day, just in time to avoid the ill effects of an earthquake +which gave Lima a fearful shaking, we being, when it took place, in the +open country. For the latter part of our journey we rode on in perfect +silence. Ithulpo seemed as well acquainted with the road as I was. By +degrees the valley opened out, and the white walls of our house became +visible. With beating hearts we ascended the mountain. We reached the +court-yard and leaped from our horses. Well-known voices greeted us. +My mother rushed out, my brothers and sisters followed. All, though +becoming very anxious for our return, were well and in safety. Jose had +returned just before, but nothing would induce him to say what had +occurred to him. He asserted that he had been left behind by us from +his own wish, through illness, and that he was only just sufficiently +recovered to perform the journey home. Ithulpo declared his intention +of remaining three or four days, till he could hear from his chief what +he was to do; and of course, after the service he had rendered us, my +father allowed him to act as he thought fit. I have now to describe +some of the more eventful portions of my narrative. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT. + +OUR HOUSE ATTACKED AND DEFENDED. + +My readers must endeavour to remember the description I gave of the +situation of our house, at the commencement of my work. We were all +seated in the same room in which the fugitive Manco first appeared to +us. Our early dinner was just over; and though we did not indulge in +the Spanish custom of the _siesta_, it was a time that we generally +refrained from active exertion, and employed it in reading or some +sedentary occupation. I had just laid down my book, and was looking out +of the window down the valley, when on the lower country beyond, an +unusual glitter of something which seemed to be moving along the road +attracted my eye. I watched it attentively. Now the glittering object, +which appeared in a long thin line, rose, and now it fell, as it wound +its way over the uneven ground. At length I called my father's +attention to it. As soon as he saw it, his more practised eye knew what +it was. + +"A body of troops!" he exclaimed. "They are marching in this direction, +and are probably bound across the mountain." + +We all now engaged in watching the advance of the soldiers, on whose +bayonets the sun shining had first drawn my attention; and many were the +surmises as to the reason of their coming to our remote locality. On +they came, growing more and more distinct. First a dark mass appeared +below the shining steel; then we perceived that it was composed of human +beings, though still mingled together in a dense body. Next their +banners and several officers on horseback were seen; and soon we could +distinguish the hats and cross belts, and the colour of the uniform of +the advanced guard. They were marching as rapidly as the nature of the +ground would allow. + +My father's military ardour was aroused at the sight. He seized his hat +and rushed out to a spot beyond the walls, whence he could command a +clear view both up and down the valley. I followed him, and we stood +together on the knoll watching the advancing troops. What was our +surprise, however, to find, that instead of proceeding along the road +over the mountains, the advanced guard began to mount the path leading +to the height on which our house stood! At the same instant, happening +to turn my head towards the mountain, I saw descending it, at a rapid +pace, a person whom I recognised as Ithulpo. He rushed on, leaping from +rock to rock at the risk of instant destruction. Nothing served to +impede his course. Life and death depended on him. He had discovered +the soldiers. For an instant he stopped, as if to consider whether he +could reach us before they did. Then on again he came as fast as +before. He was almost breathless when he arrived. + +"Call in all the people, and shut the gates and doors!" he exclaimed, +panting as he spoke. "The soldiers will destroy you all without mercy +if they once gain an entrance. Hold out but a short hour or less, and a +force will be here which will drive back our enemies to the sea." + +My father, astounded at what he heard, considered what was best to be +done. The advanced guard was already nearly half way up the hill. If +we attempted to block out the Spaniards, it would at once be +acknowledging ourselves guilty of some crime; but if we let them in, +unless Ithulpo deceived us, we might be subjected to ill-treatment. At +the utmost, with the few servants and some Indians who happened to be in +the house, we could not hope to hold out many minutes against the +formidable force now approaching. + +"Do you hesitate?" exclaimed Ithulpo vehemently. "I tell you, Senor, I +speak the truth. Ah, there comes the army of the Inca! Death to the +tyrants of Peru." + +As he spoke, he pointed up the mountain, when I saw, winding among the +rocks, a large body of Indians. Every instant others appeared, till the +surrounding heights and the whole gorge, through which the road wound, +was covered with them. They rushed impetuously down the mountain side, +a strong body making evidently for our house. The Spaniards, who had +also discovered them, redoubled their efforts to climb the mountain, for +the purpose, it was also very clear, of occupying the house before the +Indians could reach it. + +The Indians were armed with firelocks of every sort and size, and of +curious antique forms, hoarded up with jealous care by father and son +for many a long year, to be ready for the days of retribution, which +they hoped had now arrived. A large proportion, however, had only clubs +and spears, and bows and arrows, and slings of the same description as +those used by their ancestors when they first encountered the Spaniards. +To counterbalance in a degree their deficiency, they had a few light +mountain guns, carried on the backs of mules, engines of warfare which +their enemies did not suspect them of possessing. + +Their costume also was equally a mixture of the ancient and modern. +Some were dressed in skins, with their hair long, and the upper part of +their bodies painted in many colours. These were some of the wild +tribes from a distance, who had never been subdued. Others wore a sort +of armour of leather or cotton, thickly padded, with shields of hides, +and a profusion of feather ornaments; while most of those who carried +firearms, and were from the more civilised districts, were clothed in +garments of various coloured cottons, or had retained the ordinary dress +of the present day. It must be understood that I learned most of these +particulars afterwards, for they were still too far off for me to +observe either their arms or dress. + +On they came with the most terrific shouts, such as I did not think them +capable of uttering. It appeared as if they were giving vent to their +feelings of hatred and revenge, pent up for centuries. My father stood +for an instant watching the two advancing forces, and considering what +course to pursue to preserve his family from the dangers of the conflict +which it was evident would soon be raging around us. + +"Into the house, David," he exclaimed; "Ithulpo's advice must be +followed. We will keep both parties out as long as we can." + +We were quickly inside the gates, and lost not a moment in calling the +servants together, and in bolting and barring all the doors, and in +putting up shutters to the windows. We found Ithulpo in the house. He +said he had been ordered by his chief to remain with as till we were in +safety. My mother, whom he had warned of what was about to occur, +though alarmed for the safety of her children, did not lose her presence +of mind, but went round encouraging the servants to remain firm and obey +their orders. Ithulpo hurried here and there, directing and aiding the +other men in preparing for a defence should the house be attacked. + +In a few minutes all the arrangements which with the means at our +disposal we could hope to make, were concluded; and I had time to look +out from a loophole in the side of the roof, to see how near the two +parties had approached. I first turned my eyes to the eastward towards +the mountains, where, to my surprise, I found that the Indians, instead +of rushing on at once to meet their enemies, had drawn up in battle +array, quietly watching their advance. Had they come on at once, their +numbers alone, it appeared to me, would have overwhelmed the Spaniards. +They held a position, however, from which it would, I saw, be impossible +to dislodge them, and effectually blocked up the passage across the +mountain. Their appearance was very picturesque, from the variety of +their costumes, and the numberless banners under which each cacique had +mustered his followers. Conspicuous among them was one which I +recognised as that of the Incas, once more raised to meet the hereditary +foes of their race. I next looked down the valley. The advanced guard +of the Spaniards had just reached the brow of the hill, and would, I +calculated, in three or four minutes be close to our gates. Under these +circumstances, an attempt to prevent them from entering the house would, +of course, be considered an act of open defiance of the authority of the +Spanish Government, which it would, I felt, be next to madness to make; +and I therefore hurried down from my post to tell my father how matters +stood. + +"We have but one course to pursue," he replied, when I told him what I +had observed. "I will trust to your courage and judgment, David; I will +stay to open our gates to the Spaniards, while you take charge of your +mother and the children, and conduct them down by the secret passage +which leads out at the side of the mountain. She has already packed up +her jewels and the most portable valuables we possess. Go and prepare +her to set out the moment the soldiers reach the gate. Collect some +torches. Tell Ithulpo. He will accompany you, and protect you should +you fall in with any straggling parties of Indians. I will endeavour to +join you as soon as I can escape without being observed, which I very +soon, I doubt not, shall have an opportunity of doing." + +"No, no, father, I will obey you in everything but that," I replied. +"Let me remain to receive the soldiers, while you escort my mother and +brothers and sisters to a place of safety." + +I so earnestly argued the point, that at length my father saw that I was +right; besides, as I observed, if the Spaniards accused us of siding +with the rebels, I was much less likely, on account of my youth, to be +ill-treated by them than he would be. + +Scarcely had he agreed to my wishes, than a loud knocking was heard at +the gates. + +"Heaven protect you, my boy!" he exclaimed, as he hurried off to conduct +my mother with the children and the females of the family down the +secret passage. + +So unexpectedly had the events I have described occurred, and so +occupied had we been, that there was no time for leave-taking, scarcely +even to comprehend the full extent of the danger to which we were +exposed. There had been no weeping or lamentation, or any other sign of +alarm; for the women, all looking up to my mother, and seeing her so +fearless, seemed only anxious to follow her directions. I watched them +crowding after her to the door of the passage. Some carried the +children, and others baskets of provisions, and light articles of value +which she wished to preserve. My father led the way, and Ithulpo and +Jose brought up the rear with a bundle of torches. + +As soon as they had disappeared, I ran towards the gates, calling on +some of the remaining servants to assist me in opening them. Before, +however, I had reached the gateway, the most terrific shouts and shrieks +I had ever heard assailed my ears. I at once divined the cause. The +Indians had at length understood the purpose of the Spaniards, and had +made an advance to intercept them. The soldiers were now thundering at +the gates, in an attempt to force them open, with the butt-ends of their +muskets. On finding this, I naturally became alarmed, lest, as I +withdrew the bars while they rushed in, they would trample me down, and +perhaps kill me; yet I felt that it would be cowardly to expose others +to a danger I was ready to avoid if I could. I therefore called on the +servants to aid me in removing some of the stout bars and withdrawing +the bolts, knowing that the people outside would quickly force open the +rest. + +"We are opening the gates, my friends," I shouted. "Quick, quick!" + +Scarcely had the bars been removed than the gates began to give way. We +leaped aside into a recess of the hall, and the soldiers rushed in, +uttering loud imprecations on us for having so long delayed them. Had +they seen us, I believe they would have knocked us on the head; but +fortunately they were in too great a hurry to take possession of the +house to look for us. There were in all not more than a hundred men; a +small garrison for so extensive a range of buildings. The rest of the +troops had, I found, advanced up the mountain, in an attempt to force +the passage across it. From the strong array of Indians I had seen +posted there, I considered that in this they would be disappointed. The +first thing the soldiers did on entering the house, was to find their +way to that side facing the mountains. Some stationed themselves at the +windows, through the shutters of which they forced holes to admit the +muzzles of their muskets; while others took up a strong position in the +court-yard, whence they could annoy the advancing enemy. Their hurried +arrangements had scarcely been concluded, when the Indians in strong +force rushed to the walls, uttering the most dreadful shouts of defiance +and hatred. The Spaniards reserved their fire till they came close upon +them. The word was given by the officer in command, and a volley was +poured in upon them which proved fatal to many; yet the rest came on +undauntedly to the attack. I had intended to have followed my family +into the vaults, and I should have been wiser had I done so; but a +strong desire to see the fight, not unnatural to one of my age and +temper, kept me back; and having escaped the observation of the +soldiers, I had clambered up to the roof, where, through a small window, +I could see all that was going forward. It was a post I very soon found +of considerable danger, for, when the Indians began to fire, the bullets +came rattling about my head very thick. What had become of the Indian +servants I could not tell; but I concluded that they had wisely betaken +themselves to the vaults, or to some other place of safety. + +I must observe that on either side the walls of the outbuildings and +gardens extended across the hill to the summit of precipitous cliffs, so +that the Indians could not get round to attack the house in the rear +without clambering over these impediments. As, however, the line was +very extended, it required great activity and vigilance on the part of +the Spaniards to defend it. Several parties, of ten or fifteen men +each, were employed in continually moving about from place to place +whenever any of the enemy showed a disposition to scale the walls. The +main attack of the Indians was, however, directed against the house +itself; indeed it was only subsequently that any attempts were made at +other points. The Indian chiefs showed the most undaunted bravery; and, +though singled out by the Spaniards for destruction, they were always in +the thickest of the fight, and exposed to the hottest fire. I looked in +vain for my friend Manco; and at first I was afraid that he might have +been killed, till it occurred to me that he was probably with the main +body of the army defending the mountain pass. + +I must now more particularly describe the scene as I beheld it from my +lofty post. I could tolerably well tell what was going on inside, from +the sounds which reached my ears. There was a gate in the east wall +about the centre of the house, to force which the Indians in the first +place directed their efforts, undaunted by the fire of the Spaniards, +they brought up a sort of battering-ram, composed of the roughly-shaped +trunk of a newly-felled tree, slung by ropes to men's shoulders. They +were led by a chief in the full war costume of the time of the Incas. +Notwithstanding the showers of bullets flying round him, he remained +unharmed, encouraging his followers by word and action to the assault. +If one fell, his place was instantly supplied by another, till the +battering-ram reached the gate. Several thundering blows were heard +above the rattle of musketry, the shouts of the assailants, and the +cries of the wounded, as the engine was set to work. The gate yielded +to the blows, for it was old and decayed; and the Indians rushed in. +Several fell pierced by the pikes of the Spaniards who guarded it, but +many others pressed on, and the soldiers were driven back. The +court-yard was soon filled, and at length the Peruvians met the +hereditary enemies of their race, face to face, in a struggle for life +and death. The Spaniards who had been left to guard the walls of the +garden rallied, and attempted in a compact body to enter the house by +one of the side doors; but the Indians threw themselves in their way, +and attacked them with a courage I scarcely expected to see exercised. +They rushed in upon them, some seizing the muzzles of their muskets, +while others cut at them with their axes, or pierced them with their +spears. The Spaniards endeavoured to preserve their discipline; but +they were at length broken and separated into parties of twos and +threes, surrounded by Indians, who filled the entire court-yard, so that +the combatants were now engaged in hand-to-hand fights, when it was +evident that numbers would gain the day. I had a strange longing, as I +witnessed the dreadful scene, to rush down and join the fight. My +sympathies were, I own, with the Indians; but still I felt if I had +thrown myself among them, I might have sided with the weaker party. I +did not, however, attempt to move. The very action would have called me +to my senses, and reminded me of the folly of interference. A number of +the Spaniards had fallen, and were instantly despatched and trampled on +by the infuriated Indians. At last a few, by desperate efforts, again +united, and fought their way up to the house; when some of the garrison, +who had been anxiously watching them, made a sortie by a side door, and +succeeded in keeping the enemy at bay, while the greater number, +desperately wounded, retired inside. For a minute, from the rush the +Indians made towards the door, I thought that they had succeeded in +entering at the same time, and I expected to hear the sounds of strife +below me; but the soldiers drove them back, and once more shut +themselves in. + +Meantime the assault on the front of the house was going on vigorously. +An attempt was made to bring the battering-ram into play; but so many of +the people working it were shot, that it was allowed to drop close to +the wall. It served, however, as a sort of platform, from whence some +of the Indians could throw their spears into the crevices of the +windows, while others attempted to force them open with their clubs, and +those armed with muskets continued a hot fire from the walls, and from +every spot where they could find shelter. From the groans I heard from +below, it was evident that many of the shots had pierced the shutters +and wounded the defenders of the house. + +While the scenes I have described were going on in my immediate +vicinity, I observed that in the distance the main body of the Indians +were engaged in a hot engagement with the troops who had marched towards +the pass. The light artillery of the former, though of no use for +distant firing, had been judiciously placed in commanding positions, and +masked with breastworks of stone and earth hastily thrown up. Their +fire was reserved till the Spaniards got close to them; then from each +battery the iron shower went forth, sweeping through the ranks of the +Spanish troops. I could see them waver and attempt to turn back; but +urged on by their officers, they again advanced. A portion attempted to +storm the heights on which the cannon were posted; but thousands of +Indians were behind the batteries, and they were driven back with great +slaughter. Still the rest marched on. Sometimes they were concealed +from my sight, and I could only judge by the movements of the Indians on +the higher ground that the fight was continuing; then again a turn of +the path brought them once more in view. Their numbers were fast +diminishing; but pride, and contempt for a race they had for so long +been taught to despise, urged them forward. They fancied probably that +they must prove victorious as soon as they could come into actual +contact with their foes. They were now also fighting for life as well +as honour; for if driven back, few would expect to escape after the +reception they had already met with. Every instant, however, fresh +bodies of Indians sprung up above and around them. On every height +warriors were posted, every rock concealed an enemy. + +My attention was now drawn off from the more distant scene by what was +going on below me. The Indians having penetrated through the gardens, +now entirely surrounded the house; and it required all the vigilance of +those within to repel them. I could hear those below rushing about to +each assailable point as their presence was most required; the officers +shouted their orders, bullets rattled through the house, and the heavy +blows of clubs and axes sounded on every side, while the whole house was +filled with the smoke of the firearms. When, however, after some time, +the Indian? found that they could not gain an entrance in this manner +without great loss, they retired behind the outer walls of the garden, +and a comparative silence succeeded to the previous din of warfare. It +was but preparatory to another more desperate attempt. From the +mountain side I saw a fresh body of men advancing, who bore among them +ladders roughly formed out of young fir-trees. It was evident that they +intended to climb to the roof for the purpose of making an entrance +through it, and dropping down upon the garrison. I foresaw that if they +did so, the sacrifice of life must be very great, though they would +ultimately succeed; for the Spaniards could scarcely defend themselves +if attacked from above as well as on every side. + +I now began to repent of my folly in having remained behind; but as I +had hitherto been unhurt by the bullets, which were striking the roof +and walls on every side of me, I fancied that I should yet escape. I +tried to consider what I had best do, and came to the conclusion that it +would be wiser to remain where I was. If I should be recognised by any +of the Indians, I had no fear of their injuring me; but in the confusion +and heat of the fight I could scarcely expect to be so, and I felt that +I must run all the risks of the assault if they should succeed in their +object. I almost hoped that they would give up the attempt, and allow +the Spaniards to escape. The success, however, of the main body of +their army encouraged them to persevere. + +As far as I could judge at that distance, the troops were completely +hemmed in, and were fighting for their lives, not to advance, but to +return down the mountain. Should the house be taken, all hopes of their +so doing would be lost, as it would leave the besiegers at liberty to +descend by the path leading to it, and to cut off all those who might +escape. + +I was not left long in doubt. By making a circuit to the left, the +ladders were brought to a gable end of the house where there were no +windows. The Spaniards must have seen the ladders, but they had no +means of attacking those destined to mount them unless by making a +_sortie_; and this, with their diminished numbers, they were probably +afraid of attempting. The tramp of some men on the steps leading to the +roof, showed me that they were aware of what was about to take place, +but they were too late. The Indians had already begun to tear off the +tiles, and the soldiers who appeared were received with the discharge of +a dozen muskets close to their faces. Many fell; the rest attempted to +retreat, and were precipitated to the floor below. The Indians swarmed +up in numbers, and filled the whole upper story. I stood concealed in a +small closet which had not been entered. Just then I perceived, besides +the smoke of gunpowder, a cloud of greater density ascending through the +floor, and a strong smell of burning wood. + +"Merciful heaven!" I exclaimed, "the house is on fire!" + +The Indians discovered what was the case at the same time, and rushed +down the steps. I followed the last of them. I thought if I attempted +to escape by the ladders, I might be mistaken for a Spaniard, and shot. +The scene of fighting, bloodshed, and confusion, which met my sight +below, passes all description. The combat was carried on by both sides +with desperation, the chief aim of the Indians being to open the gates +to their friends without, and that of the Spaniards to prevent them. In +the confined space of the passages, the Indians had somewhat the +advantage with their daggers or short swords, and their axes; and they +continued fighting for a minute or more, but had, notwithstanding, made +little progress, when, from the secret passage I have so often +described, a band of half-naked warriors burst into the house, and +uttering loud yells, set upon the Spaniards with the utmost fury. +Several of the officers had been killed or severely wounded. +Terror-stricken at these new opponents, the men gave way; some attempted +to gain the roof, others to burst their way through the doors, though +they must then have fallen into the hands of their enemies; but they had +a new foe to contend with, as relentless as the former. + +The fire, which had been smouldering in one of the rooms, burst forth as +the doors were thrown open, and, fanned by the breeze, the fierce flames +crept across the walls and along the rafters and ceiling. As the +impending danger was perceived, many of the combatants ceased their +strife, and victors and vanquished endeavoured to preserve their lives +by flight; but some, worked up to fury, fought desperately on till the +flames actually caught them in their toils, and claimed them for their +victims. Others, with their clothes on fire, Spaniards and Indians +mingled together, were seen rushing forth and calling on their friends +for aid--on their foes for mercy. Mercy the Indians had never received, +nor were they in a temper to grant it. As each Spaniard appeared he was +cut down, or was else driven back into the flames, till, as I afterwards +heard, not one remained alive of all those who had lately garrisoned the +house. + +In the meantime I had been watching an opportunity to escape. The +fighting was still continuing with the greatest fury, the combatants +passing before me, as alternately the Spaniards forced their way +forward, or were again driven back by the Indians who poured into the +building, while the raging flames gained possession of it; when, as the +heat became so intense that I could no longer hold my post, and a space +for an instant appearing clear before me, I darted forward amid the +fire, the whistling bullets and the weapons of the combatants. I ran on +in the hopes of reaching one of the doors at the west side of the house; +but I was so blinded and stifled by the smoke, that I could scarcely see +my way, or know what I was about. I fancied that I perceived before me +a number of Indians. They were driving at the point of their spears +several soldiers back into the fire that had reached that part of the +house. With fierce gestures some of them advanced towards me. I tried +to cry out and explain who I was, when, before the words were spoken, I +was sensible of a sharp blow, it seemed on my side. The next instant I +saw axes and swords glittering above my head. I sunk to the ground, and +all consciousness passed from me. + + + +CHAPTER NINE. + +THE INDIAN'S HUT--ALARMING NEWS. + +When consciousness at length returned, a very different scene met my +sight. I had an idea that something dreadful had occurred, but what it +was I could not tell. My belief was, that I had been dreaming that I +had witnessed a battle, that I had fallen from my horse and hurt myself, +and that I had been lifted up and carried along on men's shoulders to +some distant place. I had an indistinct recollection of a face full of +tenderness often bending over me; but whether it were white or red I +could not tell, the expression only had made any impression on me. +There was, however, so great a want of clearness and reality in what I +have described, that when I once more began to collect my thoughts, I +was unable to determine whether or not I had been dreaming all the time, +and was still half asleep. + +At length I opened my eyes, and discovered that I was lying under the +shade of a small hut or wigwam, composed of the boughs of trees, and +thatched carefully over with straw. My couch was on the ground; but it +was a very soft one, for the bed was stuffed with a quantity of the fine +wool of the vicunas, and covered with a delicately woven woollen stuff. + +The hut stood in an open space amid a forest of gigantic trees, such as +a tropical clime can alone produce. Beyond were dark and frowning +rocks, above which rose ridges of lofty mountains, one overtopping the +other, till the more distant, covered with a mantle of everlasting snow, +seemed lost in the clouds. The sky overhead was of intense blue; and +through it sailed, with outstretched wings, a mighty condor, carrying in +his talons a kid he had snatched from the valley below to his eyrie on +the summit of the rugged cliffs in the distance. I watched the majestic +bird as it sailed along, forgetful of my own condition, and wondering +whether any one would be able to rescue the poor animal from its +impending fate. On it went, growing smaller and smaller, till it became +a mere speck in the sky, and then disappeared altogether. + +This trifling circumstance served to arouse me, and I began to look +about me with some attention. I discovered, at length, that the forest +glade was not tenantless, for the part farthest removed from me was +crowded with dense masses of Indians, who were collected round one who, +by his height, his rich dress, and noble bearing, I conjectured to be a +chief, though I never recollected to have seen him before. Other +Indians kept arriving from all sides through the forest. He stood +elevated above the rest on a mound of earth under a canopy of cloth of +many colours; and I observed that the _borla_, the red fringe worn only +in ancient days by the proud Incas, bound his brow. From this sign I +could have no doubt that he was the well-known chieftain, Tupac Amaru, +the lineal descendant of the Incas, and the elder uncle of my friend +Manco. By the Indians he had been known usually by the name of +Condorcanqui, and by the Spanish as Don Jose Gabriel, Marquis de +Alcalises, a title which had been given to one of his ancestors by the +King of Spain. + +He was addressing the multitude in a harangue which, from the distance +he was from me, I could not hear. The people listened with deep +earnestness and silence, till some expression aroused their passions, +when brandishing their weapons, their bows, their clubs and spears, they +uttered shouts of approval, or wild cries of defiance and hatred to +their foe. + +I had no doubt that I was in one of the strongholds of the Indians, +among the mountains on the eastern side of the Andes. The Inca, for so +I may call him, continued speaking for an hour or more, when I again +fell off into a sleep or stupor. I had discovered that I was wounded +both in the head and side; and I felt dreadfully weak and ill. The sun +was just gliding behind the mountains when I again opened my eyes. By +my side sat a young and very beautiful woman, her large black eyes and +the tinge of copper in her complexion showing that she was of Indian +birth. + +In front of the hut stood a man whose figure I thought I knew. An +exclamation of surprise escaped my lips. He turned his head at the +sound of my voice, and I recognised, to my joy, the chief Manco. He +knelt down by my side. + +"Ah! my young friend, I rejoice to hear you speak once again," he said. +"My wife and I have watched over you anxiously, for we thought with +sorrow that you would never recover." + +I did not before know that Manco had a wife. "You have been very good +to me; and had it not been for her care, I must have died," I replied. +"I dare say I shall now soon get well; but can you tell me anything of +my parents and my brothers and sisters? Is Ithulpo with you?" + +"I can give you no tidings of them," he replied, turning away his head. +"Ithulpo has not come back to us, and I know not where he is." + +"My poor father and mother! they will think I have been killed," I +ejaculated. "It will make them grieve very much." + +"They will trust in God and hope for the best, as you must, my friend," +he observed. "But I must not let you talk, or it will bring back the +fever which has been on you. Nita will watch over you, for I have +matters which call me away." As he spoke, his young wife handed me a +cup filled with a cooling draught distilled from herbs, which I drank +eagerly off. "That will do you good," he remarked. "To-morrow, if you +are stronger, I will answer the questions I see you are eager to put. +Now, farewell!" He shook his head when he saw that I was about again to +speak, and went off across the glade. + +I next tried to interrogate Nita, speaking in the Quichua language, +supposing she did not understand Spanish; but with a smile she signed to +me not to talk. + +"Sleep, stranger, sleep," she said in a sweet musical voice in her +native tongue; "it will strengthen you to undergo the toils which are in +store for you. My husband has promised to tell you more to-morrow. I +must quit you if you persist in talking." + +Seeing that she was determined not to answer any of the questions I +longed to ask, I felt that it would be ungrateful not to do as she +desired me, and I once more resigned myself to sleep. + +The next day I felt better and stronger, and my wounds were healing +rapidly; but Manco did not return, and Nita told me that he was engaged +in mustering and arming his followers. She would, however, give me no +other information. I felt very sad and solitary, notwithstanding her +kindness; for, whenever I could collect my thoughts, I could not help +fearing that some misfortune had befallen those I best loved on earth. +Fortunately I slept or dozed away the greater part of the day, and this, +I suspect, contributed to the rapidity of my recovery, aided by my good +constitution and the pure air I breathed. At night Nita sent an old +woman to sit by me, who was relieved by a young lad of my own age. I +expected to gain some information from the latter, for he looked very +intelligent; but when I spoke to him he shook his head, and I afterwards +discovered that the poor fellow was deaf and dumb. There were several +huts near mine, one of which I found was occupied by Nita and her +husband. + +Three days passed away, and at last, to my great joy, Manco came back. +He seemed in high spirits when he spoke of the prospects of his people. +He told me that the Indians throughout the whole of the mountain +districts of Peru were up in arms, and that whenever they had +encountered the Spaniards the latter had been defeated; though he +confessed, with regret, that many atrocities had been committed by the +enraged natives, and that the white inhabitants of whole villages and +districts, including women and children, had been cruelly massacred, as +had also the negroes and those with any white blood in their veins. + +I may as well here pause in my personal narrative to give a short +account of the cause of the disastrous revolt of the Indians of Peru, +from which so many thousand lives were sacrificed. I have already +spoken of the systematic cruelty practised by the Spaniards from their +first occupation of the country, and of the dreadful effects of the +_mita_ (as the parcelling out of the people among the conquerors as +slaves was called, under the pretence of enabling them to learn trades +and to become domestic servants, as also to make them work in the +mines); but another injustice was the immediate cause of the outbreak. +This was the _repartimiento_. It was a law originally made by the +Spanish Government, authorising the _corregidores_ to distribute among +the natives goods imported from Europe at fixed prices, and which they +were compelled to purchase whether they required them or not. +Consequently, all sorts of things damaged and useless were sent out from +Spain to Peru, where they were certain of realising a profit to be +obtained nowhere else. Among them might be found silk stockings, +satins, and velvets--razors for men who never shaved, and spectacles for +those whose eyesight was excellent. I remember especially a consignment +of spectacles arriving to a merchant at Lima. He could nowhere dispose +of them, till he bethought himself of applying to a _corregidor_ of a +neighbouring district, who was his friend, to help him. The latter +threw no difficulty in the way. + +"Your goods shall be sold immediately, my friend," he replied; and +forthwith he issued an order that no Indian should appear at church or +at festivals unless adorned with a pair of spectacles, intimating the +place where they were to be sold. The poor people had to come and buy +the spectacles, and to pay a very high price for them into the bargain. + +The Spanish Government, when they framed the law, had doubtless no idea +that it would be thus abused; their intention being to civilise the +people by the introduction of European clothing and luxuries, and in +that manner to create a good market for the product of the industry of +the mother country. It is one of the many examples of the folly of +attempting to force the interests of commerce by unjust laws. For a +time a few merchants sold their goods; but the ultimate result, +independent of the bloodshed which it caused, was that the Indians took +a dislike to Spanish manufactures, and the Peruvian market was +ultimately lost for ever to Spain. + +The _repartimiento_ had lately been put in force by the _corregidores_ +with even more than the usual injustice. The _corregidores_ were, I +must explain, Spanish municipal officers, who had very great authority +in the districts they governed; and as they were the receivers of all +taxes, tributes, and customs, they were able to ensure it with unsparing +rapacity, which they did not fail to do in most instances. + +At length, after years of suffering, the Indian population were +thoroughly aroused, and determined to throw off the hated yoke of the +tyrants. Condorcanqui placed himself at their head; and before the +Spaniards were aware of the storm which was gathering, he had collected +a large but undisciplined army. He had two sons, called Andres and +Mariano, and a brother named Diogo, all of whom assumed the title of +Tupac Amaru, which means in the Quichua language, _the highly endowed_. +Several others of his relations also assumed the same title, and took +command of the patriots' forces in other parts of the country. The +Spaniards, despising the Indians, and regardless of any warnings they +might have received, were completely taken by surprise, and defeated in +all directions. The villages in whole districts were totally destroyed, +and several large towns were besieged, many of which were captured and +the inhabitants put to the sword. + +Of their first victory I had been a witness. Condorcanqui had been +_cacique_ of the province of Tungasuca, the _corregidor_ of which was +among the most exacting and rapacious of his class. For a long time the +Indian chief had brooded over the sufferings of his countrymen, till he +resolved to avenge them. He confided his plans to a few other +_caciques_ only, and to his own relatives. They prepared the people by +means of faithful emissaries throughout the country; and arms and +munitions of war were collected with the greatest secrecy and +expedition. At an appointed day the signal of revolt was given; and the +_corregidores_ in many of the provinces, whom they looked upon as their +principal oppressors, were seized and executed. + +The _corregidor_ of Tungasuca had been entertaining a party of friends +and some travellers at his house. The feast was over; they had taken +their _siesta_; and other guests had assembled to pass the evening with +music and dancing. His wife and daughters were there, and several +ladies young and lovely. The gay guitar was sounding in the hall, and +happy hearts and light feet were keeping time to the music. The +_corregidor_ was standing apart from the rest in earnest conversation +with a stranger. + +"This is my farewell assembly," he observed. "I have now, thank +Providence, amassed a fortune sufficient for my wants; and in a few +weeks' time I shall sail for my beloved Spain. This country is a good +one for making money, but for nothing else." + +"It is a fine country, though; and history tells us was once a perfect +paradise," remarked the stranger. + +"A paradise it might have been when the fields were better cultivated +and more mines were worked; but the people have chosen to die off, and +those who remain are idle and lazy, and will not work," answered the +_corregidor_, with a scornful laugh. + +"They have lately taken to care very little for religion either," +observed Padre Diogo, the family chaplain, who now joined the speakers. +"When we go among them with the saints to collect offerings, our boxes +come back not a quarter full." + +Just then a servant, pale with terror, rushed up to his master. + +"What is the matter?" asked the _corregidor_. "Speak, fool, speak!" for +the man could only utter some unintelligible sounds. + +"The Indians! the Indians!" cried the man, at length finding his voice. +"The house is surrounded by thousands of them!" + +"Impossible!" exclaimed the _corregidor_. "The slaves would not dare--" + +Just then an unearthly cry rent the air. The music ceased, and the +strangers hurried to go--the ladies clasping their partners' arms, and +the children clinging to their mothers. Some of the men went to the +windows. What the servant had reported was too true. On each side were +seen, by the beams of the pale moon, dense masses of armed savages, +forming an impenetrable barrier round the house; while others kept +arriving from every direction. + +"What means all this?" exclaimed the _corregidor_. "I will go out and +order the slaves to disperse." + +"O stay, stay!" cried his wife, clinging to him with an air of despair, +which showed her too true forebodings of evil. "They are exasperated +against you, and may do you harm. Let Padre Diogo go; he has influence +with the people, and may persuade them to depart." + +The _corregidor_ was easily persuaded to follow his wife's counsel, for +his conscience told him that the Indians had just cause to hate him. +One of the strangers suggested that efforts should instantly be made to +barricade the house, and prepare for defending it, should the Indians be +assembled with any hostile intention. The _corregidor_ was about to +give orders to that effect, when another loud unearthly shriek paralysed +the nerves of all the inmates. + +"Oh, go, Senor Padre, go! save my husband and children!" cried the +terrified wife. + +"Save us! save us!" cried the guests, now fully aware of the horrible +danger that threatened them. + +Thus urged, Padre Diogo prepared, with many misgivings, to go forth and +appeal to the people. He looked round with a sad countenance on those +he had lately seen so full of life and gaiety. + +"May Heaven and the saints protect you, my children," he said solemnly. + +Then taking in his hand a crucifix which hung in a little oratory near +the hall, he opened the front door of the house and stepped out among +the crowd. He held the sacred symbol of his faith aloft in his hand. +It served as his safeguard. No one attempted to injure him; but before +he could utter a word, he was surrounded and hurried away from the +house. No one would listen to his prayers and entreaties. + +"Mercy, mercy, for the unfortunates in yonder mansion!" he cried. + +"Mercy, mercy, Senor Padre! did they ever show mercy to us?" exclaimed a +voice from the crowd. + +He looked back; the Indians were pouring into the house. Loud agonised +shrieks of women and children reached his ears. A few shots were heard, +followed by the triumphant shouts of the Indians. Flames were seen +bursting forth from the house. They burned up bright and clear in the +night air. By their light he observed a man dragged along among a crowd +of Indians. They stopped and appeared to be busily at work. In a short +time a gibbet was erected near the burning building. + +"You are required to shrive a dying man, Senor Padre," said an Indian +who approached him. + +He was led towards the engine of death. There, beneath it, he found, +pale with terror, and trembling in every limb, the _corregidor_, his +patron. + +"They tell me, my son, that I am to perform the last offices of religion +for the dying," said Padre Diogo. + +"For me, Padre, for me!" exclaimed the _corregidor_ in a voice of agony. +"Alas! it is cruel mockery. They have murdered my wife and children, +my guests and servants--all, all are dead! and now they will murder me." + +"I will plead for you; I will try to save your life," said the padre. +"But they cannot have been so cruel--they cannot have murdered those +innocents!" + +"Alas! I speak true. Before my eyes they slew all I love on earth, and +they only preserved me to make me endure longer suffering," said the +wretched man. + +"You are delaying to perform your duty," cried a voice from among the +crowd of Indians. + +"Mercy, mercy, for him, my children!" ejaculated the padre. + +"He showed us none," answered a hundred voices in return. "Proceed, +proceed, or he must die without shrift." + +The padre felt there was no hope; but he attempted to make another +appeal. He was answered in the same strain. + +"My son, you must prepare your soul for another world," he whispered +into the ear of the _corregidor_. + +The unhappy man saw that indeed there was no hope for him, but still he +clung to life. He dared not die. At that moment all his deeds of +cruelty, all his tyranny, came crowding to his memory in a light they +had never before worn. Of what use now was to him the wealth he had +thus unjustly acquired? Oh! if men would at all times and seasons +remember that they must one day die, and give an account of their deeds +on earth, would it not restrain them from committing acts of injustice +and wrong? The _corregidor_ attempted to enumerate his misdeeds. They +were too many for him to recollect. + +"I have offended--I have miserably offended!" he exclaimed in his agony. + +"God is full of mercy. He rejoices in pardoning the repentant sinner," +answered the padre. + +But his words brought no hope to a doubting mind. He felt that his +crimes were too great for pardon; though till that moment he had not +considered them as crimes. + +The priest then proceeded to administer to him the last sacrament of the +Roman Catholic Church. He had scarcely concluded, when the Indians, who +had stood around in reverential silence, raised a loud clamour for the +instant execution of the culprit; but Padre Diogo was a brave man. + +"My children," he cried, "you have already committed a great sin in +murdering the innocents who this night have fallen by your hands. Their +blood will cry to Heaven for vengeance. Preserve this man's life, +repent, and pray for mercy." + +A _cacique_ now stepped forward from among the crowd. + +"Senor Padre," he said, "we listen to your words with reverence, for you +are a priest, and have ever proved our friend; but this man was placed +in authority over us, and most cruelly did he abuse that authority. He +has been tried and found guilty. As his ancestors murdered our last +Inca, the great Atahualpa, so he must die. He has but one minute more +to live. We have already shown him more mercy than he deserves." + +The tone, as much as the words of the speaker, convinced the padre that +his penitent must die. To the last he stood by his side, whispering +such words of consolation as he could offer. Several Indians, appointed +as executioners, advanced; and in an instant the miserable man was +hurried into eternity. + +"For this man's death, the vengeance of his countrymen will fall +terribly on your heads, my children," exclaimed the padre; for the proud +spirit of the Spaniard was aroused within his bosom, and he did not fear +what they might do to him. Too truly were his words afterwards +verified. No one seemed to heed what he said; and he was led away from +the spot by a party of Indians, in whose charge he was given by the +chief Tupac Amaru. To his horror, he found that every man, woman, and +child among the white inhabitants of the village had fallen victims to +the exasperated fury of the Indians. + +This account was given me some time afterwards by Padre Diogo himself; +though I thought the present a proper opportunity of introducing it. + +I will now return to my own narrative. I rapidly recovered my strength, +and in a few more days was able to leave the hut and walk about without +assistance; but my anxiety for the fate of my family was in no way +relieved; and though Manco made all the inquiries in his power, he could +afford me no consolation. I was sitting one evening in front of the +hut, meditating what course to pursue, when Manco came and threw himself +on the ground by my side. He took my hand and looked kindly in my face; +but I saw that his countenance wore an expression of deep melancholy. +With a trembling voice I asked him what news he had to communicate. + +"Bad news, bad news, my young friend," he said; and then stopped, as if +afraid of proceeding. + +"Of my parents?" I inquired, for I could not bear the agony of +suspense. "Speak, Manco; has Ithulpo not arrived?" + +"Alas! no," he answered, sorrowfully shaking his head. "I have too +certain evidence of Ithulpo's death; and, faithful as he was, he would +never have deserted your parents. His body has been discovered near a +village which has been attacked and burned by my countrymen. There can +be no doubt that they had taken refuge within it. Alas that I should +say it, who have received such benefits from them! The Indians put to +the sword every inhabitant they found there, and among them your parents +must have perished." + +At first I was stunned with what he said, though I could not bring +myself to believe the horrid tale. + +"I will go in search of them," I at length exclaimed. "I will find them +if they are alive; or I must see their bodies, if, as you say, they have +been murdered, before I can believe you. The Indians, whom they always +loved and pitied, could not have been guilty of such barbarity. If your +countrymen have murdered their benefactors, I tell you that they are +miserable worthless wretches; and the Spaniards will be justified in +sweeping them from the face of the earth." + +As I gave utterance to these exclamations, I felt my spirit maddening +within me. I cared not what I said; I felt no fear for the +consequences. At first, after I had spoken, a cloud came over Manco's +brow; but it quickly cleared away, and he regarded me with looks of deep +commiseration. + +"Should I not feel as he does, if all those I loved best on earth had +been slaughtered?" he muttered to himself. "I feel for you, my friend, +and most deeply grieve," he said aloud, taking my hand, which I had +withdrawn, and watering it with his tears. "Yet you are unjust in thus +speaking of my people. They did not kill your parents knowingly. The +sin rests with the Spaniards, whom they desired to punish; and the +innocent have perished with the guilty. Sure I am that not an Indian +would have injured them; and had they been able to come into our camp, +they would have been received with honour and reverence." + +I hung down my head, and my bursting heart at length found relief in +tears. I was still very weak, or I believe that my feelings would have +assumed a fiercer character. + +"I have been unjust to you, Manco," I said, when I could once more give +utterance to my thoughts. "I will try not to blame your countrymen for +your sake; but I must leave you, to discover whether your dreadful +report is true or false." + +He took my hand again, and pressed it within his own. It was night +before I was tolerably composed; and as I threw myself on my couch +within the hut, I wept bitterly as a child, till sleep came to relieve +my misery. I must not dwell on the anguish I felt on waking--the utter +wretchedness of the next day. I was too ill to move, though I prayed +for strength to enable me to prosecute my search. Strength and health +came again at last; and in four days after I had heard the account given +by Manco, I insisted that I was able to undergo the fatigue to which I +must be exposed. Nothing that Manco or his wife could say had power to +deter me. + +"You will be taken by the cruel Spaniards, and executed as a spy," said +Nita, the tears dropping from her eyes as she spoke. + +"No Indian on whom you can rely will be able to accompany you, and you +cannot find your way alone," observed Manco. "Besides, in these unhappy +times robbers and desperadoes of every sort are ranging through the +country; and if you escape other dangers, they will murder you." + +"My kind friends," I answered, taking both their hands, "I feel your +regard for me; but I fear neither Spaniards nor Indians, nor robbers nor +wild beasts, nor deserts nor storms, nor heat nor cold, nor hunger nor +thirst. I have a holy duty to perform, and I should be unworthy of the +name I bear if I shrunk from encountering the danger which may be before +me." + +"If go you must, and I see that there is no use in attempting to +dissuade you, I will give you every assistance in my power," said Manco. + +And thus it was arranged that I was to set out on my perilous +undertaking the next day but one, by which time he would be able to +accompany me to the foot of the mountains, though he would not be absent +long from his important duty in the patriots' army. + + + +CHAPTER TEN. + +MY WANDERINGS WITH MANCO--HOW A PADRE TOLD HIS BEADS, BUT HIS BEADS TOLD +HIM NOTHING. + +The morning I was to set out arrived at last, and I bid farewell to Nita +and her little infant, which I kissed over and over again for its +mother's sake; for my heart was full of gratitude for her kindness and +compassion. Manco had procured a mule for me--a small but strong +animal, with great sagacity. It was very sure-footed, and could climb +up the most rugged rocks, and slip down mountain precipices like a goat. +It was of the greatest value to me; for, weak as I was, I could not +possibly have walked a mile of my journey. We had to descend some way, +and then to travel along the side of the mountain range, in order to +gain the road which led across the Cordilleras. I speak of the path as +a road; but in many spots it was so narrow and difficult that I thought +it would be impossible for any mule to get along. Here and there large +blocks of stone had been placed, with the intention of facilitating the +ascent. My mule sprung up them with such violent jerks that I was at +first almost thrown over his head; but when we had to descend, he picked +his way with great caution. Manco went before me with a long pole in +his hand, ready to assist me if I required it. + +After proceeding some way, I observed a large valley spread out at our +feet. It was full of people and numerous tents and huts. Manco pointed +to it with an expression of pride in his countenance. + +"There," said he, "you see the headquarters of the army which is to +liberate our country from the power of the conqueror. The Inca Tupac +Amaru himself, and his two young and noble sons, are there. In a few +days the whole army will be assembled, when we march upon Cuzco, once +more to reinstate our sovereign in the capital of his ancestors." + +Manco's dark eyes flashed proudly as he spoke; for after the recent +success of the Indian arms he had no doubt of victory. I thought +differently. Hitherto the Indians had fought among mountains, where +discipline was of little avail, and their bows and slings could send +their missiles with effect; or they had attacked unfortified and +unprepared villages; but in the neighbourhood of Cuzco they would be in +an open valley, where the cavalry and artillery of the Spaniards could +be brought into play, and I trembled for the consequences. I was +unwilling to damp Manco's ardour; but I endeavoured to point out the +dangers I foresaw, and urged him to persuade the chiefs not to be +over-confident. + +We kept along the ridge of the height forming the side of the valley +without descending, and I was thus able to obtain a full view of the +Indian army. I was surprised not only at the vast number of people +collected, but at the apparent order which prevailed, and at the great +state which the Inca and his chief officers maintained. In the centre +of the camp, amid a number of banners fluttering in the breeze, was +erected a large canopy of gay-coloured cloth, beneath which was a +throne, richly ornamented with gold and silver. A flight of steps led +to it, along which were ranged a body of guards armed with battle-axes +and spears. The Inca sat on his throne, dressed in the ancient costume +of his ancestors, which I have before described; and officers of various +ranks kept continually coming up to receive orders. As they approached, +they bowed reverentially before him, and knelt at his feet while he +addressed them. I could scarcely believe that what I saw was a reality, +and that I was not dreaming of the accounts I had read of the early +history of the country. It did not then occur to me that much valuable +time was thus lost to the Indian cause in idle ceremony; and that Tupac +Amaru would have had a better chance of success had he at once swept the +country from north to south with his forces, before the Spaniards had +recovered from their terror and dismay at their first defeat. + +After stopping for a few minutes to gaze at the novel and interesting +scene, we turned up a path through a ravine, and were quickly again in +the solitude of the mountains. We travelled upwards for three days, +sleeping at nights at the huts of Indians, where we received a warm +welcome from their wives, but the men were in all cases absent. We were +now crossing the Puna heights, as the table-lands on the upper part of +the Cordilleras are called. We were some fourteen thousand feet above +the level of the sea. On either side arose the lofty summits of the +Cordilleras, covered with the ice of centuries. Before us stretched out +to a great extent the level heights, covered with the dull yellow Puna +grass, blending its tint with the greenish hue of the glaciers. It was +truly a wild and desolate scene. Herds of vicunas approached to gaze +with wonder at us, and then turning affrighted, fled away with the +swiftness of the wind. The Puna stag, with stately step, advanced from +his lair in the recesses of the mountains, and gazed on us with his +large wondering eyes. Farther off were groups of huancas, looking +cautiously at us as we passed, while the rock-rabbits disported nimbly +around us. I begged Manco not to shoot them, for we did not require +food, and I never liked killing an animal for sport. + +The mountain air and exercise had completely restored my strength, when +on a sudden an indescribable oppression overcame me. My heart throbbed +audibly, and my breathing became short and interrupted, while a weight +as if of lead lay on my chest. My lips swelled and burst, blood flowed +from my eyelids, and I began to lose my senses. I should have fallen +from my mule had not Manco lifted me off. A grey mist floated before my +eyes, and I could neither see, hear, nor feel distinctly. Manco sat +down, and took my head in his lap; when after a time I began to recover, +and I saw that he was anxiously looking at a dense mass of clouds +gathering above us. + +"Up, up, my friend, and mount if you value your life!" he said. "You +are better now. A storm is about to burst, and we must face it boldly." + +Scarcely had he spoken, when, loud peals of thunder were heard, and +lightning darted from the skies. Down, too, came the snow in flakes, so +heavy that it was impossible to see many yards before us. + +"We must push on," observed Manco. "We have lost much time already, and +night will overtake us before we can reach the nearest village." The +snow, however, fell faster, and completely concealed all signs of the +path. "When the snow-storm has ceased, I shall easily find the way by +the flight of the birds we are certain to see," he continued. "So, fear +not. You are suffering from the keen air of the mountains, and you will +quickly recover when we begin to descend to lower ground." + +Even his sagacity was at fault, and we soon found that we had wandered +from the right path. As I did not grow worse, I kept up my spirits. +Two or three hours passed away, and the snow ceased. It had scarcely +done so, when the clouds opened, and the bright glance of the burning +sun burst forth dazzlingly on the white expanse of snow before me. In a +moment I felt my eyes stricken with almost total blindness. A cry of +horror escaped me. I fancied that I should not recover. Manco tried to +console me, assuring me that I was merely suffering from the _surumpe_, +a common complaint in those regions. + +"I ought to have guarded you against it," he said. "Strangers +unaccustomed to the sight of the glittering snow constantly suffer from +it; but it will soon pass away." + +I, however, thought differently, though I was unwilling to complain to +him. We went on as fast as we could; but the sun set when we were still +a long way from the edge of the plain. We had with difficulty avoided +several swamps, in which he had told me animals and men were sometimes +lost. They are the chief dangers of that region. Fortunately, he +recognised a range of lofty rocks near us. + +"There is a cavern within them not far off, where we must rest for the +night," he said. "We might have a worse lodging, for we shall there, at +all events, be sheltered from the snow and wind." + +It was now perfectly dark; but after searching for some time, we +succeeded in discovering the cavern. While he tethered my male outside, +I staggered in, and, overcome with fatigue and the pain I was suffering, +sunk upon the ground, a stone which lay near me serving for a pillow. I +begged him to let me remain where I was, while he refreshed himself with +some of the provisions we had brought with us. We had no means of +striking a light: and as he could afford me no assistance beyond +throwing a poncho over me, he did not interfere; but soon afterwards, +stretching himself out near me, he fell asleep. Having been on foot all +day, he required rest as much as I did. As soon as I fell into a +slumber, the smarting pain of the _surumpe_ awoke me, and I was obliged +to give up all hope of sleep. How long the night seemed! My thoughts +all the time were active, and I need scarcely say that they were fixed +on my expedition, and means of accomplishing my object. + +It was towards the morning, when a dreadful turn was given to them. +Happening to stretch out my hand, it came in contact with a cold clammy +substance. I drew it back, and an indescribable horror crept over me; +but influenced by an impulse I could not control, I again put it out +towards the object. It rested on the face of a human being. I was +certain that I could not be mistaken. I felt the mouth, and nose, and +hair; but the features were rigid and immoveable. It was that of a +corpse. Constitutionally fearless, under other circumstances I should +have got up and removed myself from the disagreeable neighbourhood, +supposing that some unfortunate traveller had like us taken shelter +there, and died from cold or hunger; but weak with mental and bodily +suffering, I had now no power over myself, and lay trembling with +horror, not even venturing to call out to Manco to break the dreadful +spell which was upon me. It is impossible to describe my feelings, or +the ideas which took possession of my mind. Whose corpse could it be? +Might there not be others in the cave? I thought, if I could be said to +be thinking. At last, I believe I swooned away, for most certainly I +did not sleep. An exclamation from Manco aroused me. Daylight was +streaming into the cavern, and he was sitting up and gazing towards me. +In another instant he was by my side, and, with careful forethought, was +endeavouring to keep my attention fixed on himself, so as to prevent me +from seeing the dreadful objects in the inner part of the cavern. + +"Manco," I said, "I have had a horrid dream. I fancied that the cavern +was full of corpses." As I spoke I really thought I had been dreaming. + +Without answering me, he lifted me up, and led me towards the open air. +An impulse I could not restrain made me turn my head; and on the ground, +close to where I had rested, I saw the corpse of a man. Trembling in +every limb, I stopped to look at it. It was that of a white man. +Several ghastly wounds were seen on the broad chest, and another on the +head. The dress and the full black beard and moustache showed me that +he was a Spaniard. There were no other corpses to be seen; and as I +looked at the object in the broad daylight, with the fresh breeze +blowing in my face, the undefined horror I had before felt completely +vanished. I felt ashamed of my previous fears, and releasing myself +from his support, assured him that I had recovered my strength. The +effort itself assisted to restore my nerves to their usual tension; and +I was able to turn back and examine the corpse. + +"Who can have murdered the man and placed him here?" I asked. + +Manco shook his head. "It is a bad thing--a very bad thing!" he +replied, as he examined the wounds of the man. "I fear my countrymen +have done it. He must have been taken prisoner, for I find the marks of +cords round his wrists, and he attempted to escape, and thus was killed; +but ask no further questions. Come, it is time to proceed." + +The little mule was safe outside, so I mounted and hastened from the +spot. + +As I rode on, my spirits returned with the air and exercise, and my mind +no longer dwelt on the events of the previous night; and the effects of +the _surumpe_ also began to wear off. Several rock-rabbits crossed our +path, two of which Manco shot; and when we came to a height which +sheltered us from the wind, we halted for breakfast. Having tethered +the mule, we set to work to collect the dry grass and the stems of +creepers growing from the clefts of the rocks for fuel. Manco had with +him the means of striking a light, and a fire was soon kindled, over +which we cooked the rabbits and boiled some cocoa in a tin pannikin, by +the aid of which, with some Indian corn bread, we made a very fair meal. +In an hour more we reached the edge of the _Alto_, or high plain, over +which we had been travelling. Before us lay, deep and deeper, the dark +valleys of the lower mountain regions, among which, scarcely +discernible, were scattered numerous Indian villages. Far beyond a more +level country stretched out, till it was lost in the distant line of the +horizon. For several hours we descended, till we began to experience a +very great change of temperature. We rested that night at a village +inhabited entirely by Indians. It was situated among such inaccessible +rocks that they had no fear of being surprised by the Spaniards. To my +great grief, Manco told me that he must quit me by dawn on the morrow. +I of course could not be so selfish as to wish to detain him. + +"I have been, fortunately, able to find a trustworthy guide for you," he +said. "He is a lad a year or so younger than you are, but very quick +and intelligent. He is of a white complexion, though he has an Indian +heart, for he has been among us from his childhood. When an infant he +was discovered by some of our people in a wood near a Spanish village, +and was brought hither by them. Their idea is, that either he had been +deserted by his mother, or that his parents had been murdered by +robbers, who, for some reason or other, saved his life. He is called +Pedro. He speaks Spanish well; and should you fall among the Spaniards, +he will be supposed to belong to their people. Should you discover your +parents, of which I have no hopes, give him his liberty, and he will +return to us; and if you abandon the attempt, he will lead you back to +us. But I will bring him to you, and he will speak for himself." + +On this Manco left the hut where we were lodging, and soon returned, +accompanied by a youth, whose clear complexion and full black eyes +showed that he was descended from the race who had conquered Peru. + +"Are you willing to accompany me, Pedro?" I asked in Spanish. "You +will probably have many dangers to encounter." + +He looked at me attentively for some time, as if examining my +countenance to judge if he could trust me, before he answered. + +"Yes," he at length said. "I will aid you gladly in the work you are +about. I care not for dangers. God will protect me, as He has before +done." + +I was much struck with his words and manner, and gladly accepted his +services. + +"But I have no means of rewarding you, Pedro," I remarked. "Some day I +may have, but the time is probably far distant." + +"A good action is its own reward," he answered, in an unaffected tone. +"I require no reward. My chief and benefactor wishes me to go; and I +desire to obey him." + +Pedro was an unusual character. He possessed all the genius and fire of +his Spanish fathers, with the simple education of an Indian +uncontaminated by mixing with the world. The next morning he appeared +habited in the dress of a Spanish farmer's son, which was the character +he was to assume should he be interrogated. He rode a mule similar to +mine. He and I set forward together towards the west at the same time +that Manco started to return to the Indian camp. I found that Manco had +supplied him amply with money to pay our expenses, when we should reach +the territory inhabited by Spaniards; but he told me that we should +require none while we wandered among the Indian villages. + +"I thought that all the Indians were poor, and that even a chief like +Manco would have little or no money," I remarked. + +He smiled as he answered, "When men are slaves, if they are wise they +conceal their wealth, lest their masters should take it from them. +These mountains are full of rich mines of gold and silver, with which +none but the Indians are acquainted. Many such exist, known only to +particular families, to whom the knowledge has been handed down from +father to son. Perhaps Manco has such a mine; but he is too wise to +speak of it." + +I did not think it right to inquire further about the source of Manco's +wealth; but I was satisfied that he could spare what he had provided for +me. My young guide, however, was inclined to be communicative, and he +beguiled the way by a number of interesting anecdotes. + +"O yes," he continued; "the Indians are wise to conceal their riches; +for if the Spaniards discovered them, they would no longer be theirs. +Not far from this, there lives a good padre, the curate of the parish. +He is very much liked by all the Indians, though he has his faults like +other men. He is very kind-hearted and generous, and is ready to +administer to the sick in body as well as in mind; but he is sadly +addicted to gambling. He will play all day and night with anybody who +will play with him, till he has lost his last real, and has often, I +know, to go supperless to bed. When the Indians know by his looks and +his staying at home that he is in poverty, they will send him fowls and +eggs, and bread and provisions of all sorts. One day he had just +received his yearly stipend, when the evil spirit came upon him, and he +went away to the nearest town and lost it all. He came home very +miserable, and could scarcely attend to his duties. Fortunately for +him, an Indian, whose sick child he had attended, had compassion on his +grief, and told him to be comforted. The next day, as soon as it was +dark, the Indian came to his house, bringing a bag full of rich silver +ore. The padre was very grateful; but instead of spending it wisely to +supply his wants, he took it into the town, and it went the way of his +stipend--into the pockets of his gambling companions. Again he returned +home as full of grief as before. The Indian soon heard of what had +happened, for he loved the padre very much; so he brought him another +bag of silver. The padre's propensity was incurable, and he lost that +as he had done the first. The Indian's generosity was not yet worn out, +and he brought him a third bag full of ore. When the padre saw it, he +could scarcely believe his own senses. + +"`I fear that I am robbing you, my kind friend,' he said. `I shall +bring you into the poverty to which I have foolishly reduced myself.' + +"`O no, Senor Padre; there is plenty more where this comes from,' +returned the Indian. `What I have given you is but like a drop of water +in the ocean to the abundance of rich ore which there lies concealed.' + +"`If that be the case, my kind friend, why not show it to me?' exclaimed +the padre. `I shall soon become a rich man, and will no longer think of +gambling.' + +"After much persuasion, the Indian agreed to lead the padre to the mine, +on condition that he would consent to be blindfolded both going and +returning. The next night they accordingly set out, the Indian leading +the padre by the hand. After walking for some hours, the bandage was +taken from the padre's eyes, and he found himself in a spot he had never +before visited. The Indian set to work, and clearing away a quantity of +earth and bushes, exposed to the delighted eyes of the padre a cave full +of glittering masses of pure silver. + +"`There, Senor Padre, is the mine I spoke of. Take as much as you can +carry, and we will return speedily home,' said the Indian. + +"The padre filled a number of bags he had brought with him under his +cloak, till he could scarcely stagger onwards with the weight. While +also he was collecting the treasure, avarice seized his soul, and he +forgot the dictates of honour. He was then again blindfolded; and he +set forward on his return in the same manner as he had come. But though +he had got as much silver as would have supplied him with food and +clothing for many years, he wanted more. He contrived, therefore, as he +thought unperceived, to break the string of his rosary, and as he +returned he dropped one bead, then another, hoping thus to trace his way +by means of them back to the mine. At last he reached home, +congratulating himself on his cleverness. Of what use, he thought, is +all that silver to the Indians? They are not the better for it, but I +shall know how to spend it. He was eager to set out the next morning, +when just as he was leaving his house, the Indian stepped in at his +door. + +"`Ah, Senor Padre, I am come to see how you are after your long walk,' +said the Indian, smiling. + +"`Very well, my son--very well, thank the saints,' answered the padre. +`I am just going out to take another.' + +"`I hope it may be a pleasant one, Senor Padre,' observed the Indian. +`But I forgot--I came to return you your rosary, which you dropped last +night.' + +"And to the dismay of the padre, the Indian gave him all the beads which +he had carefully collected. The padre had nothing to say for himself; +but the Indian did not utter any other rebuke, though he never again +offered to bring him any more silver ore." + +"I think the Indian behaved very well; but I can find no excuse for the +padre," I remarked. + +With similar stories, which he told with far more spirit than I have at +this distance of time been able to give to them, Pedro endeavoured to +divert my mind from dwelling on the thoughts which he saw oppressed it. +He certainly succeeded better than I could have expected. + +Our road led us over a lofty height, at the summit of which we halted to +rest ourselves and our mules. As we were sitting on the ground, and +employed in eating our dinner, we observed a large condor high above us +in the air. He approached us with outstretched wings, and at first I +thought that he had been attracted by the provisions we carried, and +that he was about to attack us. I cocked a gun Manco had given me, and +prepared to shoot him should he come near us; but he passed beyond us, +and presently he pounced down on the ground at some distance off. +Instead, however, of his rising again with his prey in his talons as we +expected, we saw him violently flapping his wings; and, to our great +surprise, directly afterwards he was surrounded by a number of Indians, +who began to strike him about the head with sticks to keep him quiet. +Our curiosity induced us to run as fast as we could towards the spot, +when we found that the condor had been caught in a trap laid on purpose +for him. A hole had been dug in the ground, over which had been spread +a fresh cowhide, with parts of the flesh still adhering to it. +Underneath this an Indian had concealed himself with a rope in his hand. +The condor, attracted by the smell of the flesh, had darted down on the +hide, when the Indian below had firmly bound his claws together, and +held on with all his might, the cowhide protecting him from the attacks +of the bird's beak. The other Indians had been concealed near the spot +to help their companion. They quickly secured the monster bird, and +prepared to carry him off in triumph to their village. At first when we +appeared, they looked suspiciously at us; but after Pedro had spoken to +them, their looks brightened up, and they invited us to accompany them +to their dwellings, which were on the other side of the height. + +We gladly accepted their invitations, for they lived near the road we +wished to pursue. I have so often spoken of the wretchedness of Indian +huts, and of the coarseness of the food, that I need not describe them. +They were no exceptions to the general rule. The scene before them was +wild and dreary. At some distance off appeared a mass of long rushes, +beyond which extended a sheet of water, the opposite shore of which was +scarcely visible. Numerous flocks of waterfowl were hovering over the +marshy banks of this lake, which I found was of very considerable +extent, though inferior to that of Titicaca, the largest in South +America. + +Pedro and I were sitting round a fire in the hut with our Indian hosts, +before retiring to rest, when a loud moaning noise was heard in the +distance. The Indians regarded each other with terrified looks. + +"What can cause that noise?" I inquired of Pedro. He shook his head, +and turned to one of the Indians. + +"It forebodes evil to the herdsmen," answered the man. "In yonder lake, +which is so profound that no plummet has ever reached the bottom, there +dwell huge monsters, neither beasts nor fish. No man has ever seen one +near; but at night, when the moon is shining, they have been descried at +a distance, prowling about in search of prey. When that noise is heard, +which has just sounded in our ears, it is a sign that they have attacked +some of the cattle feeding in the surrounding pastures; and to-morrow +morning there is no doubt several will be found missing." + +"But cannot the monsters be caught or killed?" I asked. "Surely it is +foolish in the herdsmen to allow the cattle to be killed with impunity." + +"Who would venture to do it?" exclaimed the Indian with a look of +horror. "Besides, I told you, Senor, that no one has seen them near +enough to observe their form; and sure I am that neither stones cast +from slings, nor arrows shot from bows, nor bullets from guns, would +pierce their hides." + +"I should like to encounter one of these monsters," I replied. "A ball +from a good rifle would soon enable me to judge what they are like." + +"May Heaven protect you from such an adventure!" answered the Indian. + +"If I ever return here, we will see." + +I said this because I very much doubted the existence of the monsters he +spoke of, and suspected that the moanings we heard arose most probably +from some of the cattle which had sunk into the marshes near the lake, +and were unable to extricate themselves. In every part of the world +where I have since been, I have heard similar legends, and have in most +instances been able to discover a very probable explanation of the +mystery. + +The rays of the sun were shining on the waters of the lake as we passed +one end of it the next morning, and it now wore a far more cheerful +aspect than it had done on the previous evening. The two next days of +our journey were one continual descent, and we were now approaching the +ruined village, near which the body of the faithful Ithulpo was said to +have been discovered, and in which I supposed my parents had taken +refuge. + +I could no longer attend to any of Pedro's remarks, but rode on sadly +and moodily, dreading to find the truth of the dreadful report I had +heard, confirmed, yet not daring to believe in its possibility. It was +now necessary to proceed with great caution, for we were in a part of +the country which had been inhabited chiefly by Spaniards; but we found +that they had all fled or been destroyed, and the blackened ruins of +farm-houses and hamlets met our sight every league we proceeded. Here +and there we encountered an Indian, of whom Pedro made inquiries; but +from no one could we obtain information to guide us. + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN. + +DREADFUL SURMISES--TAKEN PRISONERS BY INDIANS. + +We were passing over a somewhat level country, when Pedro pointed to a +line of blackened walls and charred timbers in the distance. + +"Yonder is the place you seek, Senor," he said, in a tone of +commiseration which touched my heart. "You are seeking for parents whom +you have known, and their memory is dear to you. I, alas! have never +known any parents to love, and my heart is vacant." + +I knew he wished to utter words of consolation, but I have no +recollection of what more he said. My mind was too full of the work +before me. I urged on my mule, for I felt an eager desire to search +through the village; yet what information could I expect to find in +those deserted ruins? As we approached, we saw a wretched half-starved +dog skulking among the walls. He looked at us to see if we were friends +whom he knew, and then fled away. Not a human being was to be seen. We +passed through the desolate streets. Some of the walls had been cast +down, and the roofs of all the houses had been burned and fallen in. +The church only was standing; but the doors were open, and the interior +presented a scene of horror which baffles description. Numbers of the +unfortunate inhabitants had fled there as their last place of refuge, +but it had proved no sanctuary to them. In every part of the building, +on the steps of the altar, and by the altar itself, were seen heaped +together the mangled remnants of the forms of human beings. Their +dresses showed that they were those of men, women, and children; but +weeks had now passed since they were slain, and their bones alone +remained. The beasts and even the birds of prey had been there, or it +would have been impossible to enter into that charnel-house. + +Pale and trembling I wandered through it, scarcely able to draw breath +from the foul air which filled the place; but no sign of those I sought +could I find. At length I staggered out again into the open air, where +Pedro, who was holding our mules, waited for me. I determined next to +search each of the houses separately. + +As we were wandering through one of them, an object met my sight which +riveted my attention. It was a silk handkerchief. With a trembling +hand I picked it up. It was exactly such a one as I remembered to have +seen my sister Lilly wear round her neck. It was of an ordinary sort; a +little three-cornered handkerchief with a pink fringe. There might be +many such in the country. This might have been the property of some +Spanish girl or young Chola, for there was no mark on it to distinguish +it; but still, as I looked at it, I felt almost confident that it had +been my sister's. How it had escaped being burned or trampled on I +could not tell. Perhaps it had been dropped near one of the outside +walls, which the fire did not reach, and had been blown by the wind into +the corner of the room, where I found it. Pedro was of the same +opinion. I placed it carefully in my bosom, though how it could prove +of use I could not tell. We searched and searched in vain through every +other house in the village; but no other trace or sign which I could +recognise could we find. The whole day was thus spent, and night almost +surprised us while we were still in the ruins. + +Near the village was a meadow, where Pedro had led our mules to feed; +and we had, besides, found some Indian corn, which we had given them; so +they were in good condition to proceed. But after the example of the +state of the country we had seen, it was impossible to say where we +could hope to find shelter for ourselves. I asked Pedro if he would +object to remain in the ruins all night. + +"Oh, may the good saints defend us from such a thing!" he answered with +a look of dismay. "After the sights we have seen, how can you think of +doing so, Senor?" + +"The dead cannot hurt us, you know; and we can easily fortify ourselves +against any attack of wild beasts," I answered. "We will shut our mules +up in a room of one of the houses where no people have been killed; and +we can sleep in a room next to them. We shall find plenty of timber to +barricade ourselves in, and they will give us good warning if any wild +beast comes near to attempt an entrance." + +For a long time Pedro was not convinced of the wisdom of my proposal; or +rather, his dislike to the idea of remaining prevented him from being +so. His objections were very natural; and I own that had I not been +desirous of making a further search in the neighbourhood the following +morning, I would myself have much rather proceeded, if there had been +sufficient daylight to enable us to find another resting-place. This +was, however, now totally out of the question; so Pedro was obliged to +accede to my wishes. I fixed upon a house on the outskirts of the +village, which had, it appeared, been the residence of a person of +superior wealth and rank. Some of the rooms had been but little +injured. One of them I selected as our abode for the night, and an +adjoining one as a stable for our mules. Having collected some food for +our trusty little animals, we brought them inside the house. We first +cleared away the rubbish out of the rooms, and then placed against the +doorway some timbers and planks, which we tore up from the floors, so as +effectually to prevent the ingress of any wild beasts. + +By the time we had thus fortified ourselves it had become perfectly +dark; and I must own that a feeling such as I had never before +experienced, crept over me, as I thus found myself shut up with my young +companion in that abode of the dead. I knew that I must arouse myself, +or it would master me completely. + +"Come, Pedro," said I, "we must now light a fire. It will serve to +cheer our spirits, and to keep us warm, for I feel the evening chilly." + +The floor of the room we were in was composed of bricks, so that we +could make our fire in the middle of it; and as there was no roof, we +had no fear of being incommoded by the smoke. From among the rubbish I +managed to pick out several smaller bits of timber, which had escaped +being totally consumed, and some of the dry grass we had collected for +our mules served as lighter fuel to kindle a flame. Having thus +collected sufficient materials, we piled some of them up in the middle +of the room, and kept the rest in a corner, to feed our fire as it +required. + +A flame was soon kindled; and as it burned up brightly, it contributed +very much to banish the feelings which had before oppressed me, aided, I +suspect, by the exertions which it had been necessary to make to collect +the fuel. I have always found that exertion both of mind and body is +the best, I may say the only, remedy for melancholy and foreboding +thoughts. The light enabled us to find more fuel, which we agreed it +would be requisite to husband with care, so as to make it last till +sunrise. We had no wish to be again left in darkness. + +The light, however, served to show us more clearly the desolation of the +place. The walls were bare, and not a particle of furniture had been +left; for the Indians had carried off from the village everything that +had escaped the flames. Above our heads a few charred timbers only +remained of the roof, beyond which the stars were seen shining from out +of the dark sky. + +"We might have been very much worse off," I observed to Pedro, as we sat +by the fire eating the provisions which we had brought with us. After +supper we lay down in the cleanest spot we could find, and tried to +recruit our strength by sleep. + +I was awoke by Pedro's hand touching my shoulder. I looked up, at first +scarcely able to remember where I was. He had just before thrown some +chips on the fire, which made it blaze brightly. I saw that he had his +fingers on his lips to enforce silence, so I did not speak; but his +looks showed that something had alarmed him. I soon discovered the +cause, from hearing the footsteps of several persons in the +neighbourhood. I was about to inquire, in a whisper, who they could be, +when I observed him glance up at the top of the wall above us. I turned +my eyes in the same direction, and then I saw, by the light of the fire, +the elf-like locks and red-coloured countenance of a wild Indian, who +was gazing down upon us. He looked as much surprised to find us there +as we were to see him. + +"Pray, friend, who are you, and what do you seek here?" asked Pedro, in +the Quichua language. + +The stranger made no answer, and presently afterwards a dozen other +Indians sprung up to the top of the wall. They were dressed and painted +as the warriors of a distant tribe, dwelling in the northern part of the +country. After looking at us for an instant, they fixed their arrows in +their bows, and were drawing the strings when Pedro shouted out to +them:-- + +"Stay your hands. We are friends of the Indians, and under the +protection of the Inca Tupac Amaru." At the same time he held up a gold +ring with which Manco had provided him. + +The Indians evidently supposed we were Spaniards, and were accordingly +about to put us to death. They did not seem inclined to alter their +purpose, for they drew their arrows to the heads; and I believed that +our last moments had arrived, when the name of the Inca restrained them. + +"We will hear what account you have to give of yourselves," said the man +who had at first appeared, letting himself down from the top of the +wall. He was followed by the rest, and others who had climbed up; and +we were soon surrounded by a large body of Indians. I endeavoured to +look as unconcerned and as little alarmed as possible, so I re-seated +myself on the block of wood which I had before occupied. One who seemed +to have authority over the rest, took a seat opposite to me, while they +stood round the room Pedro forthwith began to give a history of our +proceedings, and the cause of our present wanderings. The chief, after +some time, appeared satisfied. + +"We have vowed to destroy all the white men we meet," he exclaimed; "but +though your skins are white, your hearts are with the Indians, and we +will not injure you." + +On hearing these words, I breathed more freely; for I had my misgivings +that the Indians would not believe Pedro, and would torture us before +they put us to death, as they had lately too often treated their white +captives. We soon became on very friendly terms. The chief told Pedro +that he and his followers belonged to the very war party which had +destroyed the village; that they had swept the country for some way +farther to the north, burning all the houses, and murdering all the +white inhabitants they encountered; and that now, laden with booty, they +were returning to their own homes in the far distant interior. The army +now lay encamped at a little distance from the village, in a strong +position, where they could not be surprised by any Spanish force which +might be near them. He and his band had, he said, come to the place for +the purpose of carrying off some of the spoil which they had concealed +when last there. They had found it undisturbed, and were consequently +in a very good humour. + +I told Pedro to endeavour to learn from them, whether they had heard of +any English people being in the village when they attacked it. Pedro +put the questions I desired. + +"If any English people were there, or other strangers, they shared the +fate of the rest," answered the chief with a look of fierceness. I +shuddered as he spoke. "It was not a time for us to distinguish people. +We had years and years of bitter cruelty and wrong to revenge on the +heads of the Spaniards. No one escaped. We came upon them in the +night, suddenly and without warning. We surrounded the village, and +then burst in upon them while they slept in fancied security, despising +the poor Indians whom they so long had trampled on. As they rose from +their beds and attempted to fly, we cut them down at the doors of their +houses. We threw burning brands upon the roofs, and closed them in till +the fire had destroyed them. We drove them shrieking through the +streets, and shot them down with our arrows. Some took refuge in the +church; but it did not save them. When the morning broke, not a soul +remained alive. But we were not content. We had begun to taste the +sweets of vengeance, and we rushed on through the country, burning and +destroying in our course. We have still more work to perform. Our +swords must not be sheathed till the Inca sits once more on the throne +of his ancestors, and till not a Spaniard remains alive to boast that +his people once held sway in the land." + +As I watched the countenance of the speaker, it wore an almost terrific +expression, full of an intense hatred, and a desire for vengeance; yet, +before the outbreak, he had probably been like most other Indians, a +mild, peaceable, and patiently suffering man. The account he had given +of the destruction of the place almost banished the hope which still +existed within my breast. Yet I resolved to persevere in my search. My +dismay was very great, when I learned from Pedro that the old chief +intended to remain in the village with his followers till the morning, +and then to carry us along with him as prisoners. + +"He believes our story," said Pedro; "but still he thinks that if we +continue our journey, we may give information to the Spaniards of the +road the army is taking. He will, I dare say, treat us well, and +release us when he fancies we can run no chance of injuring his people." + +The news caused me great vexation, for, though I had no fear that the +Indians would injure us, I was afraid that we should be led a long way +out of the road in which we could hope to make any effectual inquiries, +if, indeed, further search was of any avail. I was anxious also to +examine the country surrounding the place where the body of Ithulpo was +said to have been discovered; and I told Pedro to entreat the chief, +before he commenced his march, to allow us to go out for a few hours as +soon as it was light, promising faithfully to return. Pedro made the +request, but the old chief, when he understood the object, said it would +be useless to grant it. + +"Your friends were all killed," he said, "You search for those who are +not to be found." + +"Then we must appeal to the head chief commanding the army," I said to +Pedro in Spanish. "Try and learn who he is." + +After making inquiries, Pedro told me that he was a powerful _cacique_, +who had assumed the title of Tupac Catari; and though he was, as most of +the _caciques_ were, descended from an Inca noble, he was only in a +remote degree connected with Tupac Amain. He did not consider himself +in any way under the orders of the Inca, and was inclined, it appeared, +to set up as the Inca himself. It argued ill for the Indian cause, that +there should be this division in their forces. From what I heard of +him, I was afraid that there was very little probability of his granting +the request which had been denied by his inferior, the old chief. + +"If, then, we are to be treated as prisoners, we must endeavour to make +our escape should any opportunity present itself," I whispered to Pedro, +whom I had drawn aside. + +Not to excite the suspicions of our captors, I pretended to be contented +with the arrangement, when I found that there was no chance of altering +the old chief's determination; and returning to the fire, I sat down, +desiring Pedro to say that I was very tired, and wished to be allowed to +sleep till daylight. The Indians apparently finding themselves in +tolerably comfortable quarters, wrapped their ponchos round them, and +lay down on the ground round the fire, to follow my example. I was, +however, too much excited to sleep, and had lost myself in forgetfulness +but a very short time when daylight appeared, and the whole party sprung +to their feet. + +Pedro and I were allowed to mount our mules, and accompanied by the +Indians, who bore the spoils they had collected, set out to join the +main body, which was already on its march to the northward. We came in +sight of them about three miles to the west of the village, as they were +passing over a wide sandy plain, bordered by a range of thickly wooded +hills. There appeared to be about thirty thousand of them,--a body, as +far as numbers were concerned, fully able to compete with any Spanish +force which could be sent against them; but they were in a very +undisciplined and disorganised state, and were, from what I heard, more +intent on obtaining plunder, and on destroying the defenceless whites, +than on pushing their first successes with vigour against the common +enemy. There were some four or five hundred horsemen among them armed +with spears; the rest were infantry, who carried slings, and bows, and +axes, and heavy wooden clubs. The cavalry guarded the flanks, and the +footmen marched in separate bodies under their respective chiefs, with +banners at their head; but there were a great number of stragglers, and, +as far as my eye could reach, I observed small bodies who appeared to be +scouring the country in search of plunder or provisions. The booty was +distributed among the soldiers, each of whom bore a load on his back, +consisting of woollen and other goods, household utensils, furniture, +and clothing of every description. + +The chief, Tupac Catari, rode at the head of his forces, surrounded with +banner-bearers. He was a fierce, wild-looking Indian, with a forbidding +expression of countenance; and his dignity was not increased by his +having dressed himself in the uniform of a Spanish officer, whose cocked +hat he wore with the points resting on his shoulders. The lower parts +of his legs were bare, except that he had sandals on the soles of his +feet, fastened with leather thongs, and a huge pair of silver spurs to +his heels. His wife came behind him in a sort of litter, covered with +coloured cotton, and supported on men's shoulders. His followers were +habited in every variety of costume, which they had picked up in their +expedition; a few of the better organised bodies only retaining their +national costume. Is this, I thought, the sort of character who is to +aid in the liberation of his native land? + +A force like his may, as it has proved, have the power to lay desolate a +country, and to murder the defenceless inhabitants; but will they be +able to sustain an attack from disciplined troops, when such are sent +against them? The general--for so I may call him--halted when we +appeared, and made inquiries of the old chief about us. A long +conversation then ensued, the result of which was that we were ordered +to accompany him. He wanted a secretary, we were told, to write +despatches to the other chiefs, and to communicate with the Spaniards; +and he thought that either Pedro or I should be able to answer his +purpose. In vain we pleaded the necessity of proceeding as we had +intended. He refused to listen to any appeal we could make. + +"You may consider yourselves fortunate in not losing your lives," he at +last answered. "We have sworn to kill every white man we meet; and you +have to thank your friend Manco, on account of the love all the Indians +bear him, that we have not killed you; so be content and say no more." + +The old chief who had first taken us prisoners, finding himself thus +unceremoniously deprived of our company, left us to our fate, and for +some time we rode on in silence among the general's body-guard. Every +man in the army seemed to be talking at the same time. They were, I +found, boasting to each other of the deeds of valour they had performed, +of the enemies they had slain, and of the booty they had collected. The +general after some time called us to his side, and asked us if we could +inform him what the Spaniards were about, and whether they were likely +to attack the Indian armies. + +"Tell him," I said to Pedro, "that the Spaniards will never consent to +yield up the country to the natives. They are only waiting to assemble +their forces, to endeavour to regain the places they have lost. If they +have not men enough here, they will send to Spain for more, and for guns +and artillery, and all the munitions of war. They will soon appear, +well armed and disciplined; and a hundred of their troops will be a +match for a thousand or even two thousand Indians. The only chance of +success the Indians have is to be united, to act under one chief, and to +follow up each advantage, till they have driven the Spaniards from their +shores." + +"Very good," said the general. "I will be that chief, and will follow +the advice of the English stranger." + +And he drew himself up proudly in his saddle, as if he was about to +become Inca of Peru. I saw after this, that any advice I could offer to +him would be thrown away; besides, I doubted much whether I was +justified in offering encouragement to the Indians. I felt that they +had been most unjustly and cruelly treated, and certainly desired to see +them obtain their emancipation; but at the same time, I saw that there +was little or no hope of their ever regaining their country, or +restoring the ancient dynasty of the Incas; and that the attempt would +only cause a vast amount of bloodshed, and too probably end in their +total destruction. As an Englishman, too. I regretted that I had no +business to interfere in a cause which, just as it certainly was, if +maintained properly, was not my own; and I resolved, therefore, to be +silent for the future. + +The dreadful cruelties committed by the Indians had horrified me; and +the romance with which I had at first invested their brave attempt at +emancipation, had vanished on a nearer inspection of the means by which +they were carrying it out. I never did and never can believe that the +end justifies the means. God's righteous laws must be implicitly +obeyed; and no reasons which we may offer can excuse us for neglecting +them. Yet we may be allowed to believe that he weighs our actions of +good or evil by the knowledge we possess through the light of His word; +and acts which, committed by us, might be unpardonable, may, when +perpetrated by ignorant savages, be overlooked through His mercy in the +day of judgment. + +From the time that the Christian and the civilised Europeans first +landed in Peru, they treated the ignorant and heathen natives with the +greatest cruelty; and thus taught by their task-masters, they, on the +first opportunity, showed that they had not forgotten the lessons they +had received, but treated them as they themselves had been treated. Had +the Spaniards taught the Peruvians mercy, justice, and piety, by their +own example, this terrible outbreak would never have occurred, and the +weaker race would have become willing servants to the stronger. We +ought always to bear in mind that it is by the just administration of +good laws, and by the conduct of the rich, the educated, and the +powerful, that the lower orders are educated, as much, or even more, +than by the lessons given them by their nominal instructors. + +Ministers of religion will preach in vain from the pulpit, and +schoolmasters will find their efforts useless, unless the upper orders +set a good example. I entreat my young friends to recollect that they +belong to the educated classes, whose behaviour is sure to be imitated +by those below them. If their conduct is unchristian, irreligious, or +immoral, they will not only have their own sins to answer for at the day +of judgment, but the sins of those whom they by their example have led +astray. The dreadful excesses committed by the lower orders during the +French Revolution were the results of the irreligious and immoral +conduct and teaching of the upper classes in France. The Peruvian +Indians, who were guilty of the terrible atrocities I have mentioned, +were mostly, in name at least, Christians, and had Christian priests +ministering to them; but their teaching appears to have had no effect in +restraining them from acts totally at variance with all the principles +of Christianity. How could they, indeed, have faith in a creed +professed by men who, from the time of their first appearance in their +country, had not scrupled to murder, to plunder, to ill-treat, and to +enslave them? + +It is worthy of remark, that when the Indians destroyed every other +human being in the places they attacked, they in many instances saved +the lives of the priests. I suspect, however, that they did so, not so +much that they respected their sacred character, but because in their +superstition they fancied they were possessed of supernatural powers, +which might be exercised for their punishment if they ventured to injure +them. There were many enlightened and patriotic men among the Indians; +and from all I heard of Tupac Amaru and his family, they were worthy of +a happier fate than befell them. I shall have to describe their +subsequent history as I proceed in my narrative. + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE. + +ANOTHER BATTLE--WE ARE CAPTURED BY SPANIARDS. + +It must be remembered that the war party whom Pedro and I were now so +unwillingly compelled to accompany, was but an irregular portion of the +Indian army, and that the chief commanding it was in every respect +inferior to Tupac Amaru, and his brave sons Andres and Mariano, or his +brother Diogo. I mention this, because otherwise I might give my reader +a very unjust and incorrect history of the principal men engaged in the +attempt I am describing to regain the long-lost liberties of the +Peruvian nation. + +The forces of Tupac Catari had crossed the sandy plain, and ascended the +woody height I have mentioned, when we reached a rocky defile, through +which lay the road we were to pursue. Instead of sending on an advanced +guard to feel the way, as a more experienced general would have done, +the chief rode carelessly on at the head of his followers. Pedro and I +were allowed to keep together, and to converse in Spanish; for I suppose +that Catari thought that we should not dream of attempting to escape +from among his numerous army. He was wrong, however; for the idea of +doing so was never absent from my mind. + +"Pedro," said I, "you have been so true and faithful, and have shown so +much regard for me, that I know you would not willingly desert me, and +yet I do not like to lead you into danger unnecessarily; but tell me, do +you think we could manage to get away from these people?" + +"O Senor, do not suppose I would hesitate a moment to serve you on +account of the danger," he answered, in a tone of much feeling. "What +have I, without kindred or friends, to live for, that I should be afraid +of risking my life? Yet at present I do not see what chance we have of +escaping; though an opportunity may occur when we least expect it." + +"Thanks, Pedro, thanks, my friend," I replied. "I was certain that you +would be ready to aid me; and I hope some day to show my gratitude to +you, little as I am now able to do so. But do not say that you have no +friends. Surely Manco is your friend, and the Indians among whom you +have lived, and the good priest who educated you." + +"The good priest is dead. Manco is my friend, and so are the kind +Indians; but I am the child of another race, and though I love the +Indians, my heart yearns for the sympathy and affection of the people +from whom I am sprung. When I was a child I cared not for it; but since +I learned to read the history of my father's country, and more than all, +since I met you, Senor, new feelings and aspirations have sprung up +within my bosom. I cannot be content unless I am in the company of +those who can converse, like you, on things beyond the narrow circle of +the life I have hitherto led." + +"I understand you, Pedro; and I think that I should feel as you do," I +said. "If we can make our escape, you shall accompany me to other +lands--we will go forth together to see the great world which lies +beyond these lofty mountains." + +"O Senor, your words have given me a new life," he exclaimed +enthusiastically. "I will follow you anywhere you may lead, and serve +you faithfully. And yet," he added in a tone of feeling, "I must not +leave the generous Manco without again seeing him; I must bid farewell +to my foster father and mother, and the Indians who protected me in my +youth; I must return to them once more before I go." + +"I would on no account induce you to be ungrateful, and I should myself +be very unwilling to leave the country, even should I discover my +family, without returning to bid farewell to Manco," I said in return. + +"Then we will go back to Manco as soon as we can escape from these +people; and we may thus with more speed be able to begin our travels," +exclaimed Pedro. + +We were both very young, and ignorant of the great world we talked of +exploring; and we little knew all the difficulties we might be destined +to encounter. The subject, once commenced, was a continual source of +interest to us, and we were never tired of talking about it. It served +also to prevent my mind from dwelling on my loss, the probability of +which I could scarcely conceal from myself. + +I have mentioned but a few of Pedro's observations, for the sake of +showing his character. He had benefited to the utmost from the little +education which had been given him by the priest of whom he spoke. His +disposition was ardent and romantic, and full of generous sympathies; +and possessing a clear perception of right and wrong, he was always +anxious to do right. He had been made acquainted at an early age with +his own history; and though he loved the Indians, he was proud of +belonging to a superior race, among whom his great desire was to mix as +an equal. He was tall and well formed, with very handsome features, to +which his amiable disposition had given a most pleasing expression; so +that, whether or not his parents were of good birth, he looked, at all +events, in every respect the gentleman. + +In early youth, when people are thrown together under difficult +circumstances, friendships calculated to endure to the end of life are +quickly formed; and thus, during the short time we had been together, we +had become mutually much attached; indeed, I fancied that no one could +have been many days in the society of Pedro without feeling a sincere +regard for him. + +So much were we absorbed in conversation, that we scarcely noticed how +the time flew by. The leading parties of the Indians had now passed +through a considerable portion of the defile, and the rear were about to +enter it when we reached a spot more difficult and narrow than any we +had yet arrived at. + +"If any of the Spanish troops were on the watch to intercept the Indian +forces, this is the very spot they should select," I observed to Pedro. + +"May the saints forbid!" he answered. "The poor people would be cut to +pieces, and we should suffer with them." + +"I certainly do not wish it," I said; "though I think we might manage to +escape in the confusion; but I thought of it, as it was exactly in such +a spot as this that some months ago we were attacked by the Montoneros, +when we were rescued by Manco and his followers." + +"Oh, the Spaniards are too much disheartened and terrified by their late +disasters to think of attacking the Indians," said Pedro. + +"But suppose they were to attack our captors, do not you think that we +could manage to climb up the cliffs, and hide ourselves among the rocks +till the fighting is over?" I asked, without at all expecting that such +a thing was likely to happen. + +I had scarcely made the observation, when our ears were assailed by the +loud rattle of musketry, and a shower of bullets flew about our heads, +killing and wounding many of the Indians near us. In an instant they +were thrown into the most terrible confusion, and the shouts and cries +of fear rent the air. Catari, and some of the chiefs about him, in vain +endeavoured to lead them on to meet their concealed enemies. So +completely were they taken by surprise, that all their courage deserted +them. They gave way to their first impulse, which was to fly from the +danger. The rear ranks turned, and the rest followed, and fled as fast +as they could, with the intention of getting into the more open country +they had left. The Spaniards, a strong body of whose troops had been +lying in ambush, on this showed themselves, and, with their swords in +their hands, rushed down upon the confused bands of the Indians. +Catari, and those immediately about him, fought bravely, for they had +not a hope of escaping. His people threw themselves before him, and +allowed the Spaniards to cut them to pieces in their attempt to preserve +the life of their chief. Pedro and I were fortunately at the time a +little in the rear of the advanced guard; and we had escaped the bullets +which had laid low many of those near us. The Indians, however, were so +completely blocking up the narrow defile in their eagerness to escape, +that we saw it would be impossible to fly in that direction. Our only +chance of saving our lives was to put in execution the plan I had just +before been proposing. + +"Let us throw ourselves from our mules, and try to climb up the cliffs," +I exclaimed to Pedro. + +Just then a bullet struck Catari. I saw him reel in his saddle, when +one of his companions seized his horse's bridle, and attempted to lead +him out of the fray towards the rear. But he was mortally wounded; and +before he could be got from among the combatants, he fell to the ground. +His death was the signal for the rest to fly; but they attempted to do +so in vain. The Spanish soldiers pressed in upon them, and cutting them +down without mercy, forced them back in confusion. A few of the +Indians, driven to despair, still fought fiercely, and for a time +impeded their progress, thus leaving a clear space near where Pedro and +I stood. + +"Now, now!" I exclaimed to Pedro. "We have not a moment to lose. If +the Spaniards reach us before we have time for explanation, they will +kill us. Jump from your mule and follow me." + +I had observed that on one side the cliff was considerably broken, and +that a number of jutting rocks would enable us to climb up to the +summit, and afford us some sort of shelter in the meantime. I threw +myself out of my saddle as I spoke, and Pedro following my example, we +ran as fast as we could towards the rocks. It was the work of a moment +to spring up them; there was an abundance of shrubs and creeping plants +to help us. By laying hold of them, we drew ourselves from rock to +rock. Our lives we felt depended on our activity; and under ordinary +circumstances I do not think we could have accomplished the task. We +had thus climbed up some forty feet or so in a shorter time than I have +taken to describe it, when we reached a platform, above which, as we +looked upwards, it seemed impossible that we could ascend. There was, +however, the branch of a tree, which grew in a cleft of the rock. + +"Take me on your shoulders, and I think I can reach it," I cried to +Pedro. + +He stooped down, and, as I sprung on his shoulders, he lifted me up till +I caught hold of the branch. I drew myself up, and succeeded in +throwing my body over the bough. I then, holding on tight with one +hand, gave him the other, and lifted him up till he could catch hold of +it also. The branch cracked and bent with our united weight; but we +were anxious enough had it not done so, for we were now fully exposed to +the sight of the combatants below. They were, however, too much engaged +to observe us. When Pedro no longer required my assistance, I lifted +myself till I could reach the branch of another tree still higher up, +and from thence sprung on to the rock we wished to gain. Pedro kept +close behind me, and imitating my example, we in a short time found +ourselves behind a rock overshadowed by trees, where, from among the +branches which hung down close to it, we could command a view of the +greater part of the ravine without being seen, though we were not high +enough to escape any stray shots fired in our direction. + +By the time we got there, the last of the Indians who had stood their +ground, were either killed or wounded; and the Spanish troops swept +along the defile like a mountain torrent, overthrowing all they +encountered in their course. Their shouts of triumph, and the shrieks +of the Indians, reached our ears with terrible distinctness where we +stood. During our ascent we had heard nothing; even the rattle of the +musketry was unheeded. Now and then the Spaniards halted to load, and +they again sent forth a volley, which in that narrow space took terrible +effect; and once more they advanced to the charge. The Indians did not +once attempt to rally, but fled like a flock of sheep chased by dogs; +those in the rear falling the first victims, and the conquerors passing +over their prostrate bodies. The rout was most complete; and over the +distance which we could see from where we stood, it appeared that many +thousands had been killed. Every foot of the ground was covered with +them, and the conquerors had literally to wade through their blood as +they rushed to the work of destruction. It was a dreadful sight; but +still we could not withdraw our eyes from it. We were considering what +we should next do; and in order to obtain a better view of the country +beyond the defile, to judge whether we should proceed in that direction, +I climbed up to a higher part of the rock, supposing that all the +Spaniards had passed by; when, to my dismay, I saw some fifty men or so +drawn up across the road. They were posted there evidently to guard the +entrance of the defile, and to prevent their companions from being +attacked in the rear by any fresh body of Indians. Though I was only +exposed for a moment, they saw me; and as I jumped down several shots +rattled against the rock. Their voices shouting to us, and ordering us +to come to them, warned us that we could hope no longer to remain +concealed. We, however, were in a very secure position; and we judged, +from the difficulty we had in getting there, that they were not at all +likely to be able to climb up to us. + +"What is to be done now, Pedro?" I asked. "Do you think we could +manage to scramble up among the trees, and so escape over the top of the +cliffs?" + +"Perhaps we might," he answered, looking up to examine the trees above +us. "But what should we do when we got there? We should be without our +mules or provisions or arms, and a long way from any habitation where we +might obtain shelter. We should also very likely fall into the power of +some of the broken parties of Catari's army, dispersed by the Spaniards; +and they, enraged by the disaster which has befallen them, would, seeing +that we were whites, kill us without asking us any questions." + +Pedro's arguments were very strong; but still I thought we should be +only falling from the frying-pan into the fire, if we put ourselves into +the power of the Spaniards. While we were still discussing what we +should do, we heard them again calling to us. + +"Come down, you Indian thieves, come down and be shot, or we must climb +up after you," they shouted. + +"More easily said than done," observed Pedro; "but do not let us show +ourselves, or they are very likely to shoot us without further +questioning. If we could make them hear us from where we are, we might +tell them that we are whites, who had been taken prisoners by the +Indians." + +"Stay then," said I, going to the side of the rock nearest to where the +Spaniards stood, keeping my body carefully sheltered behind it, I put my +head among the leaves, so that they could not see me, and shouted out-- + +"We are friends! we are friends!--whites, escaped from the Indians. We +were afraid you would mistake us for enemies, so we hid ourselves." + +"If that is the case," said an officer, stepping forward, "come down, we +will not hurt you." + +"What shall we do?" said I to Pedro. "We are safe where we are for the +present, for their bullets cannot reach us; and I am certain no Spanish +soldier will be able to climb up in the way we did to this spot." + +"We shall get very hungry though, if they try to starve us out," he +answered; "besides, it will look as if we were guilty of some crime if +we appear afraid of coming down." + +"There is no help for it, I see," was my reply. "We must put a good +face upon the matter. Senor officer," I shouted, "your men have already +shown that they can aim very correctly, and we would rather not run the +risk of another peppering; may I beg that you will take care that they +do not fire at us by mistake. If we have your word for it, we will +descend, as you desire." + +"I pledge you the word of a Castilian that they shall not fire at you," +answered the officer. + +"That satisfies us; we will descend," I shouted back. "Come, Pedro, we +must take care not to break our necks though, which we shall do if we +slip," I said, as I swung myself on to a bough of the nearest tree below +the rock. + +It is nearly always more difficult to descend a cliff than to climb up; +as in the former case one cannot see where one's feet are to rest; and +one may chance to find one's self on a jutting ledge, from whence the +height is too great to leap off to the next standing-place below, and +one has to climb up again to search for another way down. We had the +advantage of knowing the rocks on which we were to rest; yet our descent +took much more time than had our ascent. At one place Pedro had to hold +fast by a tree while he let me down; and I, in return, had to grasp +firmly a jutting rock, and to catch him as he dropped down to me. At +length, with no slight exertion and risk, we reached the bottom, where +we found the Spanish officer and several of his men, who had been +watching us with some admiration, and wondering, as they told us, how we +had contrived not to break our necks. They would scarcely believe that +we had got up by the same way. + +"I thought none but monkeys could climb such a place," observed the +officer. + +"We English have a way of doing extraordinary things when we try," I +replied, trying to look as unconcerned as possible. + +"English, are you indeed? I thought you must be so." + +"Yes, Senor, I am an Englishman at your service," I said; for I had +agreed with Pedro that it would be better to give a correct account of +ourselves, than to attempt any deception. + +There is an old saying--"Tell the truth and shame the devil." Now, +although there can be no doubt that there are occasions when concealment +is excusable, yet these are very rare exceptions, which occur but seldom +in most men's lives; and as a general rule a strict adherence to the +truth is the only just and safe course, even though it may apparently +lead one into a difficulty. There is something degrading in a falsehood +or prevarication, which must injure the self-respect of a man of proper +feeling. It is a sin! There is no disguising it. People often tell +falsehoods to conceal what they have done wrong, but that does not make +the sin less; it is only adding one sin to another. I say--and I know +that am right--Tell truth, and stand the consequences. + +I therefore told the officer my true history. How my father's house had +been taken possession of by the Spanish troops; how the Indians had +attacked and burned it; and how they had carried me off desperately +wounded. Then I described how I had been nursed by an Indian and his +wife among the mountains till I had recovered, when the dreadful report +reached me of the destruction of my family; and how the Indian had +allowed me to set out for the purpose of discovering what had really +been their fate, when, in the course of my search, we had been captured +by Catari and his followers. The officer seemed much interested by the +account I gave him, and to feel real compassion for my loss. + +"And the youth with you, who is he?" he asked. + +I told him, a Spaniard, who in his childhood had been carried off by the +Indians, and educated by the good priest of their village. + +"It is a very strange story you tell me," he remarked. "However, I +believe you, for your face assures me that you speak the truth. You +both must now accompany me to the place where I am ordered to wait with +my men for the return of the rest of the troops. I hear the bugles +sounding the recall, and they probably have by this time completely +dispersed all the Indians who remained together; but their orders were +not to venture beyond the defile, lest the brigands should reassemble +and cut them off. We must march at once, for the colonel commanding our +force will soon be there." + +I was very well satisfied with his manner of speaking, and felt certain +that we should be kindly treated. Fortunately for us, our mules had +managed to get out of the way of the troops as they passed by. With +much sagacity they had, when we jumped off their backs, crept into a +wide crevice in the cliffs, and we found them close to the spot feeding +on the leaves of some shrubs which grew among the rocks. On our +claiming them as our property, the officer allowed us to mount them; and +he invited us to ride by his side at the head of his men. His questions +were sometimes very puzzling, for I resolved not to give him any +information which might prove injurious to the Indians. I could not, +however, deny that I had seen a large Indian force collected very +different to that of Catari; and I warned him, that should the Spaniards +ever meet it, they would find a victory far more difficult than the one +they had just achieved. + +"Do you think you could lead us to the place where this army you speak +of is encamped?" he asked suddenly, after a considerable silence. + +"Senor," I replied, with a look of indignation, "has anything I have +said induced you to believe that I could be capable of so dishonourable +and ungrateful an action! The Indians treated me with mercy and +kindness. Is such the return you would expect an honest man to make?" + +He shrugged his shoulders. "Why, no," he replied; "to confess the +truth, I should not expect you to do so willingly, and I would myself +rather not be asked to do such a thing; but I am sorry to tell you that +there are others, my superiors, who are not so likely to pay respect to +your scruples; and I am afraid that they will insist on your acting as +our guide if it is thought expedient to march against the new made +Inca." + +"But surely I have the power to refuse to do any such thing," I +exclaimed indignantly. + +"But you might be compelled to do it," he urged. "It would be dangerous +for you to refuse. Our generals are not in a mood to be trifled with." + +"I trust that no power could compel me to act so treacherous a part," I +replied calmly. "You, Senor, I am sure, would not so advise me." + +He seemed to be a man imbued with the old chivalrous spirit of the +Castilians; and my appeal to his honourable sentiments pleased him. + +"You are a brave youth, and I will do my best to serve you," he replied. +"I am in duty bound to tell my colonel what I know, but you can assure +him that you could not find your way back, which I think you probably +would not be able to do." + +This conversation caused me much anxiety, though I resolved at all +hazards not to betray my friends. I could not also but regret that I +had been so incautious as to have allowed myself to confess that I had +seen the army of the Inca. I should have been more on my guard; and, +without departing from the truth, I might have declined answering any +questions which could draw the information from me. The frankness and +kind manner of the officer threw me off it, however; and I found myself +placed in a position I had not at all contemplated. I received a lesson +which I hope may be useful to any of my readers who may be placed in +similar circumstances. The officer, whose name I found was Don Eduardo +da Vila, and a captain of the regiment with which he was serving, was +only doing his duty in cross-questioning me; and I believe that he was +very sorry that the information he had obtained was likely to prove +injurious to me. + +We soon reached the spot he had spoken of, where we were to wait for his +colonel. It was a rocky height with precipitous sides, of which a +portion of only one was accessible, so that it was a complete natural +fortress. It commanded the entrance to the ravine; and had the Indians +possessed any knowledge of warfare, they would have taken another route, +however circuitous, rather than have attempted to pass so formidable a +position without first ascertaining that it was not occupied by an +enemy. It was nearly dusk, and the chief body of the Spanish troops had +not yet returned from their work of bloodshed. Don Eduardo began to be +uneasy. + +"Can the rebels have rallied and attacked them?" I heard him say to one +of his inferiors. "I thought I heard the bugles sounding as we left the +ravine." + +"There can be no doubt about it. If they had been attacked, the sound +of the firing would have reached us," was the answer. + +"They have probably pursued the enemy further than they intended," said +Don Eduardo, walking a short distance off from where we stood. He was +evidently becoming anxious on the subject. + +"What do you think about it?" I asked Pedro, who had overheard what had +been said. + +"It is possible that the Indians may have rallied and cut off the +Spaniards," he answered. "Yet I do not think that they will have had +the courage to do so. At first I was almost hoping it, as I thought we +might have a better chance of escaping, but then I remembered that +though many of the Indians might have been my friends, the Spaniards are +my countrymen. I trust no disaster has befallen them." + +Don Eduardo and his lieutenant returned after the consultation; and the +latter, with a sergeant's party, was ordered to proceed along the +ravine, to ascertain what had become of the main body. We watched the +lieutenant and his men enter the ravine and advance, till they were hid +by a turn of the cliffs. Don Eduardo then called us to him, and asked +us our opinion as to what was likely to have occurred. We both assured +him that we did not think the Indians would have rallied. What we said +appeared somewhat to relieve his mind, and sitting down on a rock, he +lighted a cigar, and offered some to us, which we declined, as neither +Pedro nor I smoked. The men meantime had piled their arms, and lighted +fires to boil their cocoa and to cook their provisions. Some were thus +employed, others were smoking, and others had thrown themselves on the +ground to rest after the fatigues of the day. We learned that they had +received notice of the march of Catari's army from an Indian spy, many +of whom were in the pay of the Spaniards. They had watched for them for +several days, and at last the colonel commanding the force had resolved +to occupy the post where he attacked them, till they should attempt to +pass. The view around the spot we occupied was very picturesque. It +was also a very strong natural position, while its picturesqueness was +increased by the horses and baggage mules picqueted under the trees, the +gay costumes of their drivers, the camp-fires, the piles of arms, and +the groups of soldiers, in varied attitudes, scattered here and there. + +The sun had set and the short twilight had come to an end, when the +tramp of men's feet at a distance reached our ears. We listened +anxiously. It was that of trained soldiers; and in a short time we saw +them looming through the gloom of the evening. As they drew near, the +advanced guard uttered a shout to warn us of their approach, which was +responded to by the party on the hill. Soon afterwards they appeared on +the summit, and as they marched into the centre of the space, they piled +their arms, and joined their comrades round the fires. Each man came +laden with the spoils they had retaken from the Indians. + +After a portion of the troops had filed by, there came, with two +soldiers guarding each of them, some fifty Indians who had been taken +prisoners, and preserved to grace their triumph. Poor wretches, we +found that though their lives were for the present spared, their fate +was sealed, and that it was intended by a public execution to strike +terror into the hearts of their countrymen. Those who could not move +fast enough were dragged forward by ropes fastened to their wrists, or +urged on at the point of the sword. When they halted, they were all +huddled together like sheep in a pen, and a strong guard placed over +them to prevent their escape. From the words we overheard, the soldiers +appeared to be recounting eagerly, to those who had been left as a +reserve, the adventures of the day. Pedro and I were shortly summoned +by Don Eduardo to attend the colonel; but fortunately he was too tired +and hungry to interrogate us closely, and after a few questions he +dismissed us, with permission to join several of his officers round +their watch-fires. + +We were surprised at seeing only three or four wounded men; and we +learned that, with the exception of one killed, they were the only +sufferers among the troops. They were in high spirits, as this was the +first success the Spanish forces had met with since the commencement of +the outbreak. They boasted that they had killed several thousands of +the Indians, though their own loss had been so small. They had followed +them beyond the defile, where the remainder, entirely broken and +dispersed, had saved themselves in the recesses of the forest. The +officers civilly invited us to partake of their supper, Don Eduardo +having recommended us to their notice; and afterwards, the picquets +having been placed, we all wrapped ourselves in our cloaks and lay down +to sleep. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN. + +A BATTLEFIELD AT NIGHT--OUR EXPERIENCES OF A PERUVIAN PRISON. + +I am not fond of dwelling on horrors; but I should fail to give a true +picture of warfare and its effects, were I to neglect to describe those +scenes which are its never-failing accompaniments. I tried to sleep; +but at first the blaze of the fire, the voices of those around me, and +the din of the camp, kept me awake; and when that had ceased, all the +soldiers except the sentries, and even the Indian prisoners, having +dropped off asleep, there came up from the depths of the mountain gorge +a sound which, as I suspected its cause, effectually banished repose. +Though rendered faint by distance, it came through the quiet night air +with a distinctness which was truly terrible. I listened with painful +attention. There were the shrieks and groans of human beings in their +mortal agony, and the suppressed roar and hissing snarl of the fierce +puma and the sanguinary ounce, as they disputed over their prey. Many +Indians, I guessed too surely, had crawled, desperately wounded, into +the crevices of the rocks, where they lay concealed as the Spanish +troops passed by, and escaped instant death to suffer a lingering and +more terrible fate at the last. All night long those melancholy sounds +continued, and though they might have been heard by my companions, they +did not appear to disturb their repose. I scarcely knew whether to envy +or commiserate their apathy. + +The night at last passed away. The soldiers started to their feet at +the sound of the bugle's call, a hasty meal was taken, baggage mules +were laden, the men fell into their ranks, and the order to march was +given. Pedro and I mounted our faithful little beasts, and rode by the +side of Don Eduardo, who, after he had got the troops into order, called +us to him. + +We descended the side of the hill, and took a direction towards the +west, very much to my satisfaction, for I was afraid that we should have +again to pass through the gorge; and my heart sickened at the thought of +the sad spectacle we should there have to witness. There was no road, +and the ground was very uneven; but the men and animals seemed +accustomed to it, and managed to scramble along at the rate of about two +miles-an-hour. We marched for about five hours, when we reached the +bank of a river, where a halt was called, and the men were ordered to +pile arms and cook their dinners, scouts being sent out to give notice +of the approach of any Indians. The river ran through a broad valley, +having on either side high cliffs, and below them grassy land sprinkled +with trees. On the top of the cliffs was a wide belt of forest, beyond +which, stretched out to the south, a vast extent of sandy desert. As we +passed over it, I observed the remains of numerous small canals, which +Pedro informed me served in the days of the Incas to irrigate it, when +what was now a barren plain was covered with fertile fields. + +The spot where we had approached the river was at the mouth of a narrow +stream, which wound its way down from the mountains, its course marked +by a line of trees, which it served to nourish. While the troops were +resting, the colonel summoned Pedro and me into his presence, to make +more inquiries about us. I mentioned that he was a very different sort +of person to Don Eduardo. He was a stern, morose man, none of the +kindlier sympathies of human nature finding a place in his bosom. He +was sitting on a rock, under the shade of a tree, with his secretary, +with paper and a pen in his hand, kneeling by his side, and making a +table of the rock, ready to take notes of what we might say. He +questioned us narrowly, and all we said was put down. I gave him the +same account that I had to Don Eduardo. + +"And so you have been living among the Indians, and encouraging them in +their rebellion against their rightful sovereign, I doubt not," he +observed, fixing his piercing eyes on us. "Young man, your name is not +unfamiliar to me." + +I felt no little alarm on hearing these words, which was increased when +he desired his secretary to turn to some notes he had in his portfolio. + +"I thought so," he exclaimed. "You are the son of an Englishman who is +accused of conspiring with the Indians to overthrow the government of +the country. Your father has met with his deserts, for I see that he +and all his family were murdered by the wretched people he had +encouraged to revolt; but you, let me assure you, will not escape the +punishment which is your due. You have been treated with too much +leniency by us; you and your companion are now prisoners. Guard lead +them off, and take care that they do not escape." + +The information so brutally given me, confirmatory of my worst fears, +almost overcame me, and I believe that I should have sunk to the ground, +had not the soldiers who were ordered to take charge of us supported me +as they led me away. I was far too much absorbed by the dreadful news, +the truth of which I could not doubt, to be able to contemplate the very +dangerous position in which I was placed. I did not attempt to answer +the colonel, nor to exculpate myself; indeed, any appeal to him would +have been of no avail. Pedro and I were marched off, and placed by +ourselves under the shade of a rock, where several men were stationed as +sentries over us. The officers with whom we had before been associating +on friendly terms seemed to regard us with looks of pity, but they dared +not speak to us. When the troops again marched we were guarded by two +soldiers, who rode by our sides with drawn swords, while we were not +allowed to address each other. The time occupied by that journey was +the most miserable portion of my life. Hope had almost deserted me. +All those I loved best on earth were gone; and at the end of it I had +nothing to expect but a long imprisonment in a loathsome dungeon, or +perhaps death. The next evening, when the soldiers halted to bivouac +for the night, as Pedro and I were sitting disconsolately on the ground +at a short distance from each other, with our guards between us, I saw +Don Eduardo approaching. He told the soldiers to withdraw, and sat down +by my side. I saw by his manner that he had undertaken a task which was +not altogether to his taste. + +"I have got permission from the colonel to speak to you," he began. "He +considers himself authorised not to act very rigorously with you if you +will accede to his proposals." + +"What are they, Don Eduardo?" I asked, at once guessing their tenor. + +"Why, he understands you have seen the army of the rebel chief, Tupac +Amaru, and are acquainted with their intentions," he answered. + +"I own that I have seen large numbers of Indians collected together, but +I am entirely ignorant of what they were about to do," I said. "But +pray go on, Don Eduardo." + +"The proposal is similar to what I made you when we first met," he +replied, the colour rising to his cheeks. "If you can conduct a Spanish +force to where they are to be found, or can contrive to put some of +their chiefs into our power, you and your friend shall forthwith be set +at liberty." + +"You, I am sure, Don Eduardo, can expect but one reply from me to such a +question, and you know that it is the only one which, while I remain an +honourable man, I can give." + +"I am afraid so," he answered, looking down much grieved. "I am to add, +that if you refuse, as soon as we arrive at the town of San Pablo, you +will be tried and shot as a rebel." + +"Before I have been found guilty?" I asked. + +"I fear your guilt in our eyes has been too well established by your own +confession," he observed. "Let me advise you to think over the subject +well. It is hard for a youth like you to die." + +"Tell me, Don Eduardo, do you believe me guilty?" I asked. + +"You have been in communication with the Indians and you wish them +well," he said, avoiding an answer to my question. + +"I wish the Spaniards well, and have never instigated the Indians to +rebel by word or deed," said I. "But you have not told me if you think +me guilty." + +"I do not. From what I have seen of you I think you incapable of doing +so wrong a thing," he replied, kindly taking my hand. "I wish to save +your life." + +"I warmly thank you for what you say, Don Eduardo," I exclaimed; "but I +cannot do what is proposed. If I am not guilty it will be more easy to +die; but I trust that, as an Englishman, the government will not venture +to put me to death unless my guilt is clearly proved." + +"In these times no respect is paid to persons," he said. "You must not +trust to such a hope; yet I would take a more satisfactory answer back +to my colonel." + +"I can send no other answer than what I have given," I replied; "you +would from your heart despise me if I did." + +At this he looked very melancholy. "Well, I fear it must be so, yet I +will do all I can for you," he said, as again pressing my hand in token +of his good-will, he rose to leave me. + +Having ordered the sentries to return to their posts, he went to where +my companion in misfortune was sitting. He conversed with him for some +time; and though I had great confidence in Pedro, I was afraid that he +might ultimately be tempted or threatened into compliance with the +colonel's demands. I wronged him; for I afterwards learned that he +remained firm to his honour. The night passed away without any +adventure; and wearied out by bodily fatigue and mental anxiety, though +the hard ground was my couch, I slept till daylight. My conscience was, +at all events, clear of wrong, and I never recollect to have slept so +soundly. I awoke more refreshed than I had been for some time, and with +a lighter heart in my bosom. Even hope revived, though I had little +enough to ground it on. The air was pure and bracing, my nerves felt +well strung, and the face of nature itself wore to my eyes a more +cheerful aspect than it had done for many days. The troops advanced +more rapidly than they had before done, and towards evening the spires +of several churches rising from the plain, the rays of the sun lighting +them brilliantly up, came in sight. They were in the town of San Pablo, +the houses in which soon after appeared. As we approached, a number of +the Spanish inhabitants came out to hear the news, and seemed highly +gratified at the result of the expedition. The unfortunate Indians who +were brought in as prisoners, chiefly attracted their attention; and I +was shocked to hear the abuse they heaped on them. The miserable beings +walked on with sullen and downcast looks, without deigning to reply. +They had no hope--they had lost the day, and they knew the fate which +awaited them. + +As we marched through the unpaved, dirty streets, the inhabitants came +out of their houses to look at us, and to offer the troops refreshments +and congratulations. We found the town full of people of all colours, +of whom a large number were Indians who had refused to join the revolt. + +In the centre of the town was the usual large plaza or square; and on +one side of it was a building which we were told was the prison. +Towards it we were at once conducted. One side of the square was +without buildings, a broad stream running past it, beyond which were +cultivated fields, and gardens divided by walls. In the centre was a +fountain, continually throwing up a jet of crystal water--a refreshing +sight in that climate. The prison fronted the river. On one side was a +church, and on the other the residence of the governor of the town, or +of some other civil functionary. On either side of the buildings I have +mentioned, were long rows of houses of various heights, though mostly of +one story, very similar to those I have already described. Three +streets, running at right angles to each other, led into the square. I +have not without reason been thus particular in my description. + +The soldiers who had us in charge, led us across the square, amid the +shouts and jeers of the people. Even the blacks, the half-castes, and +the Indians, came to stare at us with stupid wonder, calling us rebels, +traitors, and robbers. The unfortunate Indians who had been made +prisoners, went before us. The massive gates of the prison were thrown +open, and they were forced within. We came last. + +My heart sunk within me as we entered those gloomy walls. The interior +was already crowded with human beings, many of them Indians, found with +arms in their hands, or suspected of an intention of joining the rebels. +We advanced along a low, arched gallery, intersected by several gates; +and having passed two of them, we turned to the left, along a narrower +passage, at the end of which we reached a small door. The gaoler, who +showed the way with a torch, opened it; and, to my dismay, I saw that a +steep flight of steps led down from it to some chambers below the +ground. + +"We are to be shut up in a dungeon, I fear," I whispered to Pedro. + +"So that I am with you, I care not where I am," he answered. + +Four of the soldiers followed us, to prevent our running away, I +suppose; though we should have had but a poor chance of escaping even +had we tried. The rest faced about, and marched back through the +passage. I hesitated on the top of the steps, so narrow and broken and +dark did they look. + +"Come along, Senores, come along!" said the gaoler; "but take care how +you tread, for the steps are somewhat worn, and you may chance to break +your necks some days before their time." + +Though inclined to make merry at our expense, he held his torch so as to +afford sufficient light for us to see our way. The soldiers laughed +gruffly at his joke, bad as it was; and this made him attempt one or two +others of a similar character. + +"The gentlemen have not perhaps been accustomed to live in a palace, but +they will find one here, with plenty of servants to attend on them; so I +must beg to congratulate them," he said, chuckling as he spoke. "They +will have plenty of playmates, though some of them will not remain very +long, I suspect. They have a way here of making a speedy clearance at +times." + +We had now reached the bottom of the steps, and another small door, +plated with iron and secured with two stout iron bars, appeared before +us. The gaoler removed the bars, and taking a key from his girdle, +opened the door. + +"Go in there, Senores," he said. "It is somewhat dark at present, but +you will get accustomed to it by-and-by." + +Saying this, he forced us into the dungeon. I went in first, and +stumbled down a couple of steps, nearly falling on my face. While I was +holding out my hand to save Pedro from doing the same, the door was shut +behind us, and barred and bolted as before. We found ourselves in +almost total darkness, a small aperture near the ceiling alone affording +a dim gleam of light, which served to show us the gloomy horrors of the +place. Two massive pillars supported the low arched roof, which seemed +covered with moisture. The size of the place we could not tell, as the +darkness prevented our seeing the walls at either side. The floor was +unpaved, and composed of damp earth strewed with filth. We stood for +some minutes holding each other's hands, without speaking, and without +moving. We felt bewildered and stupified with the calamity which had +befallen us. Pedro was the first to recover himself. + +"They cannot keep us here for ever," he said, breaking the long silence. +"Others have been in worse places, and have escaped. Let us hope, +Senor, for the best." He spoke in a cheerful tone, which had a reviving +effect upon me. + +"We will hope for the best, Pedro," I exclaimed. "Something may occur +to deliver us. We must consider, however, what we have to do. I +propose that we first make a tour of inspection round our dominions. It +will give us some occupation, though idleness seems rather encouraged +here." + +"I would rather find the way out of our dominions, as you call them, +than become better acquainted with them," said Pedro. "However, I am +ready to set out whenever you please." + +"We may possibly find the way out during our inspection," I remarked, as +we began slowly and cautiously to move round the walls of the cell. + +It was narrow but long, and extended, as I concluded, along part of one +side of the inner court. We found two other pillars towards the further +end, and we felt several rings secured in the walls, with heavy chains +attached to them. Of their use there could be no doubt; and we +congratulated ourselves that we were still allowed to have our limbs at +liberty. In our walk we stumbled over an iron bar, and our feet knocked +against some other rings attached to stones sunk in the floor. + +"So some of the inmates of the mansion have been chained down like +maniacs to the ground," Pedro observed. "We are indeed fortunate in +escaping such treatment." + +Though we searched most minutely, we could discover nothing which might +suggest any means of escaping. We had just concluded an examination, +and had returned to our seats, when the door of the dungeon was opened, +and the gaoler appeared, bringing a jar of water and two loaves of brown +bread. + +Pedro examined his countenance. "Stop," he exclaimed, as the man was +going away; "Sancho Lopez, I do believe you are an old friend of mine." + +"In truth yes, and you saved my life," answered the gaoler. "But I must +not stop--but I must not stop. Be at rest, I do not forget the matter." + +Pedro afterwards told me how he had saved the Spanish gaoler's life in a +snow-storm in the mountains, and we agreed that it was a great thing to +have him as our friend. + +We had been in the dungeon about a fortnight, and though it was damp and +unwholesome in the extreme, we did not appear to have suffered in +health. + +One morning Sancho entered our cell with a cheerful countenance. + +"I bring you good news, Senores," he said. "I have just received a +visit from a young officer, who has, it appears, been making interest in +your favour; and he has gained permission for your removal to a more +airy abode. He seemed very anxious about you, and said he pitied you +very much, though he was unable to obtain your liberty, which he wished +to do. I hurried here to tell you this, as I thought it would give you +pleasure. I must now go back to get the chambers ready for you, and +will return with two of the under gaolers to conduct you to it. One +caution I have to give you. Do not mind what I say to you before +others, and never answer any of my remarks." + +Without waiting for our reply and thanks, Sancho closed the prison door, +and left us to ourselves. + +"We have to thank Don Eduardo for this. I am sure he is the officer +Sancho spoke of," I remarked. + +"I think so also," answered Pedro. "I am glad that he has not asked us +to pass our word not to escape." + +"So am I," I observed. "While we were on our road here, I often +contemplated the possibility of getting out of prison; but then I did +not expect to be put into a dungeon like this." + +For some time we could talk of nothing else but the prospect of making +our escape. + +Two hours or more had passed away, and Sancho had not returned. We knew +that he would not willingly have deceived us, but we began to be afraid +that the governor had rescinded his permission for our occupying a room +open to the air, and that we might be doomed to remain in our dungeon +for weeks or months longer. At last we heard footsteps approaching the +cell; the door was opened, and Sancho and his two assistants appeared. + +"You are to accompany me, Senores," he said, in the gruff tone he had +used at our entrance. "You are fortunate in coming out of that place +alive; though some I have known would rather have had to remain there +than be obliged to march out into the square yonder." + +The assistants laughed as he said this, and we soon had too great a +reason to know to what he alluded. Sancho led the way with a torch in +his hand; and his assistants followed, holding us tightly by the arms, +as if we would have tried to escape from them. I certainly could not +have done so had I tried, for when I came to mount the steps, I found my +knees trembling under me from weakness, arising from being shut up so +long in the damp dungeon, though I had till then thought myself as +strong as ever. We traversed a number of passages, and mounted a second +flight of steps, when we reached a small door plated with iron. Sancho +opened it, and exhibited a room about six feet broad and eight feet +long, with a window strongly barred at the further end. There were two +chairs and a bedstead, with a straw mattress on it. + +"Put the youngsters in there," he said gruffly to his assistants. "It +is a room fit for an hidalgo of the first order. They may see and be +seen if they choose to put their noses through the gratings." + +On this the gaolers very unceremoniously thrust us in, and Sancho, +without saying a word more, closed the door upon us. It appeared such +an age since we had beheld the blue sky and the smiling face of nature, +that we eagerly rushed to the window to discover what view could be +obtained from it. We found, to our no small satisfaction, that it was +not more than twelve or fifteen feet from the ground, and that it looked +out on the great square I have before described. I have never forgotten +the sensations of delight with which I inhaled the fresh air as it came +through the open bars, and gazed once more on the bright sky, and the +clear water of the river, the fields, and the trees beyond, and the +human beings who were thronging the open space below us. They all +appeared so full of life and activity, and the murmur of their voices +seemed like music to my ears, so long accustomed to the silence of the +dungeon. The bars of the window were very strong, and placed very close +together, so that, as Sancho had observed, we could only just get our +noses through them. We were, however, glad to get them out as far as we +could, and every moment I found the breeze restoring to my limbs their +accustomed strength. My first impulse was to shake the bars to try and +find whether any of them could be moved; but I restrained myself, lest +some one from below should observe us and suspect that we were thinking +of escaping. As we stood there, we heard several voices in piteous +tones asking for alms; and by pressing our faces close to the bars, we +discovered that some of the prisoners in the neighbouring rooms were +letting down hats and baskets by lines at the ends of poles, like +fishing rods, to collect food and money from the passers-by. We were +still eagerly watching the scene, when I felt a hand laid on my +shoulder. I started back, and saw Sancho. We had been so interested +that we had not heard him enter. He placed his finger on his lips to +impose silence. + +"I have been so occupied that I could not come before," he whispered. +"I have brought you some white bread, and some meat, and fruit, and +fresh water, and a little brandy to mix with it, which have been ordered +by the friend who has obtained for you the indulgence of this room. +Here are the provisions." He put down in the chair a basket covered +with a cloth. "I cannot remain, for a fresh set of prisoners have +lately arrived, and I am employed in looking after them." + +"Who are they?" I asked. "More Indians, I fear." + +"Yes, Senor; there are a hundred of them. Poor fellows, I pity them, +for they will certainly be shot in the great square out there before +many days are over. There is a young chief among them. I grieve for +him most, for he is a very fine fellow. He walked along as he came to +prison like a prince, and heeded not the shouts and revilings of the mob +who followed him and his companions. Their misery will soon be over, +for they are to be tried to-morrow, and they have not a chance of +escape." + +"Can you tell me his name!" I asked anxiously; for I instantly thought +of Manco. + +"No, I cannot," he answered. "I only know that he was taken a few clays +ago in a skirmish with the enemy, who are not many leagues off. It is +feared even that they may attack the town, though we have too many +soldiers here to give them much chance of success." + +"I trust they will not," I exclaimed, thinking of the dreadful scenes +which had before occurred. "But can you learn the name of this young +chief? I fear he is a friend of ours." + +"Oh, do not acknowledge him, then," said the gaoler, "as you value your +lives. You cannot benefit him, and may run the risk of sharing his +fate." + +I saw the mistake I had committed; but still I pressed Sancho to learn +who he was, and he undertook to comply with my wish, provided I followed +his advice. I again asked him to inform us who was the friend who had +interested himself in our favour; but he replied that he was not at +liberty to say, and he then hurried from the room. + +The news he had brought made us very sad, for we could not help +contemplating the scene of bloodshed which was about to occur, which was +of itself sufficiently horrible, even should my suspicions that Manco +was a prisoner not prove correct. We were doomed not to have our +anxiety relieved, for Sancho did not again make his appearance during +the day. He was probably afraid of being observed if he visited us too +frequently. We ate the food Sancho had brought us most thankfully, and +it much contributed to restore our strength; but we had lost all +pleasure in looking out of the window on the square, which was so soon +to be the scene of the slaughter of so many of our fellow-creatures. We +found a bundle of blankets and some clean linen hid away under the +bedding; for the latter, which to us was a great luxury, we had no doubt +we were indebted to Don Eduardo. At night we threw ourselves on the +bed, and tried to sleep; but my rest was very disturbed, and I +constantly dreamed that I heard firing, and saw the unhappy Indians +being shot down before the windows. Towards morning, however, I fell +into a deep slumber; and, probably owing to the change of air and the +improvement in our food, we both slept to a much later hour than usual. +We were awakened by the confused sound of the voices of a concourse of +people, and jumping up, we hurried to the window. From thence we saw a +large crowd collected in the square, who seemed to be eagerly watching +the doors of the prison. We could distinguish the tones of those +nearest to us; and from the words which reached us, we learned that a +sort of trial had taken place the previous evening of the prisoners +lately captured, as well as of those in Tupac Catari's army, and that +they were all condemned to be shot. No one seemed to pity them; but, on +the contrary, all appeared to exult at the prospect of the slaughter +which was about to commence. + +"The pretended Inca, Tupac Amaru, has been taken," said one man. + +"No; that is a mistake," was the answer. "But another chief has, though +he fought like a lion, it is said." + +"Who is he?" asked another. + +"A relation of the Inca's: one of the viper's brood," replied the first. + +"They say two strangers were made prisoners leading on the rebels," +observed a third. "They are to be shot also, I hope." + +"No doubt of it; but the viceroy has thought it necessary to send to +explain the matter to the English consul at Lima; and his answer has not +arrived," remarked a fourth. + +"It is known that it cannot arrive for three or four more days; and care +will be taken to shoot them before that time," said the former speaker. + +"Can they allude to us?" I asked of Pedro, feeling my heart sink within +me. + +"There is no doubt about it," he replied. "We must be prepared for the +worst; but I do not think they will dare to kill one of your great +nation. They will shoot me though, as I have no friends to help me." + +"Nor have I, Pedro; but I would rather say, Let us hope for the best," I +answered. "They would gain nothing by killing either of us, and it +would be very unjust to kill you and let me escape." + +"It would be very unjust to kill either of us; but they care little for +justice, and they wish to strike terror into the hearts of their +enemies," he remarked calmly. + +"Such cruelty as they are about to perpetrate will only exasperate the +Indians the more," said I. "If they were to treat them well, and let +them go, they would be more likely to put down the rebellion." + +The crowd was every moment increasing, as people were coming in from all +directions. Among them were a large number of Indians, mestizos, and +other half-castes, who seemed to look on with the same unconcern as the +Spaniards. My eye had been attracted by a man whose florid complexion +and dress showed that he was a seaman of some northern nation, and I +hoped an Englishman. He shouldered his way through the crowd with a +confident, independent air, as if he felt himself superior to any about +him. At length he came close under our window, and caught my eye +watching him. He stared at me fixedly for some time, and I thought +recognised me to be a countryman by my light hair and fair complexion. +Once he put his hand up to his mouth, as if he was going to hail me, as +he would a man at the masthead; but he again let it drop, having +apparently changed his mind, and, returning his hands to his trousers +pockets, he rolled away with the unmistakeable air of a British seaman. +I longed to call after him to tell who I was; but, afraid of being heard +by others, I restrained myself. + +"Is that man a friend of yours?" asked Pedro. + +"I never saw him that I know of before," I answered. + +"Well, I thought that he recognised you," he observed. "I marked the +expression of his eye, and I should say that he knew you, or mistook you +for some one else." + +I eagerly watched the sailor, afraid that he would go away, and that we +should see him no more. I observed, however, that though he dodged +about among the crowd with a careless air, he never got to any great +distance from our window. This circumstance kept alive my hope that he +had come for the purpose of bringing us information, or of helping us to +escape. The crowd had now begun to grow as impatient at the +non-appearance of the prisoners as they would at a bull-fight, had there +been a delay in turning the bull into the circus, when three bodies of +troops were seen marching up from the several streets leading into the +square. They formed on either side of it, making a lane from the prison +gates to the river; while the crowd fell back behind them. I had +observed a number of Indians collecting on the opposite bank of the +river, who now came down close to its edge, watching anxiously the +proceedings of the soldiers. They appeared, however, not to be remarked +by the people in the town. As they were partly concealed by the trees +and the walls dividing the fields, their numbers might not have been +perceived by the people in the square. The bell of the nearest church +began to toll; the crowd looked eagerly towards the prison; the massive +gates were thrown open, and we saw issuing forth a posse of priests and +monks, bearing crucifixes and lighted tapers, who were followed by the +unhappy Indians intended for execution, chained two and two, and each +couple guarded by a soldier with his musket presented at their heads. + +I watched them file out with aching eyes, for every moment I expected to +see Manco led forth. I had a painful presentiment that he was among the +victims. The last of the Indians had passed on, and I began to breathe +more freely; but still the crowd began to look towards the gates of the +prison. Alas! I was not mistaken. The mob raised a shout of +exultation, and I saw a man I could too clearly recognise, between two +soldiers, with a priest advancing before him, and reciting the prayers +for the dead. It was the kind, the brave Manco himself. He walked on +with a proud and dignified air, undaunted by the revengeful shouts of +his enemies, thirsting for his blood. His step was firm, and his brow +was unclouded, and his lips were firmly set; but I observed that his +bright dark eyes were every now and then ranging anxiously among the +crowd, as if in search of a friendly glance. His fellow-beings who +formed the mob, looked at him with eager and savage curiosity; but no +one appeared to offer him any sign of recognition. He was closely +followed by a company of soldiers, with arms presented. They formed, I +discovered, the fatal firing party. As they advanced, the other +soldiers formed in the rear, and the mob followed close behind. The +sailor, I observed, went with the rest for a short distance, but when he +found that their attention was entirely occupied with the prisoners, he +disengaged himself from among them, and rolled back with his unconcerned +air towards our window. + +"Shipmate, ahoy," he exclaimed in a suppressed tone as he passed. + +"Who are you?" I asked eagerly. + +"A friend in need," he answered, in the same low tone. "Keep a stout +heart in your body, and if you can manage to rig a line of some sort, +let it down out of your window soon after dark. If it's just strong +enough to haul up another it will do. I'll bring a stout one with me." + +"We'll do as you say, friend, and many thanks," I answered. + +"That's all right then," said the seaman. "When you hear a cat mew +under your window, let down the line. I shan't be far off. I must now +go along with the crowd to see what's going on. I wish that I could +lend a helping hand to some of those poor fellows; but it won't do, I +must look after you, you know. A countryman in distress has the first +right to my services." + +I longed to learn who he was; but before I could ask him, he had +sauntered away among the crowd. Meantime the soldiers had formed three +sides of a hollow square, the river forming the fourth. Close to the +bank there stood a large group of human beings--the victims destined for +execution. Their arms and legs were secured with cords, so that they +could not escape. They uttered no cries or lamentations, but appeared +ready to meet their fate with stoical indifference. The priests, with +their crucifixes and candles, collected round them, exhorting them to +repentance, and uttering prayers which none of them could understand. I +looked anxiously for Manco, but he was not among them, and at last I +discovered him standing apart, under charge of a file of soldiers. With +a refinement of cruelty, it was intended that he should witness the +execution of his friends and countrymen, before he himself was led forth +to be shot. A priest stood by his side, endeavouring to make him listen +to the words of exhortation he was pouring into his ears; but, I judged, +with no effect. His arms were folded, and his eyes were turned towards +the group in the centre. Several officers were riding about the square. +At a signal from one of them (the colonel who had sent us to prison), +the priests retired; and the firing party, consisting of a hundred men, +fell back to the distance of about twenty paces. There was a death-like +silence; even the savage crowd were awed. I could scarcely breathe, and +a mist came before my eyes. + +There was a pause of a minute. Perhaps, I thought, the commanding +officer himself hesitates to give the word which must send so many of +his fellow-creatures to eternity. I was mistaken. "Fire," he shouted, +in a sharp loud voice. A rapid discharge of musketry was heard, and as +the smoke cleared off, a number of the prisoners were seen struggling +and writhing in agony on the ground. Some of them lay still enough, for +they, more fortunate, were shot dead; while the wounded uttered the most +fearful shrieks and cries for mercy. More than two-thirds stood erect, +unharmed by the bullets. The soldiers, loaded as fast as they could, +and again sent forth a deadly fire from their muskets. The number of +prisoners was fearfully thinned. The soldiers fired again and again, +and each time fewer remained alive. At last but two Indians continued +standing side by side, unscathed by the fire. I was in hopes that they +might have been pardoned; but no, the soldiers advancing, presented +their pieces at their breasts and shot them dead, while those who lay +wounded on the ground were likewise put out of their misery. + +All eyes were now turned towards the chief Manco. I know not on what +account his limbs were allowed to remain unfettered. Perhaps they +thought that among such a crowd a single man could do no one an injury. +He walked along towards the spot where his murdered countrymen lay in +heaps, with his head erect, and a firm, unfaltering step. The priest +followed him; but he waved him off, as if his services were of no +further avail. Even the officers seemed to feel some respect for him; +and I saw one of them give him a handkerchief, with which to give the +signal for the soldiers to fire. He stood boldly facing them, with his +eye firmly fixed on his executioners, a little way on one side of the +heap of dead men. My heart felt ready to burst; yet painful as it was, +I could not withdraw my sight from him. I anxiously watched for the +fatal moment. He gave a leap upwards it appeared, and threw the +handkerchief in the air. The soldiers fired; but when the smoke cleared +we could not distinguish his body on the ground. The head and shoulders +of a man were, however, seen in the waters of the river, and he was +striking out with powerful strokes towards the opposite shore, where at +the same instant a number of Indians were observed plunging in to meet +him. + +"See, Pedro, he has escaped--he has escaped!" I exclaimed. "It is +Manco I am certain; how bravely he swims. They will not be so cruel as +to kill him now. He will reach the opposite shore. Ah! alas, he sinks. +No, he has only dived; see, he comes up some way down the stream." + +The firing party advanced to the banks; but they had expended all their +cartridges, I suppose, for they stood watching him in stupid +astonishment; and no one, for a minute or more, thought of ordering any +of the other soldiers to advance and fire. This gave the swimmer a +great advantage; and as the current was strong, he had soon glided some +way down below the square. At last some hundred men advanced to the +edge of the river, and opened a rapid fire on him; but still he +continued his course undaunted. The Indians on the banks set up loud +shouts, as did those who had swam out to meet him. He was quickly among +them, when it became impossible to distinguish him from the rest. Many, +I suspected, lost their lives in their attempt to save their chief. A +number of soldiers jumped into the canoes on the banks of the river, and +attempted to pursue the fugitive; but long before they could have +reached him, the swimmers had landed, and were seen rushing up among the +trees. Whether or not he was among them I could not tell; for the +bodies of those who were killed floated down the stream out of sight. A +rapid fire was kept up at the opposite bank, which the Indians, as they +landed, had to pass through; but they were soon sheltered from its +effects by the trees, and in a few moments not one of them was to be +seen. Carts came to convey the dead away; sand was strewed over the +spot; the crowd, murmuring at the escape of the principal victim, +dispersed; and the square in a short time resumed its usual appearance. + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN. + +A FRIEND IN NEED--OUR ESCAPE. + +Pedro and I turned from the window, and sitting down, with our hands +before our faces, endeavoured to shut out the dreadful sights we had +witnessed. It was satisfactory, however, to believe that Manco had +escaped; and I trusted that he would not fall again into the power of +his enemies. When Sancho entered with a supply of provisions, he found +us so employed. + +I do not know whether he suspected that we had some hopes of making our +escape, and wished to warn us of the danger. His manner, I remarked, +was more cordial than usual; and perhaps he did not expect to see us +again. As soon as he had left us, we consulted how we should form a +line to let down out of the window, as our sailor friend had advised. +We hunted about, but could not find even the smallest piece of rope. At +last I suggested that we might tear up one of our shirts, and by +twisting the bits and tying them together, we might make a line long +enough to reach the ground, and strong enough to haul up a thick rope. +We forthwith, therefore, set to work; and having tried each bit as we +fastened it on, we were satisfied that our line would answer our +purpose. + +It was nearly dusk by the time we had finished it; and lest some one +should by chance come in and see what we had been about, we hid it away +under the mattress. It was fortunate that we took this precaution, for +just as we had done so the door opened, and a gaoler, accompanied by our +kind friend, Don Eduardo, and another person, entered the room. Don +Eduardo bowed to us, and as he took a seat which Sancho offered him, he +looked at us rather sternly, as much as to signify that we must not +appear on familiar terms. + +"I have brought this gentleman to prepare your defence for you, Senores, +as I hear that you are to be tried to-morrow," he said, in a kind tone. +"I am sorry to tell you that it will go hard with you if you cannot +establish your innocence." + +"I have to thank you very much, Don Eduardo," I answered; "but all we +can do is to protest our innocence--we have no witnesses. The Indians, +who might have proved that we were ourselves taken prisoners by their +chief, have this morning been shot." + +"It is indeed a difficult case," remarked the advocate. "I will do my +best, Don Eduardo; and we must hope that something will appear in their +favour." + +I need not repeat all that took place. The advocate asked us a variety +of questions, and made a number of notes; and then rising, followed Don +Eduardo, who stiffly bowed to us as before, out of the room. Sancho, +who went last, turned his head over his shoulder, and shook his head, +with a grave expression on his face, which showed us that he thought our +case was desperate. This circumstance made us more anxious than ever to +effect our escape; and we waited anxiously for the signal the English +sailor had promised us. By degrees the noises inside and outside the +prison died away. People, fatigued with the excitement of the morning, +had retired earlier than usual to their homes, and the square was +totally deserted. It was very dark, for there was no moon, and a thick +mist rising from the river, hung over the town; and what was of more use +to us, there was a strong wind, which howled and moaned among the +buildings, and rattled about the tiles. The time seemed to pass very +slowly; and we began to fancy that the seaman might have been prevented +from fulfilling his intention. + +"Perhaps he was watched speaking to us, and has been taken up by the +officers of justice," I remarked. + +"Perhaps he was found coming here with a rope in his possession," said +Pedro; "or perhaps he was deceiving us." + +"No, I will not believe that," I answered indignantly. "I am sure he is +honest. He is an Englishman and a sailor, there is no mistaking that; +and he did not look or speak like a rogue. Let us hope for the best." + +Just as I made this observation, we heard what sounded like the mew of a +kitten, just under the window. We instantly jumped up, and I let down +our line. I felt it gently tugged. + +"Haul up," said a voice; and as we got to the end, we found a rope +sufficiently strong to bear a man's weight attached to the end. + +"Fasten that to a strong bar; and look out not to make a lubber's knot," +added the voice. + +We did as we were bid; and soon after a strong tug had been given to the +rope, a man's head and shoulders appeared at the window. He looked in +to discover who was in the room. + +"All friends here?" he asked. + +"Yes, to a friend in need," I replied. + +"All right then," he said; and, apparently satisfied, he climbed up +farther, and sat himself down securely on the window-ledge. "Now my +lads, you'd like to get out of this, I suppose," he said, in a careless +tone, which showed that he was in no way agitated by the risk he was +running. "Well, there isn't a moment to be lost; and so I've brought +three files, that we may all work away at the bars together." + +Pedro and I took the files he offered us, and waited till he had +examined the bars. + +"Here are two together, which seem loosened in their sockets," he +observed. "Now it seems to me, mates, if we were to file away at the +upper part, just below the lowest cross bar, and could wrench out those +two bars, as you are not very stout, there would be room for you two to +slip through." + +"I feel sure that we could easily get through," I answered; "but what +are we to do, friend, when we are outside?" + +"Never you trouble your head about that, youngster," he replied. "I've +planned it all, and it can't fail; so do you just take the file and work +away." + +Thus admonished, Pedro and I began to file away at one bar, while the +sailor attacked the other. + +"Don't stop," he whispered; "the noise is much less likely to be noticed +if you go on regularly with it, than it breaks off every now and then." + +We filed away accordingly with all our might; but I could not help +trembling at times with alarm lest we should be heard; for though the +wind howled and whistled in a most satisfactory manner, yet there is +something so peculiar in the sound of filing, that I was afraid the +sharp ears of the gaoler or guards might hear it. Pedro and I had got +through more than two-thirds of our bar, and we agreed that we might +easily wrench it out of its place, when our arms began to ache, and as +we rested for a minute, we heard a footstep approaching the room. In +great alarm, we told the sailor. + +"Never mind," he answered, quite calmly. "Stow the files away, and lie +down on the bed, and pretend to be fast asleep. I've got a lump of +pitch in my pocket, and I'll just fill up the grooves we've made in the +bars, so that they'll not be observed. There, that will do. Now I'll +just wait down below till your visitor has gone." + +We threw ourselves on the bed, as he advised, and listened with intense +anxiety. The footsteps passed by, and we heard doors opening near us. +All was again silent for some time; and we had just sprung up, and were +about to call the sailor, when we heard the footsteps returning. We +threw ourselves down once more on the bed. Just as we had done so, the +door opened, and Sancho, holding a lantern in his hand, put his head +into the room. His two assistants appeared behind him. As the light +flashed on my eyes, I closed them fast. + +"All right here, the lads are fast asleep," he said, turning to the men. +"Hillo! Senores, wake up, will you. The governor has received notice +that some stranger was seen this morning, wandering about outside the +prison; and he has sent us round to see that all our inmates were safe. +Just remember, then, that we paid you a visit, that's all. Now go to +sleep again, for you won't have many more nights to rest here. Ha! ha! +ha!" + +The men laughed as he said this, as if they thought it a very good joke; +and Pedro and I sat up and rubbed our eyes. + +"_Buenos noches_, good night, Senores," he repeated; and to our infinite +satisfaction, without approaching the window, he and his assistants +retired, and closed the door behind them. + +We listened till their footsteps had died away in the distance; and then +jumping up, we went to the window, where I gave a low mew, which was +answered by the sailor, who quickly climbed back again to his former +post. I told him in hurried accents what had occurred. + +"Never mind," he answered coolly. "More reason for haste. Another +half-hour's work will set you free. Bear a hand about it, then." + +His calmness reassured us; and having carefully cleared away the pitch, +we went on filing at the bar as fast as we could. My heart certainly +did beat more rapidly than it had ever done before; for I expected every +moment to be interrupted by the entrance of the gaolers. Fortunately +the wind blew, and the tiles rattled more loudly than ever. At last, to +our great satisfaction, both the bars were almost filed through. The +sailor seized the one he had been working at, and with a powerful +wrench, tore it from the stone window-frame. + +"There," he said, giving me the piece of bar. "Put it carefully down. +We will leave it as a legacy behind us." + +Pedro and I grasped the other, and with all our strength tore it away. + +"Hurra! all right now, mates," said the the sailor, scarcely refraining +from giving a cheer. "Bear a hand, and squeeze through. I'll help +you." + +"You go first," said Pedro. "I'll follow you." + +I could just manage to squeeze my head and shoulders between the bars; +and with the assistance of the sailor, who hauled away by my collar, I +found myself standing outside them on the window-ledge. + +"There won't be room for all of us outside, so do you, mate, just get +hold of the rope and slide down to the ground," observed the sailor. + +"Where is it?" I asked, for I could neither see nor feel it. + +"Get hold of the bars with your hands, and lower yourself till you get +your feet round the rope. Don't let go with one hand till you've a firm +hold with the other. I'll guide you." + +Following his instructions, I lowered my body over the window-sill till +I could grasp the rope with my hands, when without much difficulty I +slid down to the ground. For an instant my satisfaction at being once +more outside the prison walls made me forget the risk we ran of being +recaptured, and the difficulties we had still to undergo. I stood +anxiously watching for the appearance of my companions; for it was so +dark that I could not distinguish them even at the short distance +between the ground and the window. In moments such as those, each one +appears an age, and I trembled for our safety. At last I saw a figure +gliding down the rope. It was Pedro. Scarcely had he reached the +ground when the sailor was by my side. + +"Now, mates," he whispered, "let's hold on to each other, and put our +best legs foremost. I've a canoe ready on the banks of the river, and +we may be far away before our flight is discovered." + +We lost no time in words, but taking each other's hands that we might +not be separated, we ran as fast as we could across the square, guided +by the sailor, who had taken the bearings of some lights he told us to +steer by. Owing to the stormy weather and the late hour, no one was +crossing the square; indeed, even the most callous were probably +inclined to avoid the spot where the Indians had been executed in the +morning. We must have passed close to it. At last we reached the side +of the river, but had not hit the place where the sailor had left the +canoe. Here was another difficulty. Could any one have removed it? We +groped about for some time in vain. + +"Can you both swim?" asked the sailor. + +"Yes; but it's a long way across, and there are perhaps crocodiles in +the water," I answered. + +"Better be drowned or swallowed up by a crocodile, my lads, than retaken +by those land-sharks," he observed. "It must come to that if we cannot +find the canoe." + +Pedro and I agreed to this; and, though we had not our full strength, we +prepared to take the swim, trusting to the brave fellow's assistance. + +"Well, I see there's some risk, so we'll have another hunt for the canoe +first," he observed. "Stay, I think it's lower down the stream." + +He was right. Directly afterwards, to our great satisfaction, we +stumbled upon the canoe. To launch it was the work of a moment; but +though we hunted in every direction, we could only find one paddle. + +"One must do," said the sailor. "I can manage. No time to be lost, +though." + +Saying this, he stepped in first, and seated himself in the stern, with +the paddle in his hand. He then turned the head of the canoe to the +bank, and told Pedro and me to creep in carefully over the bow. We did +so, and placed ourselves by his direction along the bottom. A stroke of +his paddle then turned the canoe round, and we floated rapidly down the +stream. I listened for any sound to indicate that we were followed, but +nothing could be heard above the howling of the wind in the trees. +Neither of us uttered a word, not that there was much chance of being +heard by any one on shore. The water bubbled and hissed round us, and +the wind threw it in sheets of spray over our heads. At times it came +rippling over the sides of the canoe, and there seemed a prospect of its +being filled; but the seaman held on his course without hesitation. We +had shot quickly by the few lights which here and there twinkled from +the houses, and were beginning to breathe more freely, thinking that we +had altogether got clear of the town, when I fancied I heard the splash +of oars behind us. I could not tell if the sailor had heard the sound, +but he seemed to ply his paddle with even greater vigour than before. +Once or twice he turned his head for an instant, which confirmed me in +the idea that we were followed; but even his practised eye could not +pierce the darkness which shrouded us. At last I saw that he had +relaxed in his efforts, and that he kept his paddle moving sufficiently +only to guide the canoe as it dropped down with the current. We had +been a couple of hours in the canoe, or perhaps not quite so long, +though the anxiety we felt made the time pass slowly. + +"Well, I believe it was only a cayman or an alligator, or one of those +sort of brutes, after all," he exclaimed, drawing a deep breath, like a +man relieved from a heavy care. + +"I have not been able yet to thank you, friend, for what you have +already done for us; but I should like to know what you propose doing +next," said I, as soon as I found we might venture to speak. + +"Well, that's just what I was thinking of, mate, myself," he answered. +"But you needn't thank me, for to my mind, I haven't done much for you +yet. All I have had time for was to get you out of limbo, and afloat on +this here river. We must now hold a council of war, to know what's to +be done." + +As he said this, he made the canoe glide in towards the nearest bank. +We quickly found ourselves in a quiet bay, overhung with trees, into +which we had by chance entered. The sailor held on by the bough of a +tree, which served to keep the canoe from floating out again. The wind +had much abated, and the sky had become much clearer, so that there was +sufficient light to enable us to steer free of any dangers in the middle +of the stream; though where we now were we should have been completely +concealed from the sight of persons on board any boat which might have +been passing, or even of one sent in search of us. + +"Well," said the sailor, "what do you propose, mate?" + +"I must first ask you whereabouts we are," I answered. "I promised an +Indian who preserved my life, to return to him before I left the +country, but I cannot tell where he is now to be found. Our wisest plan +would be to try and reach the sea, so as to get on board some English +ship. I do not think we shall be safe till then." + +"What has your friend, then, to say to the matter?" said the sailor. + +"He does not understand English, but I will ask him." + +Pedro replied that he thought we should be guided by the sailor, who had +already helped us so much. + +The sailor seemed pleased with the answer. + +"Why, then, I'll try and do my best for you, mates," he said. "You see +we are about ten miles away from your prison, and somewhere close upon +two hundred miles from the nearest port where we are likely to fall in +with any English ship. The Spaniards don't encourage them to come +openly into their ports with the high duties they clap on, though +there's a good deal of smuggling on the coast; and more than half the +British manufactures used in the country are landed without paying a +farthing of duty. I would rather stick to the river as long as we +could; but then, you see, it's the very place the Spaniards are likely +to send to look for us. So I propose that we pull down some five or six +miles further, where there are some rapids which we cannot pass, and +then we will land on the south bank, and make our way over towards the +country they call Chili, though it's hot enough, to my mind, at times. +We might manage, to be sure, to get across the mountains, and launch a +canoe upon one of the streams which run into the river of the Amazons. +It's a long way, to be sure, but others have gone down the river; and I +don't see, if we can keep stout hearts in our bodies, why we shouldn't. +When one man has done a thing, I always think another may, if he set the +right way about it." + +"A voyage down the river of the Amazons!" I exclaimed. "The very thing +I should be delighted to accomplish. I do not care for the dangers or +hardships we shall have to encounter. I say, let us try it by all +means. I am sure Pedro will agree. We must first try and find my +friend Manco, the Indian chief, if he should have escaped from his +enemies." + +I then explained to the sailor who Manco was. + +"That's the spirit I like to see," he answered. "We shall do, depend +upon it. I've no great fancy for being caught by the Spaniards and +clapped into prison; and they are certain to be looking for us all along +the western coast. We shall have to go rather a roundabout way, but +that can't be helped. Now, from what I hear, the Indians have pretty +well cleared the country of the white men to the south of this, so we +shall have little to fear from the Spaniards; and as you say the Indians +are your friends, if we fall in with them, it is to be hoped they will +treat us well. We can't expect, you know, to get through the world +without running through a little danger now and then." + +I told the sailor I agreed with him. + +"And now, my friend," I said, "I have some more questions to ask you. I +do not know your name, and I cannot guess how you came to find us out." + +"What does that matter, mate? I do not know yours; and to say the +truth, I never heard of you till a few days ago, when I heard the people +talking--for I know something of their lingo--of a young Englishman who +was to be shot for siding with the Indians. Now, thinks I to myself, +that is a very bad thing for the lad, and if I can lend him a hand, +we'll disappoint the Dons. It's my belief, a seaman--as far as that +matters, anybody--ought always to help a countryman in distress, or he's +not worth his salt." + +"Then I ought first to tell you who I am," I replied; and I gave him a +short account of myself, and my late adventures, and how I came to meet +with Pedro. + +"That's very strange," he muttered; "very strange. I'm more than ever +glad to be of use to you. Now for my name. It's not a long one. I'm +called Ned Gale. I was born at sea and bred at sea; and it isn't often +I set foot on shore, so that what good there is in me I picked up +afloat." + +"Then how comes it, Ned Gale, that you got so far inland as this?" I +asked. + +"Why, you see the ship I sailed in was seized by the Spanish +authorities, in the port of Callao, where we had been driven by stress +of weather. It was alleged that we had been smuggling on the coast, +which was neither here nor there, as there was no one to prove it. At +last the master was advised to appeal to the viceroy, and so he set off +to Lima to see him, taking me in his company. When we got to Lima, we +found that the viceroy had gone up the country; so away we went after +him. We travelled over mountains, and across sandy plains, and rivers +and torrents, day after day, but he always kept ahead of us. You see +that he had gone out to fight the Indians; and when at last we came up +with him, we found him in a very bad humour, for his troops had been +beaten in every direction. So he would not listen to a word my captain +had to say. The fact was, the bribe Captain Hindson had been advised to +offer him was not large enough. My poor captain had before been very +ill, and as the ship was, his own property, and all he possessed in the +world, his loss ruined him. From the day he got the viceroy's answer, +he never again lifted up his head; and in a week he died in my arms. It +was of a broken heart, I suppose; for there was nothing the matter with +him that I could see. Poor fellow, I have seen many a shipmate struck +down by the shot of the enemy, or sinking under the foaming waves, when +there was no help at hand; but I never mourned for one as I did for him, +for he was a right honest and kind man. The Dons did not show much +Christian charity towards him after he was dead either, for they said he +was a heretic; so they would not bury him in the churchyard, but carried +him away to a field, where they dug a hole and covered him up like a +dog. I didn't think that mattered at all, however; so I owed them no +grudge for it. I never could see the use of praying for a man after he +was dead. He did not mind where he lay, and God will know where to look +for him at the last day, when he has to stand his trial like all of us. +At first I felt a wish to die too; but I soon got over that, and taking +the money and the few things the captain had given me (I've got his note +about that matter--his will he called it), I started off for the coast +to look out for another ship. As I have been often in the country, I +have picked up some of their lingo, so got on well enough among the +Dons; but I found I couldn't very well travel alone, and often had to +wait till I found some one going my road. It was in this way, while I +was looking out for companions, that I happened to fall in with you. +And now you know something of my history, are you willing to trust me?" + +"Had I known nothing about it, after the essential service you have +rendered us, I would confidently have trusted you," I answered. + +"Avast now then, mate," exclaimed Ned Gale; "don't give me any soft +sawder; I'm not fond of it. I like the cut of your jib, and you like +the cut of mine; so we shall sail very well in company. By-and-by we +shall know more of each other. And the young Don there, I like his +looks too, though I'm not over partial to the natives. Howsomdever, +we've had talking enough, and as my arms are rested, and there don't +appear to be any enemy abroad looking for us, we may as well get under +weigh again." + +I agreed with him; and Pedro and I sinking down into our former +position, we again glided out into the stream. The river was in places +very shallow, and more than once we touched the bottom, and the water +began to foam over the stern; but Gale lifted her clear with his paddle, +without our being obliged to jump out, and away we went again as rapidly +as before. Pedro was very silent--he felt confused and astonished at +all that had occurred; neither did Ned Gale nor I exchange many words, +for we could not tell at what moment we might come upon any of the +villages which are to be found on the banks of the river. Now and then +we heard a dog bark, and the crowing of some cocks in the distance gave +signs of the approach of morning; but no habitations were visible, and +no human voices gave us cause for alarm. + +Several of the villages on the south bank, Ned Gale had learned, had +been destroyed by the Indians; but they had not attempted to cross to +the north side. After about an hour's paddling, we reached a spot +similar to the one where we had before taken shelter. We paddled along +the shore of the little bay for some way, trying to find a place hard +enough to bear our feet, for the bank was generally soft and muddy +fringed by a broad belt of reeds, which the alligators must have found +convenient for tickling their snouts with. + +"Step out," said Gale, "and learn if we are likely to make our way +inland from this. I will wait for you and look after the canoe." + +Doing as he desired, Pedro and I felt our way along with cautious steps, +for under the trees it was so dark that we could scarcely see our hands +held up before us. We found that the ground rose a little way beyond, +and appeared quite hard. Satisfied with our discovery, after about a +quarter of an hour's absence, we commenced our return to the boat. We +walked on slowly, every instant expecting to fall into some hole; and at +last we agreed that we ought to have reached the canoe. We hunted about +to the right and to the left, but we could not even see the river. We +called out as loud as we dared, but Gale did not answer. + +"There is the river; I see it shining through the trees," said Pedro. + +Very soon we got up to it; and Pedro, who was a little in advance, was +very nearly falling in. I dragged him back, and we began to hunt for +the canoe. It was nowhere to be seen. Again we shouted louder than +before, but Ned Gale did not answer. Could he have deserted us? Such a +thing seemed impossible, yet we began almost to despair. + +"Could an alligator have picked him off?" I asked Pedro, shuddering as +I thought of our friend's probable fate. + +We had kept along the bank of the river for some way. Just then Gale's +voice sounded close to us. We were soon up with him, and had told him +of the result of our expedition, and of our alarm. + +"It was my fault, I suppose," he answered, laughing. "I found a tree to +which I could make the canoe fast, so I thought I might as well take a +little sleep while you were away. I heard you call, and dreamed that I +answered you. The honest truth is, I spent all last night looking about +the prison to find you out, so I haven't closed my eyes for many an +hour. You'll pardon me, mates, I hope; nature's nature, and will have +its way." + +I assured him, now that we had found him, we did not mind the fright; +and asked him what he proposed doing next. + +"Why, the first thing, you see, is to send the canoe out into the +stream, so that our enemies may not discover where we have landed," he +answered. "It will float away over the falls; so they may be looking +for us miles below them perhaps." + +According to Ned Gale's suggestion, we towed the canoe to the end of the +point which formed one side of the bay, and he then throwing the paddle +into it, we gave it a shove, which sent it out into the middle of the +stream, down which we could distinguish it gliding rapidly away, till it +was lost to sight. + +"We must lose no more time now, mates," said Ned Gale, as we climbed up +the bank. "We must get some way inland before daylight, and then stow +ourselves away in a wood till we have time to look about us. We must +keep clear of all cottages, for the white-brown fellows hereabouts would +make no bones of selling us to the Dons, if they thought they could get +anything for us. You see I've brought prog enough to last all hands for +three days or more, on somewhat short commons; and mayhap we may snare +some game to eke it out much longer." + +This was good news, for, by taking proper precautions, I thought we +might at all events avoid falling into the hands of the Spaniards; and +of the Indians I had no fear. The ground over which we were passing, +was very rough and uncultivated, and we could discover no beaten path. +After some time we came to a mud wall; and on the other side we found a +field full of maize, just fit for cutting. This gave us a very welcome +supply of food, and we filled our pockets and caps, and a bag Ned Gale +had brought with him, for that very purpose. + +It was necessary, however, to get away from the farm before daylight; so +we skirted along the wall, and once more found ourselves on wild ground. +The whole eastern sky was covered with a mass of flame, a sign that the +sun himself was about to appear, when we caught sight of a forest +spreading out before us. We pushed on much faster than we had been able +to do during the darkness, and had just concealed ourselves among the +trees, as the sun, rushing from among the mountains, cast a bright glow +of light over the plains we had just passed. The first thing Ned Gale +did, was to climb up one of the tallest trees on the outskirts of the +forest, to take a look round and see what was in sight, as, he observed, +a good seaman always does the first thing in the morning. When he came +down, he reported that he had observed in the far distance some smoke, +which he supposed arose from the farmhouse we had passed in the night; +but that he had discovered no other human habitation while as far as the +eye could discern there appeared to be only an uncultivated plain. +Having eaten nothing since our last meal in the prison, Pedro and I were +very glad when Ned Gale opened his wallet, and produced some dried meat +and bread and cheese, and what was almost of greater value, a good +supply of cocoa. He had a flint and steel with him, and a tin cup for +boiling water; so we collected some sticks and lighted a small fire, +sufficient to cook our cocoa and to parch some peas. On looking over +our provisions, we found that we had already ample to last us a week, so +that we might venture to push across the mountains towards Cuzco, where, +Manco had told me, he expected about this time the Indians would be +collected in great force. We had, however, more than a day's journey +before we could reach the foot of the mountains, which were upwards of +thirty miles off. + +On hunting about, we discovered a spring of bright water bubbling up +close to the roots of an enormous tree, which it evidently very much +assisted to nourish. We ate a good meal, and then Gale insisted that +Pedro and I should lie down and rest, while he watched. As we both of +us very much required sleep, we were not sorry to follow his advice; and +in about two hours we awoke much refreshed. + +I have not yet described Ned Gale. He was about five feet six in +height, and very strongly built, with rather a large head, covered with +a profusion of light hair. He wore a full bushy beard and large +whiskers. His eyes were full and round, and of the brightest blue I +have ever seen in those of a man. His month was large, and filled with +strong white teeth, and his nose, though rather thick and prominent, was +otherwise well cut. Indeed he came up fully to the description of a +fine-looking fellow without being handsome. His dress was that of an +ordinary seaman of those days. He wore a belt with a brace of pistols +stuck in it, which were partly concealed by his loose cloth jacket. His +head was covered by a small low-crowned straw hat; and the puzzle seemed +to be how he could manage to keep it on. Altogether he presented a +figure very seldom seen so far inland as we then were. + +"Come, mates," he exclaimed, "it's time to be making headway again." + +We jumped up, and having divided our stores into three equal parts, and +cut some thick walking-sticks, we shouldered our bundles, and +recommenced our journey. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN. + +OUR FLIGHT WITH NED GALE, AND THE ADVENTURES WE MET WITH. + +We travelled all day through the forest, the glimpses we every now and +then obtained of the mountains serving to guide our steps. On emerging +from the forest we arrived at a rapid stream. + +"How are we to cross this?" I exclaimed. "We shall spoil all our +provisions, and have our clothes wet for the night, if we are obliged to +swim across." + +"Oh, I think we may be able to ford it," said Ned Gale. "Here, mates, +let's catch hold of each other's hands, that if one falls the rest can +pick him up. I'll lead across, and sound with my stick. To my mind, +that's the way people should help each other through the world." + +After hunting about for some time, we found a broad place, where, from +the appearance of the bank on either side, we fancied there might be a +ford. So we took off our lower garments, and fastening our loads high +up on our shoulders, we commenced the passage. For some way the water +was shallow, and rose but little above our knees; but we went on slowly, +Ned carefully sounding with his stick in advance. It was fortunate that +we did so, for on a sudden Ned sung out that he could find no bottom; +and scarcely had he spoken, when he sunk up to his armpits, and had not +we not hauled him back with all our might, the current would have +carried him down the stream. We tried several other places, but +everywhere found the water too deep to ford. + +"It won't do," observed Ned. "We must stand back to the shore, and try +to find another way of crossing. Here, mates, let's set to work and +collect as many dry rushes as we can pull. I've seen the Indians cross +much broader and more rapid rivers than this on a few bundles of +rushes." + +I told him, so had I; and I did not know how it was that I did not think +of it before. Ned had a large clasp knife, with which he cut away the +rushes at a great rate, while, as Pedro and I had had ours taken from us +in the prison, we were obliged to tear them up by the roots, or to break +off the dry ones. When we had made a large heap of them, Ned gave me +his knife. + +"There," he said, "you go on cutting, while I begin to build our craft." + +There were some young trees growing near, one of which about ten feet +long he had cut down. This he said was to serve as a keel, to make the +craft somewhat ship-shape. He first fastened the rushes together in +small bundles, and these he secured along the pole on either side, one +outside the other. He placed smaller bundles at the ends, and fastened +them together; thus forming in a few minutes a very respectable-looking +canoe, which, though not water-tight, would have enabled us to perform a +much longer voyage than we had to undertake. By placing some bundles at +intervals across the canoe, we hoped to be able to keep ourselves dry, +having our feet only in the water. Our next care was to cut some long +poles, by which we proposed to pole ourselves across. Ned Gale said a +couple would be sufficient, one for him and another for me. Having cut +them, we launched our canoe into shallow water, so that we could step +easily into it; and then, seizing our poles, we shoved out into the +stream. Our canoe kept us well out of the water, though it had a +tendency to turn over, which we were well able to counteract with our +poles as long as we could reach the bottom. We had got more than half +way across, when the water deepened so much that we were obliged to use +them as oars, or rather paddles, to get across; and we had floated some +way down the stream before we again could find the bottom. At last we +landed, and drew up our canoe. I proposed leaving it, to make the +natives wonder at the strange contrivance. + +"No, no," said Gale. "Never mind what the natives may think about it. +I say, let us stop and pull it to pieces, or some of the Spaniards may +chance to see it, and it will show them which way we are gone. It is a +foolish notion people have of caring what those they may never see or +hear of again, think of something they have made or done. Nothing good +or useful, I mean, but some folly or other. It's what makes people +carve their names on the top of a rock, or some out-of-the-way place, +that somebody else, about as wise as themselves, may know that they have +been there." + +It was the work of two or three minutes only to pull the raft to pieces, +and to send the bundles of reeds which composed it floating down the +stream. Before leaving the river, we sat down and took the meal which +we called our dinner; and having drunk as much water as we required, we +filled up the skin Ned had provided, as we could not tell when we might +again meet with water. Very fortunate it was that we did so. Having +packed up our traps, we trudged onwards. + +We had walked about a couple of miles over a country thinly sprinkled +with trees, and naturally fertile, though now without a human +habitation, when, on looking ahead, instead of the green colour of the +grass, and the varied foliage of the trees, we observed, as far as the +eye could reach, one unvaried mass of reddish brown. + +"That's a wild heath ahead of us, which we shall have to pass," observed +Ned. "I never saw the like of it." + +"See, see," exclaimed Pedro, pointing rather more to the right than we +had been looking. "What is that?" + +At first we could not guess what was happening. It appeared as if at a +little distance off there was a heavy snow-storm falling, the whole air +being full of large white flakes, so dense as almost to conceal the +fierce rays of the sun. + +"No, it can't be snow--that's certain," said Ned. "But what it is, I +can't say." + +The seeming snow-drift swept on as we advanced towards the brown heath. +Pedro ran on a little ahead, and stooping down, soon returned with a +large insect in his hand, which I recognised as a locust. It was fully +three inches in length, of a reddish brown colour, and with very long +and powerful hind-legs, with which, when Pedro opened his hand, it +sprung off to a great distance. The appearance we had seen was that of +a flight of locusts, or rather a small division of their army, which was +about to settle directly in our course. + +We were soon among their outposts, where they lay pretty thick; but +beyond, as far as we could see, the ground was completely covered with +them. Pedro, who had often seen them before, declared that, like ants +and bees, they have peculiar laws and regulations; and that those we +first came upon were, like the sentinels of an army, placed to give +warning of coming danger. If such is the case at times, they gave no +notice of our approach, but merely skipped and jumped about, and knocked +against our legs as we walked by. + +"It's a good job these beasts have no fancy for eating meat as well as +vegetables," observed Ned. "If they once began upon us, there wouldn't +be much of us left in the course of an hour." + +As, however, they neither sting nor bite, they did us no harm, though +they skipped about us in millions as we advanced, while numbers were +crushed every time we put our feet to the ground. We proceeded for +upwards of an hour through this moving mass of life, till we stood +literally in the centre of a sea of locusts. It was necessary to push +on to get from among them before dark, as we had no fancy to attempt to +rest among such unquiet companions. It took us more than another +half-hour to get clear of them; and we calculated that they covered a +space four to five miles broad at the place we found them. We then came +upon the ground which they had occupied, and the most ruthless of +invaders could not have destroyed a country more completely than they +had done. Not a blade of grass remained; every tree and shrub was +leafless, and their branches were stripped of their bark. We could not +help looking with painful amazement on the scene of desolation which +those small animals had caused. Not only would they, as Ned Gale said, +have eaten us up had they been carnivorous, but they might have devoured +Pizarro and the army with which he conquered Peru in the course of a +night. For miles in advance they had left traces of their visit. We +congratulated ourselves on having brought water with us, as we could +find none in the neighbourhood. What became of this vast flight of +locusts I could not tell. I only hope they flew into the sea, or died +from repletion; for had they gone on consuming as much daily as we saw +them destroy, they might lay a whole province desolate in the course of +a few weeks. + +We walked on till it was quite dark before we could find a sheltered +spot in which to bivouac. At last we reached a deep hollow, which at +one period of the world's history had been probably part of a +watercourse, but owing to some convulsion of nature, it was now +perfectly dry. Trees grew on the upper edges, and the sides were +covered with brushwood. It appeared, as far as we could judge in the +uncertain light of the evening, to be a place well suited for our +purpose; and we accordingly hunted about till we found a spot where we +could light a fire and lie down to rest. This was not very easy, but at +length we discovered a small open space covered with grass. Gale cut +away the bushes round it, and piling up some in the centre, we lighted a +fire. The flames, as they burned up, showed us the wild character of +the place we were in. Dark rocks appeared here and there among the +brushwood, and tall trees towered above our heads, effectually screening +the light of our fire from any persons who might by chance have been in +our neighbourhood. + +We boiled our cocoa, and parched our heads of Indian corn, and then +prepared to rest. + +"We might be worse off; and so, mates, I don't think we've any cause to +complain," observed Ned Gale as he surveyed our abode. + +This was a favourite expression of his; and he was always contented, +whatever happened. I felt grateful; for though our prospects for the +future were uncertain, we were at all events at liberty, with a fair +chance of escaping our enemies. Ned Gale had a little black pipe which +he prized much, and a small supply of tobacco, which he husbanded with +the greatest care. He lighted his pipe, and sat over the fire enjoying +his smoke in silence. + +As usual, we took it by turns to watch and to keep our fire alight. +Pedro and Ned Gale had been sleeping for some time, when, finding that +the fire required feeding, I rose to put some more sticks upon it. As +the flames burst forth more brightly than before, their light shone on +the high branches of the trees, when, happening to look up, I saw just +above as a face peering down from among the foliage. It seemed to be +watching us very attentively; the owner fancying, probably, from his +position, that he was unobserved. As he put his head more forward to +get a better sight of us, I saw that he was an old black man with a +white head; and immediately it struck me that he was employed as a scout +to watch us by the Spaniards. My first impulse was to rouse my +companions. + +"Ned Gale, Ned Gale," I sung out, "the Spaniards are after us I am +afraid." + +He sprung to his feet, and looking anxiously around, grasped one of his +pistols, like a man ever ready to encounter danger. + +"Where are they?" he asked. "I don't see them." + +"There, there," I answered, pointing at the trees. + +He and Pedro turned their eyes in the direction I indicated. There was +now not only one negro looking at us, but several black faces, encircled +with white hair, appeared among the branches. Instead of flying from +our supposed enemies, they both burst into fits of laughter. + +"Those Spaniards? Why, they are monkeys," exclaimed Ned. "Ha, ha, ha! +Now, if I could bring one of them down, he might serve us for dinner +to-morrow." + +I could not help joining in his laughter, though I had no fancy for +eating a monkey. He threw up a piece of stick with all his force. It +missed its aim, and served to send the whole troop scampering away, +uttering mournful howls, to a distance, where they for some time kept up +a concert, which effectually banished sleep. + +When the monkeys had ceased howling, Pedro began his watch, and I tried +to obtain some rest. Ned Gale, with his sailor habits, very quickly was +lost in the land of dreams; but I was not so fortunate. I saw that +Pedro was reading, and I did not wish to interrupt him. He every now +and then shut his book and looked about him. He appeared to me to be on +the watch in expectation of some threatened danger. At last I gave up +the attempt to sleep as hopeless. There was something in the air of the +place, I believe, which affected me. My young companion had been +sitting for some minutes lost in meditation. + +"What are you thinking about, Pedro?" I asked. + +"Of my father and mother," he answered, with a sigh. + +"Why, I thought you never knew them," I observed. + +"I have often dreamed of them though," he said. "Do you know, Senor +David, that I sometimes fancy I may some day discover them. Had I the +means of becoming educated as you are, and of obtaining a fortune, I +would employ it in searching for them." + +"If we succeed in getting to England, I am sure my friends, in gratitude +to you, will put you in the way of making your fortune," I replied. +"But I own I cannot see how this will enable you to find your parents, +without any clue to guide you." + +"God, if He thinks fit, will point out the way," he answered. "I put my +trust in Him." + +I could say no more. This idea had, I found, become the absorbing one +of his mind. + +"If my parents live, He too will show me the means through which I may +discover them," I thought. + +I had never yet been thoroughly convinced of their loss. I was +perfectly helpless I knew, and I felt forcibly that on Him alone could I +place my trust. The feeling brought comfort and consolation; and lying +down again, a soothing sleep soon stole over me. + +I was aroused by a shout from Ned Gale, who had taken Pedro's place. I +started up, and found the sailor with his pistol in one hand and his +long stick in the other, about to spring into the thicket beyond us. +The fire was almost extinguished, and daylight was appearing. I looked +round for Pedro. To my horror he was nowhere to be seen. + +"Where is the young Spaniard?" I exclaimed. + +"Follow me," answered Ned, rushing forward. + +I seized a lighted branch, and with my stick in the other hand, I leaped +after him. A shriek of terror and agony, which I could not doubt +proceeded from Pedro, served to guide us. It was followed by a savage +roar. + +"Save me! save me!" he shrieked. + +A movement in the bushes showed us more certainly where he was. + +"A wild beast has got hold of the poor fellow!" shouted Ned, bending the +bushes before him as he hurried on. + +The branch I held in my hand was of a resinous nature, and burned +brightly. It light showed us in a clear space, under a wide spreading +shrub, poor Pedro on the ground, with a large jaguar standing over him. +The attention of the savage animal had been attracted by our approach, +and he stood glaring fiercely, uncertain whether to carry off his prey +or spring at us. Ned was afraid of firing, lest we should miss the +jaguar and hit Pedro. My torch was of more service than his pistol. I +saw in a moment that the only chance of saving my friend was to frighten +the beast, so, thoughtless of the clanger to myself, I sprung towards +him, and dashed the burning brand in his face. I believe I almost +blinded him. With a roar, denoting pain and terror, he sprang on one +side, when Ned rushed in, and dragged Pedro away from him. + +"Fire--now fire," I shouted to Ned, thinking the jaguar was about to +close with us. + +He lifted his pistol and fired. He was so close that the ball entered +the beast's head, and, giving a bound forward, he fell to the ground +struggling in mortal agonies. Once again he rose to his feet and +attempted to seize me; but my torch turned him aside, and before he +could reach me he rolled over, and in another instant he was dead. I +looked anxiously to see if Pedro was much hurt, or rather I scarcely +expected to find him alive. At that moment a bright light burst forth, +and I saw to my dismay that the bushes round us were in a fierce blaze. +Ned was carrying Pedro in his arms, and dashing through the bushes +towards the place where we had rested. + +"After me, mate, after me," he cried. + +I did require to be told to hurry, for the flames were leaping up from +all the surrounding shrubs, and climbing many of the higher trees. I +overtook him before we reached our encampment. + +"Pick up our traps and come along," shouted Ned, as he made his way +towards the path by which we entered the glen. I stopped at our bivouac +and collected our packages of provisions, and our other property. Just +as I was coming away, my eye fell on Ned's knife. I put it in my +pocket, and was looking to see if I could find any other article, when +the flames caught hold of the surrounding bushes, and warned me to beat +a retreat. They crackled and hissed and roared in my rear as I ran on. +A light breeze had sprung up, and blew them towards us. Fortunately the +bright light they caused enabled us to see our way, or we should have +had great difficulty in escaping from the glen. + +Heavy as Pedro was, Ned bore him like a child up the rough ascent. The +fire flew from shrub to shrub, and extended in every direction; the +smoke, too, increased in denseness, and almost stifled us. I could +scarcely breathe, and expected every moment to sink from exhaustion; but +the brave sailor was not to be daunted. Crying out to me to follow, he +pushed on over all impediments. I kept close to him, and in a few +minutes, which seemed an age, we reached the more level ground above the +dell. Ned stopped for an instant to gather breath, but before I had +time to discover more than that Pedro still breathed, we were compelled +to continue our flight, not only by the approach of the smoke and +flames, but by a new danger. The jaguar we had killed was not the only +inhabitant of the glen of his species, and as the path we had taken was +the chief outlet in that direction, a number of animals of all +descriptions came rushing out close to us. I had turned my head to look +at the blazing furnace below us, when, to my dismay, I saw close behind +me a huge animal, which I at once guessed was a female jaguar, followed +by several cubs. I cried out to Ned to hurry on with his burden, and +swinging my stick about me, I dealt her a heavy blow on the head, which +appeared somewhat to astonish her. At any other time she would probably +quickly have avenged the insult; but, frightened by the flames, she +merely uttered a growl of anger and turned on one side, followed by her +hopeful progeny. We did not halt again till we reached a rocky mound, +free from grass or shrubs, to which we had hopes the fire would not +approach. + +It was now almost daylight, though the blazing dell afforded us ample +light to see our way. Ned laid Pedro down, and we anxiously examined +his wounds. His side and one of his arms, by which the jaguar had +lifted him, were dreadfully torn, but we could discover no marks of the +brute's teeth. He was senseless, but this we hoped was caused more by +terror and pain than from any mortal injury. We neither of us possessed +any knowledge of surgery, so we had only our own sense to point out what +was best to be done; and in truth we had but little time for +consideration, for the flames were already spreading beyond the glen, +and might soon approach our retreat. + +"We must wash the poor fellow's hurts, and bind them up to stop the +bleeding," said Ned. "Where's the water, mate?" + +We had a little left in our skin bottle, and pouring out some of it on +my handkerchief, I wiped away the blood. My shirt, I remembered, was +fortunately of linen. + +"Here," I exclaimed to Gale, "just tear off the sleeves for me; they +will serve for bandages." + +With a seaman's promptness he did as I proposed, and we bound up the +places where he was hurt, in a fashion which perhaps might not quite +have satisfied a surgeon, though we performed the operation as well as +time would allow. Our patient had now began to recover, and after +drinking a little water, he sat up and looked around with a gaze of +amazement on the strange scene below us. The fire in the glen was +raging furiously, and sending up dark columns of smoke to the sky. +Animals of all descriptions were rushing forth from the conflagration, +too terrified to take any notice of us. Three or four fierce jaguars, +with terrible howlings, dashed by, followed by several huge serpents, +who crawled, hissing, along over the ground, disturbed from their abodes +among the roots of the trees. A troop of monkeys ran chattering away; +and parrots and birds innumerable flew over our heads, driven from their +long accustomed homes. + +"It won't do for us to remain here much longer," observed Ned. "Ask the +young Spaniard how he feels, and whether he thinks he can get along." + +In reply Pedro answered me that he was able to walk, though it was not +without difficulty that he lifted himself from the ground. However, as +it was absolutely necessary for us to proceed on our journey, Ned and I, +supporting him between us, began to descend the rock. There was, +fortunately, a sandy track, free from grass, of considerable extent, on +one side, across which we proposed to proceed. Ned had loaded his +pistols, and we each of us kept our sticks in our hands, ready to defend +ourselves from any of the wild beasts which might venture to attack us. +The fire continued raging fiercely on our right as we hurried on, and we +watched it with intense anxiety, to see whether it was advancing towards +us. Had it taken place on the open prairies, which cover many portions +of the continent, our escape would have been impossible. As it was, our +chance was at times doubtful. By ourselves we might have run for our +lives; but our wounded companion impeded us, and I would have sacrificed +myself sooner than have quitted him. The ground which we were then +traversing was composed chiefly of rock and sand, but there was enough +dry grass growing on it, should it catch fire, to scorch us very much, +if not to destroy us; and ahead, for some distance, it grew much +thicker; while beyond again there appeared a wide extent of sandy soil, +which, if we could once reach, we should probably be in safety. As the +sun rose, the wind shifted to a quarter which blew the flames more +rapidly than heretofore towards us. Ned and I exerted ourselves to the +utmost to drag on poor Pedro, who was not so well aware of our danger. +Onward, in the shape of a wedge, advanced the devouring flames with the +sharp point first. This gradually thickened, spreading out on either +side. Now a rock or a sandy patch intervened, but they leaped over all +impediments, the long dry grass catching fire from the sparks which, +like a vast courier of destruction, were borne forward by the breeze. I +looked at Ned to learn from his looks what chance he thought we had of +escaping, but his countenance did not betray the slightest sign of fear +or doubt. The fire, it must be understood, had, in consequence of the +direction the wind had before blown in our rear, been driven in a +straight line on our right a considerable distance in advance of us; and +now, from the wind blowing from our right, it was taking a course +directly across the path we were anxious to pursue. On our left the +ground was covered with dry grass and underwood, so that we dared not to +venture across it. The only course left us was, therefore, directly +ahead. + +"I am sorry we left the rock," said I, as we hurried on. + +"We should have been fried brown by this time, if we had remained on +it," answered Ned, giving a glance over his shoulder. "Why, mate, the +flames are dancing round it as merrily as waves in a storm. Cheer up: +we shall do well yet." + +Taking courage from him, I pushed on with renewed hope. But this did +not last long. Every moment the fire got nearer and nearer; and already +it seemed to me that the path before us was cut off. By running very +fast we might perhaps get across; but with Pedro to help along, I +thought we could not do it. I felt that I could not leave the poor +fellow, and resolved to remain by him, and perish with him if so it must +be; but I saw no reason why the brave seaman should share our fate, when +he might easily save himself. + +"Ned," I cried, when we had reached a spot somewhat more free from grass +than the surrounding ground, "run for it, my good fellow, and save +yourself. I cannot leave my friend, for I owe him much; but he has no +claim whatever upon you. Fly! fly!" + +"What, mate? I should be a pretty sort of a seaman if I was to do as +you say," he exclaimed, stopping for a moment to address me. "He's a +fellow-creature in distress, and that's enough for Ned Gale, I hope. +Run--ha! ha! Here, just lift him up on my back, and we'll see what can +be done." + +It was the work of a moment to do as he bid me; and throwing me his +knapsack, Ned, with Pedro on his shoulders, set off running, and I after +him, as fast as our legs would carry us. I had before remarked the +great strength Ned possessed when he chose to exert it. He now bore +Pedro along as if he had been a child. Away we dashed right into the +belt of tall grass, one end of which, not many hundred yards' distant, +was already burning. The fire came hissing along towards us like a +fiery serpent. Ned glanced at it over his shoulder, and increased his +exertions. He saw that not a moment could be spared. As I saw it +coming on, I almost shrieked with a terror I had never before felt; and +had I been alone I think I should have fallen. The fire was close upon +us. There was a slight rise in the ground. We rushed up it. I thought +that our doom was sealed, when, to my joy, I discovered that I had been +deceived by the rise as to the width of the belt of grass. A few yards +only of grass had to be passed, when beyond appeared the sandy plain, +without a particle of herbage on it. We felt the heat of the fire--the +flames were upon us. We dashed through the intervening space of grass, +and ran on for a hundred yards before Ned thought of stopping. + +"Here, mate!" he said at last. "Help the poor fellow down, and hand me +a drop of water. It's hot work, but we have escaped a frying this time +at all events." + +We put Pedro on the ground, and then, as he insisted on walking, we +moved on a little further, and sat down by him to watch the progress of +the conflagration. It quickly worked its way across the belt we had +passed across; and then the scrub beyond towards the mountain caught +fire and blazed up furiously, extending far away to the east, till the +whole country before us seemed one mass of flame. Had it been night it +would have been magnificent, but we were truly glad that it was day, +that we might more easily see our road. + +"Well, I hope there are no poor people's farms in that direction, or any +Indians hiding away, for the fire doesn't seem inclined to spare them," +said Ned. "And now, mates, let's have some prog; we've a long day's +journey before us, and have had a sharp morning's work." + +We took our frugal meal, and then seeing that Pedro required some rest, +we made him lie down for half an hour before we recommenced our journey. + +"I'm thinking, mate, that this fire will be bringing some Indians down +to look at it," observed Ned, as we walked on. "If they are friends +they will be welcome, as they will help to carry our poor friend here. +Howsomdever, `it's an ill wind that blows no one good,' and, to my mind, +if any Spaniards are on our track they won't much like crossing that +little bit of blaze astern, till we are pretty well out of their reach." + +I agreed with him that I should much like to meet any friendly Indians. +We had another reason for being anxious to do so, as our provisions were +running short, and, at the slower rate we were now compelled to travel, +would scarcely last us till we could reach that part of the country +where I expected to find some of Manco's followers. With regard to the +Spaniards harming us, I did not think they would venture so far; but +should they have done so, the fire would afford us a better chance of +escape, and prevent their dreadful bloodhounds from scenting out our +track. Pedro bore up manfully in spite of the pain he suffered from his +hurts. From the very temperate life he had led, his blood was cool and +healthy, and no inflammation set in; which I was afraid would have been +the case. If people would but remember the great importance of +temperance, and would avoid strong drinks, and take only a moderate +portion of meat, they would escape much suffering from wounds and +injuries to which all are liable, and which in so many cases prove +fatal, although no vital part has been touched. I have seen the +strongest men die from a slight scratch; and the weakest apparently +recover from the most terrible hurts. The strong men have eaten and +drunk to gratify their palates; the weak have eaten food to live. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTEEN. + +FALL IN WITH THE ARMY OF THE INCA--MANCO AGAIN. + +We had for two days been travelling through a wild and mountainous +country, skirting the base of the Cordilleras, which served as our +guide, and looking out for a pass known to Pedro, by which we might +cross them. Our provisions were expended, though we had frequent +opportunities of replenishing our water-skins, which enabled us the +better to support our fatigue. For some distance we passed over a +portion of the great high road of the Incas, which led from Cuzco to +Quito; and as it was no longer used by the Spaniards, we had no fear of +encountering them. It was far superior to any of the modern roads, and +showed the high state of civilisation to which the Peruvians had arrived +in those days. It was from about twenty-five to thirty feet broad, and +paved with large flat stones. At intervals of about twelve paces I +observed rows of smaller stones, laid horizontally and slightly elevated +thus making the road ascend gradually by a succession of terraces or +steps. On each side of the road there was a low parapet wall of small +stones. When I remembered that this gigantic and finished piece of work +extended for many hundred miles, from one end of the dominions of the +Incas to the other, I felt greater regret than ever that the country had +been wrested from them by a people who had so cruelly neglected its many +advantages. + +By the side of the road, situated on hillocks within sight of each +other, were small edifices, where the messengers who promulgated the +commands of the Incas throughout the country were stationed. A signal +was made whenever a messenger left one of the stations, and one from the +next met him half way and received the despatch, which was then +forwarded from successive stations till it reached its destination. We +arrived towards the evening at one of these station-houses (many of +which still remain in tolerable repair); and, as a storm was +threatening, we resolved to make it our abode for the night. It was a +small, low, round tower, but the roof was wanting, which was our first +care to supply. For this purpose Ned and I tore off and cut down a +number of branches from the trees which grew near; and finding, in a +hollow some way down the hill, a pool with rushes growing round it, we +collected a sufficient supply to aid materially in forming a thatch. We +left Pedro meantime to clean the floor, and to light a fire, though we +only had some cocoa and a little Indian corn to cook by it. + +Returning with our materials, we placed the boughs across the top of the +walls, with the rushes in the form of a rude cone verging from the +centre above them. I then collected a number of stones, with which the +road supplied us, and handing them up to Ned, he put them on the thatch +to prevent its being blown away. Our work being speedily concluded, for +Ned had a very systematic way of doing everything, I bethought me of +collecting some more rushes to form a bed for Pedro. I was hurrying +down for the purpose, when on my way I observed between the trees the +walls of a building, standing on a level plot of ground. I called to +Ned, and we set off together to examine it, for it struck me it was a +small farm belonging to _mestizos_ or Indians. We soon reached it, and +I found I was not mistaken. The inhabitants had lately fled, the roof +was off the hut, and the maize crop had been reaped. We were at first +without hopes of benefiting by our discovery; but as I was looking +about, I observed a fig-tree with some ripe figs on it, which I at once +collected; and on further search, Ned espied a herd of guinea-pigs +nestling under the walls. To knock some of the little animals on the +head, was the work of a minute. We would gladly have exchanged some of +them for corn, but just as we were about to return to our tower, I +discovered a few ears of maize still standing close to a wall. With +much satisfaction I gathered all I could find. We had still more good +fortune in store. Close to the front I caught sight of a she-goat with +a young kid by her side. She had been a pet of the family, I suppose, +for she did not run away from us. Ned at once caught the kid, and +carrying it in his arms, the mother came after it to our hut. + +"I haven't the heart to kill the little animal," he observed; "but I'll +tell you what, mate, the mother shall give the young Don a bowl of milk. +It will do him more good than all the doctor's stuff in the world." + +Pedro could scarcely believe his senses when he saw us returning with +our valuable prizes. We had now a supply of food to last us for many +days, and we might, if we thought fit, remain and rest till Pedro was +better able to proceed. We soon had a guinea-pig skinned and roasting +before the fire; and then Ned caught the goat, and, acting the part of a +milk-maid, filled a tin jug with milk, which he insisted on Pedro +swallowing. The figs were very fine, and after the coarse food on which +we had so long lived, we found them most grateful to our palates. As we +sat round our fire, in spite of the smoke, we felt ourselves in the +enjoyment of abundance of luxury. Our fire-place was composed of a few +stones; some others served us for seats. Our meat was somewhat tough, +and we were without salt. Parched maize served us for bread, and our +beverage was cold water, while our beds were composed of rushes and +leaves sprinkled on the bare ground; but this was more than we had +enjoyed for some time, and we had walls to protect us from the night +breeze, and a roof to keep out the rain. Pedro and I were not merry, +for we had too much cause for painful reflection. But we were +contented, and Ned Gale declared that he was as happy as a prince--that +he had weathered on the Dons, and had the prospect of a long cruise on +shore. He fastened the kid up within our tower, but the old she-goat +was turned out, as we knew that she would not stray far from her young +one. It had not long been dark when the storm we had observed broke +over our heads. The thunder rattled, the lightning flashed, and the +rain came down in torrents; but though a good deal found its way through +the roof, we were able to pick out dry spots for our beds, and we had +cause to be thankful that we were under shelter of any sort. As our +abode also had stood for so many centuries, we had no fear of being +washed away. We had collected a supply of stones to block up the lower +part of the entrance; and with some boughs in addition we constructed a +door, which was sufficient, we thought, to keep out any wild beasts or +other intruders. Before turning in, we cut the flesh off the other +guinea-pigs, and smoked it over the fire; and we also parched a supply +of maize, in case we should be unable to prepare it on any future +occasion. Notwithstanding the tempest which was raging outside, we +slept very soundly, Ned and I keeping alternate watches, for we were +anxious to give Pedro as much rest as possible. Ned insisted on taking +the first watch; and when he awoke me, I found that the greater part of +the night had passed away. I expostulated with him on making me take +less than my share of watching. + +"Never mind, mate," he replied; "you are young, and want sleep. I'm +accustomed to do with very little, do you see. Often's the time, for a +month on a stretch, I've not had more than three or four hours out of +the four-and-twenty, and have been roused up to shorten sail two or +three times between them." + +The storm had passed away, and when I put my head out through the +branches which formed the door of our abode, I saw that the stars were +shining brightly in the deep blue sky. As I stood there inhaling the +fresh breeze, that I might the more easily keep myself awake, I saw a +dark object emerge from among the trees, and stop, as if looking +cautiously around. It was standing in the shade, and at first I thought +it was an Indian, though what his intention could be I could not divine. +Presently he came more into the road, and advanced towards the tower, +when I saw, to my no little dismay, that he was an enormous black bear. +He had probably, I thought, scented us out; and I fully expected a visit +from him. I did not like to arouse Ned; but I took up one of his +pistols which lay on his knapsack, and held it in my hand ready to give +the gentleman a warm reception, should he venture to put his snout into +the tower. On he came, waddling at a great rate down the road. + +"He is certainly coming," I thought. "Now, if I miss him, he will give +me a hug I shall not like." + +I cocked my pistol, and kept my stick ready to give him a poke in the +eye, which would keep him at bay till Ned could jump up to my +assistance. He stopped for an instant, and gave a low growl: his +instinct probably told him that some enemies were near. I drew back a +little, lest he should catch the glimmer of my eye. Then he again +advanced quicker than before. He soon came so close to me that I felt +almost certain that I could hit him; but still as I thought I might only +wound him and make him savage, I did not like to fire. I scarcely dared +to breathe or move. He passed on down the hill, and I again breathed +freely. Presently I heard him give another growl, and directly +afterwards I saw him waddling back again at a leisurely pace with +something in his paws. As he went by the tower, I perceived that it was +the unfortunate she-goat, whose kid we had fastened within. I was +determined, if I could not save the poor goat's life, at all events to +deprive Master Bruin of his supper, and calling out to Ned, I dashed +through the boughs in pursuit of him. It was hazardous work I own, but +I had not a moment for thought. Had I, probably I should have acted +more wisely. Ned was on his feet in a moment, and with his pistol in +his hand in pursuit of the bear. Bruin saw us coming, but showed no +inclination to relinquish his prey. He ran on at a great rate, and it +was some time before we overtook him. Even when we were close to him, +he continued his flight, apparently taking no notice of us. + +"Whatever you do, don't fire, mate, before he shows his face!" exclaimed +Ned. "Give him a poke in the neck; it will make him turn perhaps." + +I accordingly gave him a plunge with my stick, keeping, however, beyond +the reach of his paws should he turn suddenly round. Even this did not +make him stop, so I gave him another dig, which at last brought him to +bay, though he still kept hold of the goat. Immediately he faced about. +Ned fired his pistol, aiming at his eye. The ball took effect, and, +with a growl of fury, the beast rushed at us, at the same time dropping +the goat. On this we retreated down the road, repenting not a little of +our folly in having attacked him. Seeing that the bear had received no +mortal injury, Ned snatched the other pistol from my hand, and waited +steadily till the bear got within arm's length of him. I trembled for +his safety, but resolved not to let him stand the brunt of the combat +alone. I made a desperate charge with my stick. This distracted the +attention of Bruin, who seized hold of my stick, and at the same moment +Ned fired. The ball hit him, I saw, but was afraid had not mortally +wounded him, for, with a loud growl, he sprung upon my companion. Ned, +however, was on the alert, and leaped nimbly on one side, as I did on +the other, and the brute fell headlong over on his snout. We could not +help giving a shout of triumph at our victory, which made Pedro, who had +been awakened by the shots, hurry up to us, wondering what was the +matter. We were not quite certain that our foe was really dead; but a +few pokes with our sticks at length convinced us that he was so, and we +therefore ventured to examine him. The ball from the last shot had hit +him in the eye, and entered his brain. + +"Some bear steaks won't be bad things," observed Ned. "Now mates, let's +look after the goat. I had made sure of a cup of milk for Pedro this +morning." + +We found the goat a little way off, but Bruin had hugged the breath out +of its body, and it was dead. Pedro and I thereon dragged the goat +close to the hut, while Ned was employed in cutting the proposed steaks +out of the bear. + +"You see, mates, it won't do to leave the work for the morning, for +before that time the condors, the jaguars, and the pumas will be down +upon him, and tear every scrap of meat from his bones," he remarked. "I +wish he had been rather farther off, for the beasts will keep up such a +concert that we shan't be able to sleep much more to-night." + +When he had finished operating on the bear, he began on his victim, +observing that though goats' flesh was somewhat strong, it would serve +to make a variety in our provisions. We had now more meat than we could +well carry, in addition to which, as the kid could not live without its +mother, we were obliged to sacrifice that also. On re-entering our +abode, Pedro and I employed ourselves in cutting the meat into slips and +drying it before the fire, while Ned again laid down to obtain his share +of rest. Pedro told me that the species of hear we had killed lived +chiefly on fruits and vegetables, and that he often commits great +ravages in the maize-fields of the Indians, by breaking off the green +tops and carrying them away to his hole in the mountains; but when he +cannot obtain that sort of food, he will catch deer and wild boars, and +will even attack the oxen employed in the sugar-mills on the +plantations. He has also been known, when pressed by hunger, to assail +solitary travellers in the mountains. + +In the morning, when we went out of our tower, we saw that several +condors had been attracted by the carcase of the bear, and were tearing +it to pieces. They flapped their huge wings, and glared fiercely at us +with their red eyes as we watched them; but did not quit their banquet, +from which we had no wish to disturb them. After a hearty breakfast, +with renewed spirits and confidence we proceeded on our way. I have not +space to recount all our adventures, and must for the future describe +only those which were the most interesting. + +We climbed mountains, and traversed glens, and crossed torrents by the +bridges I have often mentioned; and yet, day after day, not a human +being did we meet. Of course we kept as much as possible at a distance +from their habitations; but the few farms we passed were deserted, and +we had no doubt that the women and children had been removed to more +secluded spots, while the men had gone to join the army of Tupac Amaru. + +A week had passed, and we were resting to take our midday meal, in a +sheltered glen, under the shade of some lofty trees. Pedro, +notwithstanding the exertions he had undergone, had almost recovered +from his hurts; and I never felt myself in better health and strength, +while Ned scarcely knew what fatigue or illness meant. Our provisions +had again run short, though we had collected a little Indian corn at +some of the deserted farms we had passed. + +"Well," said Ned, who had lighted his pipe and stretched himself out on +his back, "I shan't be sorry when we get to the big river you speak of. +Walking is very pleasant exercise, especially when one hasn't half a +hundredweight of traps and provisions to carry; but it's very slow work +you'll allow. I like to spank along with a ten-knot breeze across the +open ocean, with studden-sails alow and aloft; or to glide down a river +with a strong current and fair breeze. Ah, mate, if you ever come to +sea with me in a smart craft, you'll know what moving fast means." + +I told him that I should like nothing better, and that I longed to begin +our voyage down the Amazon; but that I must first communicate with my +Indian friends, to learn if they had gained any tidings of my parents; +for still I clung to the hope that they might have escaped destruction. +Pedro also was unwilling to leave the country without again seeing his +friends. We were all talking very eagerly about our proposed plans, +when a loud yell made us start to our feet, and, looking up, we saw a +number of Indians posted on the heights above us. Some had bows, with +their arrows ready drawn to shoot us; and others had slings in their +hands, which they were whirling round with heavy stones, prepared to +hurl at our heads. In another moment we should have had a shower of +deadly missiles rattling about us, when Pedro, rushing towards them, +shouted out, in the Quichua language, that we were friends of the Inca. +In an instant the arrows were withdrawn and the slings ceased to whirl, +and the Indians came hurrying down the sides of the mountain. In +another minute we found ourselves surrounded by a large band of +warriors. They examined us attentively, not being able to make out who +we could be, though the words spoken by Pedro proved that we were not +enemies. Ned Gale, especially, caused them much surprise, for they +certainly had never seen a human being like him before. When their +chief arrived, he listened to the account Pedro gave him, and replied +that though he had no doubt it was correct, we must accompany him to the +presence of the Inca and his chiefs, who were encamped at the distance +of some days' journey. + +"I suppose it's all right, mates," observed Ned, when I told him what +had been said. "For my part, I'm ready to go and see this new king of +the Injuns, as they call him; and if he's an honest chap, and wants a +helping hand, why I'm ready to give it him. Just you tell them that." + +I did not exactly translate Ned's message; but I told the Indians that +we were anxious to see the Inca, and would be happy to be of any service +to him in our power. + +The Indians were, I found, on their way to join the army; and as they +wished to continue their march, they desired us to pack up our traps and +accompany them. They looked upon us, I found, somewhat in the light of +prisoners; though of this we had no reason to complain, as they were +naturally suspicious of strangers, who might act as spies on their +movements. We were treated kindly, but were narrowly watched whenever +the party halted to rest. Though not better equipped, they were far +more civilised than most of the tribes who composed the army of Tupac +Catari; and they marched with some regularity, and took all necessary +precautions to guard against surprise. We learned from them that the +Spaniards, having recovered from the alarm into which they had been +thrown at the commencement of the outbreak, were collecting in +considerable force in the neighbourhood of Cuzco, to defend that city +from an attack which Tupac Amaru was threatening to make on it. + +"It matters not," observed the cacique, who was my informant. "The more +who collect, the greater number of our foes shall we overwhelm with one +blow." + +I ventured to doubt this; but he replied-- + +"Stay till you see the army of the Inca, and try to number our +standards; then tell me if you think the white faces can withstand +them." + +I thought it better not to dwell on the subject, for fear of irritating +the chief; but I recalled to my memory the handful of Spaniards who +conquered the well-trained armies of the Inca Atahualpa, and had little +hope for the success of his descendant, Tupac Amaru, with his host of +undisciplined levies; though doubtlessly their opponents had greatly +degenerated from the hardy warriors who fought under Pizarro. + +As it was necessary to supply food for the army, and we were passing +through a part of the country where the vicunas abounded, the party +halted to engage in a grand hunt, which is termed a _chacu_. About two +hundred men were told off for this purpose; some remaining encamped, and +others being sent as scouts, to the rear, to ascertain that no Spaniards +were following us. Pedro, Ned, and I were invited by the cacique to +accompany him. Half the party were supplied with weapons called +_bolas_. These _bolas_ were composed of three balls of lead or stone, +at one end of as many long lines, formed of the twisted sinews of the +vicuna, the opposite ends being fastened together. One ball is rather +lighter than the others, and when used, this is held in the hand, while +the heavier ones are swung in a circle round the head. When the Indian +is about twenty paces from the object he wishes to strike, he lets go +the lighter ball, and the weapon flies off, and the strings encircle in +many folds the neck or legs of the animal. + +Besides the _bolas_, the party had procured from the neighbouring +villages a quantity of rope and a number of stakes, and with them we +repaired to an extensive, elevated plain, where many herds of vicunas +were observed feeding. Having selected a spacious level spot, the +stakes were planted in the ground, at a distance of fifteen feet apart, +and were connected together by the ropes about two feet and a half from +the ground. A circular space was thus formed, of perhaps a mile and a +half in circumference, an opening of about two hundred paces being left +to serve as an entrance. Along the rope were fastened bits of coloured +rags, which blew about in the breeze, and were intended to frighten the +animals, and prevent them from leaping over the barrier. This enclosure +is properly called a _chacu_. It being arranged, we withdrew, and +breaking into a number of small parties, we formed a circle at a little +distance apart from each other, and several miles across. We then began +to close, driving before us, with loud shouts, all the herds of vicunas +we met with. The men opposite the entrance advanced more slowly than +the rest; and the timid animals, seeing the fluttering bits of cloth, +ran before us with affright, till they reached the open space, when they +darted into the _chacu_. Some fifty vicunas were thus in a very short +time collected, when the Indians, running among them, began throwing +their _bolas_ with the greatest dexterity, never failing to entangle the +legs of the game, which they speedily killed with their clubs or knives. +Sometimes the Indians use the _bola_ on horseback; and I must remark +that it requires great dexterity to do so with effect, as a clumsy +person is very likely to twist the cords round his own neck or that of +his steed, instead of the animal he is hunting. As soon as the vicunas +were killed, they were carried off to the camp to be skinned and cut up; +and we then moved to a distance, to form a new _chacu_. During three +days, which we passed in the neighbourhood, we killed two hundred +vicunas; and then, laden with their flesh, we continued our journey. + +The vicuna is a more beautiful animal than either the llama or the +alpaca. It is between them in size, measuring four feet from the ground +to the top of the head, and two and a half feet from the ground to the +shoulders. The neck is longer and more slender; and the wool is finer, +short, and curly. The top of the head, neck, and back, and the thighs, +are of a peculiar reddish hue; and the inner part of the limbs and the +lower part of the neck are of a bright ochre colour; and the breast and +lower part of the body is white. Each herd consists of from six to +fifteen females and one male, who, standing at a distance, acts the part +of guardian, while the rest are grazing, and when danger approaches, +gives a peculiar whistle and stamp of the foot. The herd look, with +outstretched necks, in the direction of the danger, and then take to +flight, the male stopping every now and then to cover their retreat, and +watch the movements of the enemy. Should he be killed or wounded, the +Indians declare that the females will gather round him in a circle, and +uttering shrill cries of lamentation, will suffer themselves to be +destroyed rather than desert him. + +As we proceeded on our march, we fell in with many other parties of +Indians, advancing in the same direction; some of whom were of the +savage tribes from the far interior, summoned to swell the host of the +Inca. Many of them were accompanied by troops of llamas, carrying +provisions. Some of these had bells hung round their necks, and were +adorned with bows of ribbons at their ears. They proceeded at a slow +pace, carrying their long, graceful necks something like the camel, and +gazing anxiously around on either side with their wild prominent eyes, +to watch the movements of their guides, or to observe the appearance of +the country. They were of a variety of colours; brown, black, white, +and pie-bald. I may here remark that the extreme height of the animal, +from the sole of the foot to the top of the head, is not more than four +feet and from six to eight inches; and from the sole of the foot to the +shoulder, rather under three feet. Their frames are so slight that they +will not carry a load of more than about seventy pounds weight; but they +have the valuable qualification of being able to live many days, find +even months, without drinking, owing to their power of generating saliva +in their mouths. + +Other parties had mules for the same purpose. Some were on horseback, +and formed an irregular and very Scythian-like looking cavalry. Several +bands of those on foot were followed by their wives and children; +showing that they felt confident of victory, and came prepared to take +possession of the territories they hoped to conquer. At length, after +passing through a dark gorge, and climbing a steep acclivity, we once +more began to descend; when, from the height on which we stood, we +looked down upon the vast army of the Inca, collected on a plain, or +rather wide valley, between ranges of lofty mountains. + +"What say you now?" exclaimed the cacique, with a look of triumph. "Do +the white faces dream of the mighty host collected to liberate for ever +the kingdom of the Incas from their cruel hands?" + +"I have heard that it was prophesied that the kingdom of the Incas +should be restored by the people of my country. There are none of them +there," I replied. + +"It is true," said the cacique. "But if you and your bold friend were +to fight by the side of the Inca, might not the prophecy be thus +fulfilled?" + +I at once saw the mistake I had made in thus speaking; for I felt that I +might be compelled, contrary to the advice my father had given me, to +engage actively in a contest in which I had no personal interest. + +Before I had time to reply, the signal of advance was given, and the +party hurried down the steep to join their comrades in the valley. Far +as the eye could reach in either direction, and even up the mountains +sides, were extended the vast host of the Inca, drawn up in battle +array. From among their dusky lines arose a forest of waving banners, +long lances, and battle-axes, tossing to and fro, and glittering in the +rays of the noonday sun which shone down upon their heads. At intervals +might be seen rich panoplies of feather work and lofty plumes, marking +the post of some leading cacique, or Inca noble. Some way to the right, +on a rising ground, rose the magnificent canopy under which the Inca +Tupac Amaru was to be found, surrounded by his generals and nobles. + +As the march was about to commence, our conductors hurried us down the +hill past the crowded ranks of the army, towards the spot where the Inca +was stationed. When a little distance off, he went forward alone, and +prostrating himself before the monarch, announced the arrival of some +captives. The Inca immediately ordered us to be brought before him. He +was seated under the canopy on a cushioned throne, richly ornamented +with gold; and on either side of him were ranged a dense mass of his +chiefs and councillors, all dressed in garments similar to those worn by +their ancestors. Tupac Amaru himself was habited as tradition has +described Atahualpa; and he wore as a crown the crimson _borla_, or +fringe, which hung down as low as the eye-brow, and gave a very peculiar +expression to his grave and handsome countenance. I have before +mentioned that he was a tall and dignified person; and he looked well +worthy in every respect to be the sovereign of the assembled multitude. +When he saw us he beckoned us to approach, and made inquiries of our +conductor respecting us, not knowing that Pedro and I understood the +Quichua language. The cacique simply stated where he had found us, and +replied that we could answer for ourselves. + +I begged Pedro to act as spokesman, and he gave a short account of our +adventures, as well as of my history. The Inca seemed much interested, +and assured us of his protection; at the same time inviting us to +accompany him in his march to lay siege to Cuzco. Pedro in reply, +having expressed our gratitude to the Inca, entreated to be allowed to +remain behind, assuring the Inca that he was ready to lay down his life +for the benefit of the Indians, but that the Spaniards were his +countrymen and he could not fight against them. The nobles who stood +round seemed very much offended at this; but the Inca observing that he +should consider the subject, turned to Ned and asked him what he would +do. I put the question to him in English. + +"Tell His Majesty, if it's to fight the Dons, I'll help him with all my +heart," he at once replied. "It comes natural like, and it won't be the +first time I've been at blows with them. I owe them a grudge, too, for +killing as honest a fellow as ever stepped, and that was my late +skipper. Tell him all that, mate, and say I'm his man whenever he wants +me." + +The Inca appeared much pleased at Ned's reply, which I interpreted; but +he seemed less inclined to treat Pedro and me with favour. My turn came +next. I own that I felt great reluctance to refuse fighting, and having +no sufficient excuse to offer, was about to answer that I was ready to +serve in any capacity the Inca might desire, when a loud shout was +raised, and a fresh body of Indians was seen hurrying down the +mountain's side. A chief came at their head, and I looked towards him +as the loud shouts of those around me gave him welcome. I could +scarcely believe my eyes. It was my friend Manco! I was certain of it; +and forgetting the presence of the Inca and his nobles, I rushed forward +to meet him. + +It was Manco in reality. We clasped each other's hands, and for a time +could scarcely speak. He had thought me dead, or lingering in a Spanish +prison, while I till now had been uncertain of his fate. He told me +that when he was led out to be shot, it had occurred to him that by +keeping his eye on the soldiers he might drop as they fired, and allow +the balls to fly over him; and that as he knew a number of Indians were +collected on the other side of the river, by swimming across, they might +assist him to escape. He never lost his presence of mind, and watching +for the moment the soldiers drew their triggers, he fell to the ground, +instantly again springing up and flying to the river. Before the smoke +from the muskets had cleared away, he had plunged in and was swimming +across. Several bullets struck the water close to him, but landing +uninjured, he and his friends set off towards the mountains as rapidly +as they could proceed. They were pursued by a strong body of Spanish +soldiers, who followed them to their retreat. It was several days +before they could elude their enemies, and they had then marched through +a number of Indian villages to collect recruits, before joining the +army. + +After he had paid his respects to the Inca, he introduced Pedro and me +as his friends, and we at once perceived that we were regarded in a more +favourable light than before. We accordingly obtained permission to +remain with him; but as the Inca was desirous of having Ned to assist in +working his artillery, several pieces of which were with their army, we +very unwillingly were compelled to part from him. + +Manco having performed his public duties, now set out in search of his +wife and child, whom he heard were with the women in the camp. Notice +had been given to Nita of his escape from death and safe return, and she +with her infant was ready to receive him. This meeting was very +affecting; and as the brave warrior once more took his child in his +arms, he wept over it for joy. He could not, however, remain with her +long, for his duties called him back to the army. + +"Pedro, my friend," he said, "I know you would not fight against your +countrymen; to your charge, therefore, I commit my wife; watch over her, +and guard her from danger. If I fall, carry her and my child to a place +of safety, and restore her, when times of peace again return, to her +father and her people." + +Pedro with tears promised to obey his wishes. + +"And you, David, what will you do?" he asked. + +"I will accompany you," I replied, forgetting my former resolutions, and +inspired with admiration for the gallant chieftain. "I will fight by +your side, and help to restore peace and prosperity to Peru." + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTEEN. + +SIEGE OF SARATA--CAPTURE OF TUPAC AMARU. + +We found the head quarters of the Inca established in an ancient castle, +built of large hewn stones on the side of a mountain, and which, from +its size and mode of construction, is still one of the wonders of Peru. +Here he held his court, and was treated with all the honours due to a +sovereign prince. I was particularly struck with the amount of +etiquette which was maintained, when I recollected that the Inca himself +had, but a few months before, been living the life of a simple farmer, +as had his chiefs and councillors, and that many of them had indeed been +little better than slaves to the Spaniards. Manco informed me that it +had been resolved to despatch him with a force of ten thousand men to +join a body of the same number under the command of Andres Tupac Amaru, +the young son of the Inca, who was laying siege to Sarata, a large town +not far from the lake of Titicaca; and he begged me to accompany him. I +was sorry to be separated from Ned Gale, but he said that the Inca had +put the guns under his charge, and as they were not to go, he would +stick by them. + +I was furnished with a very good horse, and took my place by the side of +Manco. The men being amply supplied with cacao every day, without +apparent fatigue performed forced marches which would have completely +knocked up any European troops. As we advanced, we found that all the +white inhabitants had fled and taken refuge in the town, where it was +said twenty thousand people were collected. My readers may be assured +that my great object was, if possible, to mitigate the horrors which I +dreaded would take place should my Indian friends prove successful. On +our arrival we found the young Andres closely investing the town, the +inhabitants of which were already suffering from famine, though they had +sternly refused to listen to a summons which had been sent in to them to +surrender. They had just before made a sortie, when the Indians had +lost a number of men; but they were, after much desperate fighting, +again compelled to retire within their trenches. The Indians had taken +several prisoners, among whom was a priest; and as soon as we arrived he +was sent in with a second summons, containing offers of peace on such +conditions as might be agreed on between commissioners to be appointed +on both sides. The young general, with Manco and other chiefs, were +standing on a hill overlooking the town when the priest proceeded on his +mission. + +"What is proposed to be done if the inhabitants refuse your terms?" I +asked. + +"Look there," he replied. "You see that from the river which passes at +a short distance from us, there is a deep ravine leading to the town, +and somewhat lower than its banks. By blocking up the course of the +river, we propose to turn its waters into the ravine, when they will +rush down and speedily flood the ramparts, and wash them away." + +I doubted the power of the Indians to perform this. + +"Think you not the descendants of those men who formed these great +roads, and built the castles and palaces which still endure, can perform +so small a task as that?" he replied. "Wait, my friend, till you see." + +After a considerable delay the priest returned, and acknowledging that +the inhabitants were reduced to feed upon mules, dogs, cats, and rats, +said that they agreed to the proposed terms, with a truce of two days. +During this time numbers of half-famished wretches were allowed freely +to wander out and collect all the food they could from the Indians. At +the end of the time two officers of the garrison came out, and sent a +message by the priest, stating that they were deputed to act as +commissioners, and proposed that the enemy should retire to a distance, +while the chiefs should meet them midway between the troops and the +town. No objection was made, and young Andres, Manco, and other chiefs, +with about twenty followers, repaired to the proposed spot. Scarcely +had they arrived there than some of their sentinels, posted on a +neighbouring hill overlooking the town, gave notice that the Spaniards +were collecting in great force at the gates, and were evidently +meditating a sortie to capture the chiefs. On this the two Spaniards +who were approaching the place of meeting, attempted to escape into the +town; but the Indians intercepting them, cut them down as a strong party +of the garrison rushed from the gates. The chiefs, vowing vengeance for +the meditated treachery, had barely time to retreat; their forces came +hurrying up for their protection; and the siege once more commenced with +greater activity than before. + +The Indians mustered nearly a thousand muskets, with which they kept up +a hot fire on the trenches: besides which, they assailed the town with +flights of arrows, showers of stones and burning darts, which set fire +to many of the houses where they fell. Still the town held out, and the +leaders, anxious to proceed to other conquests, sent in a third summons +to the garrison to surrender. Another priest was the bearer. I waited +with much anxiety for his return, as the Indians had vowed to destroy +all the inhabitants, should the town be taken after their offer had a +third time been refused. I was not, indeed, quite certain that, in case +of a surrender, some of the chiefs and their followers did not meditate +treachery. They were, it must be remembered, ignorant savages, and on +too many occasions the Spaniards had set them an example they were +likely to imitate. + +I took my food each day with Manco on a hill overlooking the town, from +whence a perfect view could be obtained of the whole scene of +operations. During the absence of the envoy hostilities had ceased, and +the Indians had withdrawn to a distance from the trenches. They now +formed a circle round the town, their cavalry occupying every level +space, and the infantry covering the surrounding hills with dense +masses. The river flowed calmly by; the valleys looked bright and +smiling; and the town itself seemed wrapped in perfect repose. Alas! it +was the repose which precedes dissolution. At length the priest was +seen issuing from the gates, and taking his way with a sorrowful +countenance towards the quarters of the young Indian general. We +immediately repaired there. The inhabitants, mistrusting the Indians, +as I concluded, refused to surrender. + +"Then their doom is sealed," said Andres; and forthwith gave orders to +block up the course of the river, so as to direct it into the ravine +communicating with the town. + +Several thousand men were employed day and night at this work, while the +rest kept the besieged in play. After two weeks' incessant labour, the +works were declared complete, and the whole army prepared for a general +assault. I took up my usual post to watch the result, hoping for the +sake of humanity that it might fail, but induce the inhabitants to +submit. At a given signal the embankments were knocked down, and the +water in a vast torrent rushed towards the town, flooding the +entrenchments and shaking the walls. They, however, withstood the +shock, and the brave defenders again returned to the shattered works +from which they had been driven. Once more the sluices were shut, and +the inhabitants were left to fancy that the threatened danger had passed +by. The next morning, however, the Indians again surrounded the devoted +town; in an increased volume the water was made to pass through the +ravine, and sweeping onward in a terrific torrent, it rushed down upon +the trenches and ramparts, carrying all before it. The defenders fled +in dismay from their posts; the signal for advance was given, and the +Indians, led on by their fiercest chiefs, dashed through the +newly-formed breach and entered the town. + +I would willingly draw a veil over the scene of horror which ensued. +Little or no opposition was offered; but the spirit of vengeance was +aroused, and not a man they encountered escaped. Prayers and entreaties +were disregarded--death was dealt on every side. Those who attempted to +fly were driven back; and of the twenty thousand persons who in the +morning walked alive through the streets, women only and a few priests, +and one or two laymen, who had taken refuge within the church, were +spared. I had earnestly entreated Manco to do his utmost to save the +lives of those who offered no resistance, pointing out to him the policy +of so doing; and through his means chiefly those few persons were +preserved from destruction. He had claimed some of them as his own +property; and for their better protection they were brought to the hut +he and I inhabited, on a hill a short distance from the town. + +Among them was a man whose deep dejection, and countenance and manners, +deeply interested me. Though his dress was soiled and bloody, I at once +perceived that he was a gentleman. + +"Alas!" he said, "I have been the child of misfortune from my earliest +clays. Whenever any bright prospect has appeared before me, it has +vanished ere I could enjoy it. I married a wife; she was young and +beautiful; but poverty oppressed us, and she had been accustomed to +wealth and luxury. A child was born to us, and I trusted it would +reconcile her to our lot; but as we were travelling through the country, +we were attacked by the Montoneros, and the infant, and the nurse who +had charge of him, were carried away to the mountains and slain, for we +could never again hear tidings of either of them. For years I toiled on +till I amassed a handsome fortune; but scarcely was it obtained, when +death deprived me of my wife. I had laid out my money in the purchase +of an estate, in the cultivation of which I had resolved to employ +myself till heaven should allow me to join my wife and child in another +world, when this dreadful outbreak commenced, and reduced me to beggary. +By a strange fate, though all my companions have been destroyed, I +still am bound to life, which I would gladly have quitted." + +Don Gomez de Castro, I learned, was the prisoner's name. Our +conversation, which had been prolonged till a late hour, for it was now +night, was interrupted by a blaze of light, which illuminated the whole +sky. Hurrying to the door of the hut, the cause became apparent. The +unfortunate town of Sarata was on fire. In every direction the flames +were bursting furiously forth, till the entire place became one burning +mass. Don Gomez, as he looked at the scene, wrung his hands, and wept +bitterly. The fire raged all night; and next morning nothing remained +of Sarata but a heap of smouldering ashes. The Indians triumphed, as +savages alone may be excused in triumphing, over their fallen enemies. +The priests who had been rescued, were, however, treated with respect; +which showed the extraordinary influence they had obtained over the +minds of the people. Had it been more beneficially exerted, by teaching +them the simple truths of pure Christianity, it would assuredly have +prevented the horrors of the outbreak; but I fear their aim had rather +been to establish their power, for their own selfish advantage, than for +the sake of religion. "By their fruits ye shall know them." + +A council of war was now held; when the young General Andres resolved to +advance upon the town of La Paz; while Manco, with five thousand men, +was to keep the communication open with the north, where he was to +rejoin Tupac Amaru. + +I rejoiced at this, for I was anxious to see Pedro and Ned Gale again; +and I own, from the scenes I had witnessed, I longed to quit the Indian +army, and to commence our proposed journey towards Europe. We marched +as rapidly as before; the cavalry scouring the country in every +direction, and now and then reporting that they had met and destroyed a +few of the enemy; but no prisoners were brought in. + +I had often expostulated with Manco in vain, on the wanton destruction +of human life. His answer was, "We treat the Spaniards as they treated +us. I cannot prevent my people from taking vengeance." + +Yet, strange to say, every chief made a point of attaching to himself, +as a Christian chaplain, one of the priests who had been saved from the +captured towns and villages. + +As we approached the neighbourhood of Cuzco, intelligence was brought us +that the Spaniards had collected in great force in that city; and that +having been joined by a number of Indian tribes from Chili, and further +to the south, they were well prepared to give battle to Tupac Amaru. On +hearing this, we redoubled our efforts to join the main army. We found +them drawn up in the neighbourhood of Tungasuca, in an extensive flat, +with a hill on one side, and a river in their rear, prepared to receive +the enemy, who were advancing along a valley in their front. A strong +body was posted on the hill, where the artillery was likewise stationed. +I at once repaired there, in the hopes of finding Ned; but the cacique +who had command of it received me very coldly, and informed me that the +services of my countryman were no longer required, and that he could not +tell where he was. This chief went by the name of Quizquiz, after a +famous general of the Inca Atahualpa. I had met him before. I did not +like either his countenance or his manners; but the Inca had confidence +in him, and listened to his advice. He had become, I suspected, jealous +of Ned, and did not like his interference. + +After wandering about for some time among the motley assemblage of dusky +warriors, I found my old friend in the rear, sitting on the ground, and +quietly smoking his pipe. As soon as he saw me, he jumped up and wrung +my hand heartily. + +"I'm glad to see you, mate, that I am," he exclaimed. "I've been +waiting for you, to be off; for the sooner we are out of this, the +better, I'm thinking. A set of lubbers there have got hold of the guns, +which they don't know how to work; and they'll do themselves no good, +and the enemy no harm, when they begin to fight, I warrant. The Inca is +as fine a fellow as ever stepped; but for that Senor Quizquiz, or +whatever they call him, he'll play him some trick, or my name's not Ned +Gale; mark that, mate." + +Ned having thus vented his spleen, as many another man would have done +at having been deprived of his command, told me that Pedro was at a +village among the hills in the neighbourhood, anxiously waiting my +return. He informed me also that the wife of the Inca, Nita, and a +large number of other women were collected there. Accompanied by Ned, I +returned to where Manco with his men was encamped; and obtaining +permission from him to carry off Don Gomez, we set out to look for +Pedro. I was mounted, and I had likewise obtained horses for my +companions. Beyond the river I have spoken of there was a succession of +lofty hills, among which was situated the village now inhabited by the +wives of the chiefs and other women. We were obliged to ride along the +banks of the river some way, till we found a ford, which we crossed. As +we ascended the first eminence, and looked back upon the scene we had +left, it presented a very beautiful appearance. The long lines of +warriors, their shining arms, the innumerable banners, and the variety +of costumes, from the half-naked savages of the interior, with their +skin mantles and feather crowns, to the well-clothed inhabitants of the +mountains and western plains, and the rich dresses of the chiefs +embroidered with gold and ornamented with precious stones. Then the +extraordinary mixture of weapons--the artillery and muskets of modern +warfare, with the bows, the slings, the clubs, and darts of ancient +times. Each man had come provided with such arms as he could procure; +and for years before every Indian who could obtain a musket had +carefully concealed it for the moment when he hoped to use it for the +liberation of his country. + +Tupac Amaru had acted the part of a good general, by providing an ample +commissariat, and several mills for the manufacture of gunpowder. Had +he at once followed up the successes with which the outbreak commenced, +instead of wasting his time in preparing the pageants of mock royalty, I +see no reason to doubt that he might really have re-established the +dynasty of the Incas in Peru. If we look at the way in which the +Circassians, a mere handful of men, have for so many years defended +against the arms of the Russians, a country more difficult to protect, +we cannot but believe that the Peruvians might have successfully held +the passes of the Andes against any force Spain could have sent against +them. In the case of the Circassians, however, it is the superior race, +few in number, and unaccustomed to what is called civilisation, but +defending their mountains against the inferior, though armed and +disciplined by service; whereas the Peruvians were decidedly far lower +in the scale of human beings than the Spaniards, and for long ages had +been unacquainted with war, and had yielded submission to those against +whom they had now risen. There were many noble spirits among them; but +others had the faults which years of slavery will ever leave behind, and +treachery and deceit were among them. Such reflections as these passed +through my mind as I watched the embattled host. + +Just as we gained the brow of the hill, the loud roar of cannon sounded +in our ears, and turning our horses' heads, we saw a large body of +Spanish cavalry galloping towards the Peruvian army. The artillery of +the latter had opened on them at too great a distance to harm them. +They halted for a time to allow the infantry to advance with several +light field pieces, which at once commenced a very effectual fire on the +crowded ranks of the Indians. Several large bodies of the Peruvians +rushed gallantly on to meet them; when the Spanish cavalry charged in +among their somewhat disordered ranks, and drove them back with great +loss. Quizquiz finding, it appeared, that his guns did little execution +from whence he was posted, dragged them on more in advance. Ned watched +him anxiously. + +"There," he exclaimed, "I thought it would be so. Does the lubber think +the Dons will let him stay there quietly to fire at them?" + +Quizquiz, however, seemed to think differently, and began firing away +with great animation, his shot telling with some effect on the Spanish +ranks. No sooner was this perceived, than a strong body was despatched +to attack him. Some Peruvian troops were also marching to his support; +but his danger had not been seen in time, and the Spaniards charging +them with great spirit, the general took to flight, and left his guns in +the possession of the enemy. I had before suspected him of intending +treachery, and I was now certain of it. He, with a number of his men on +horseback, rode off, and did not stop till he had crossed the river +below us. + +The action now became general. The whole Indian line advanced, led on +by Tupac Amaru and his bravest chiefs. Both sides fought with the +greatest bravery; but the Spanish infantry, trusting in the superiority +of their firearms, kept at a distance from the Indians, the cavalry only +charging every now and then as the broken ranks of their opponents +offered them an opportunity of success. So vastly superior, however, +were the Indians in numbers, that the wings being moved forward were on +the point of completely encircling the Spaniards, when the whole force +of the latter, advancing at a quick march, made a desperate attack on +the Peruvian centre, the cavalry meantime charging the wings. The +Indians, already shaken, could not withstand the shock. The chiefs +urged them on. Many fought with the most desperate bravery. It had now +become a hand-to-hand combat, the Spaniards like a wedge forcing their +way onward. The great aim seemed to be to seize the Inca. Several of +his chiefs perceiving this, seized his horse's bridle, and endeavoured +to drag him out of the fight. His followers, believing that it was the +signal of defeat, gave way, and fled in all directions. The chiefs in +vain attempted to stop them. Some fled across the plain, others climbed +up the neighbouring heights, and many attempted to cross the river. + +Among the latter was the Inca, with the chiefs who had surrounded him +for his protection. The Spanish cavalry followed close upon their +heels. The Inca plunged in with his horse, which boldly stemmed the +torrent; while his gallant followers turned and bravely attempted to +oppose the passage of the Spaniards, till he had crossed safely over. +The latter, flushed with victory, charged them fiercely, and cutting at +them with their swords, scarcely a man remained alive. The Inca, with +his son and brother, and other relatives, had reached the opposite bank, +and was galloping towards the mountains, where he might have found a +safe retreat; when the traitor Quizquiz, who, with his followers, had +been lying in ambush, rushed out and surrounded him. So completely +taken by surprise was he, that neither he nor any of his companions +attempted to defend themselves. Of those who did, one man only escaped +from among them, and we saw them galloping with desperate speed towards +us. Meantime the Spanish cavalry had crossed the stream, and the +traitor advancing to meet them, in a few minutes the unfortunate Inca +was in their power. + +We had been so intently watching these events, that we had not observed +what was taking place in another direction. When the chief who had made +his escape was perceived by the Spaniards, several horsemen were sent in +pursuit of him. He urged on his horse with desperate speed over the +rocky and broken ground, at the foot of the sierra on which we stood, +the soldiers every now and then discharging their pieces at him. My +interest increased as he approached, for I fancied that I recognised my +friend Manco. His pursuers got nearer to him, and fired more +frequently. I dreaded lest their shot should take effect. They were +close upon his heels; for his horse, wearied with his long journey and +constant exertion during the day, could scarcely bear him on. Just at +that moment a shout reached my ears, and looking up in the direction +whence it came, I saw Pedro running along the ridge of the hill towards +us. I waved to him as a signal that I had recognised him, and then once +more turned to watch Manco's progress. Tired as was his steed, it was +more accustomed to the rough ground than were those of the Spaniards, +with their heavy arms and accoutrements. The noble animal exerted all +its energies, well aware, it seemed, that a life depended on its speed. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHTEEN. + +PEDRO FINDS HIS FATHER--MURDER OF THE INCA. + +I have said that Don Gomez was at my side. As he saw the Spaniards +drawing near, he turned to me. "Senor David," he said, "these are my +countrymen. The Indians have lost the day." + +"You would wish to join them. Is it so?" I asked. + +"I would. Have I your permission?" he said. + +"You were committed to my charge by yonder chief, who, I trust, will be +with us soon. If he gives you your liberty, your word will not be +broken, though I shall be sorry to part from you," I replied. + +"But the Indians are defeated," urged Don Gomez. "Am I to remain a +prisoner for ever?" + +"Till he who received your word restores it to you," I again answered; +and while I was speaking, Pedro reached us. For a moment he was too +breathless to speak; and during this interval I observed that Manco had +so far got ahead of his pursuers, that their shot began to fall short. +They halted; for just then they perceived us on the hills, probably +supposing us enemies; and at the same moment a party of Indians, who lay +concealed in some brushwood below us, sprang upon them. Had the Indians +waited till the soldiers had advanced a little further, every man of the +latter might have been killed or captured. As it was, they had time to +turn their horses, and gallop off the way they had come, followed by a +shower of arrows, which killed one and wounded another of them. + +Manco, without stopping, made his horse breast the hill. He had got up +some way, when we saw the noble animal stagger and fall, and both horse +and rider lay motionless on the ground. Ned and I galloped down the +hill towards him; for Don Gomez had, in the moment before, thrown +himself from his horse, and was standing grasping Pedro's hand, and +looking earnestly in his face. We reached Manco. We found that his +horse was dead, and that he had received a severe wound in his side. +While we were stooping over him, the Indians came up, and, not knowing +who we were, were on the point of knocking us on the head with their +clubs, when he recovered his senses, and exclaimed that we were friends. +We were once more aroused to action by Pedro's voice; and lifting Manco +on my horse, which was fresh and strong, I rode up the hill, accompanied +by Ned, and followed by the Indians. + +"Fly, fly!" exclaimed Pedro. "I came to warn you of the danger you are +in. Look there, look there!" + +We looked in the direction he pointed; and I now perceived that while we +had been watching the flight and capture of the Inca, and Manco's +subsequent escape, which had occupied a considerable time, a strong body +of troops had crossed the ford higher up the river, and were advancing +rapidly along the path which led to the village where the wives of the +chiefs had been left. In a few hurried words, Pedro told me that on +hearing the firing, he had come out to see what was taking place, and +that, like ourselves, he had been watching the battle from another +height. To my deep regret, I found that, from the character of the +ground, the troops were already much nearer the village than we were, +and already occupied the only approach to it, so that the Indian women +must inevitably fall into their power. I endeavoured to conceal this +information from Manco; for, heart-broken and wounded as he was, I +thought it would kill him outright. Those only, however, for whom I +felt a personal interest, were Nita and her child; and I would have run +every risk to save them. We were at the time posted in a dip in the +hill, and while Ned and I bound up Manco's wound, I sent Pedro to a +height above us, to report the movements of the troops. In a short time +he gave notice that a party of them had been detached from the main +body, and were advancing in our direction. I concluded that as we +climbed the hill, followed by the Indians, we had been perceived, and +that, unless we were prepared to run the risk of falling into the hands +of the Spaniards, we must make our escape. Manco was sufficiently +recovered to sit on horseback, and I proposed giving him my horse and +following on foot. As we were about to move off, I recollected Don +Gomez's request. + +"He is at liberty to go," answered Manco. "Perhaps he may recollect how +he has been treated, and intercede for some of the unfortunate Indians +who have fallen into the hands of his countrymen." + +To my surprise, Don Gomez refused the offer. + +"I will remain some time longer with you, unless that, youth (pointing +to Pedro) may accompany me. I would ask him some further questions; for +his countenance has strangely agitated my mind." + +I had no opportunity of inquiring what he meant, when Pedro exclaimed +that he saw an Indian woman, with a child in her arms, on the ridge of +the hill, at some distance; and that the party of soldiers he had seen +detached from the main body, were evidently in pursuit of her. + +Manco hearing these words, seemed to surmise what had occurred, and, in +spite of his wound, throwing himself on my horse and calling on the +Indians to follow, he galloped along the rocky height. The eye of love +at once recognised the person of the fugitive. It was his own Nita. We +all hurried after him, and even Don Gomez seemed anxious for his +success. Ned, who was the only other person on horseback, and who, +though he rode like a seaman, always managed to make his steed cross +places few people would have ventured over, was soon by his side, and +together the two galloped on towards the Indian woman. + +"Hurra," shouted Ned, "Hurra! Mr Indian, hurra! We'll manage to +diddle the Dons." + +The Spanish soldiers had begun firing; but as they had at the same time +to climb the hill, and were at a considerable distance, their aim was +not good. Their bullets, notwithstanding, as we got nearer, came +whizzing by our heads; but still we pushed on. They were evidently, +however, gaining on the poor girl; and should she fall, or her strength +fail her, they would be up to her before her husband could arrive to her +rescue. I have often had to undergo moments of great excitement, but +never have I felt such intense anxiety as I did for Nita's rescue. On +galloped Manco and Ned. The soldiers saw them coming, and fired a +volley. I saw Manco reel for an instant, but still he sat his horse. +In another minute Ned had lifted Nita on his horse, and placed her +before him, and handing the child to Manco, the two returned at the same +rapid rate towards us. The Spaniards, disappointed of their prey, +halted, and fired again; and then seeing only a small body of Indians, +continued their advance. As we had nothing to gain by fighting, I +called out to Manco, as he came up, to order the Indians to retreat. We +managed to do so in very good order, and at so rapid a rate that we soon +distanced the Spaniards. They were, however, continuing the pursuit, +when the sound of a bugle from the main body called them back. Halting +as they heard it, they fired a parting volley after us. It was well +aimed; several of the Indians were struck, as was also the unfortunate +Don Gomez. I ran to his assistance; but he still sat his horse. + +"It is nothing," he said; "a mere flesh wound, which I shall soon +recover from." + +I beckoned Pedro, who went up to him and walked by his side. I was +afraid lest a sudden faintness should make him fall from his horse. + +"What do you propose doing?" I asked of Manco as soon as, having got +beyond range of the Spaniards' muskets, we came to a halt. + +"Proscribed and hunted, we must henceforth, like beasts of prey, seek +for safety in the caves and recesses of the mountains," he answered +gloomily. + +"You say well we must settle what is to be done. There is a cavern high +up the mountains some way from this, where some hundred men may take +shelter. Few know of it, and if any traitors were to lead the Spaniards +to it, they would find it cost them dear to attack us there. I will +show the way. On, on, my friends, on!" + +I saw that the chief was in no mood for conversation. That day all his +brightest hopes had faded away for ever. The liberty of Peru was lost; +his friends had been slaughtered round him; and his Inca was a prisoner +in the hands of his bitterest foes. We pushed on as fast as the rugged +nature of the country would allow us to move; crossing valleys and +streams, and climbing mountains, till we arrived at the foot of a lofty +and perfectly perpendicular precipice, along the foot of which we moved +for some distance. As I looked up, I saw that stones hurled from the +summit would completely have annihilated us. Almost at right angles +from the cliff arose another hill, up which we now began to climb. On +reaching the summit, we turned once more in the direction of the cliffs, +which we found were connected with the hill by a natural bridge of rock +thrown across a dark and frightful gorge. Ordering the horses to be +turned adrift on the hill, Manco, with his child in his arms, led the +way across the bridge, and along a narrow ledge, which now appeared as +if cut by natural labour in the side of the cliff. I kept close to him +to assist him if required; Ned followed, supporting Nita; Pedro, leading +Don Gomez, went next; and the Indians in single file after us. A couple +of hundred yards along a ledge, where a single false step would have +proved certain death, brought us to a hollow in the face of the rock, +entering which, we found ourselves in a cavern of very extensive +dimensions. + +The ground was perfectly level, and the roof dry; and from the +appearance I judged that art had been employed to render it habitable. +Near the mouth were several pieces of wood which served for torches; and +fire being produced by some of the Indians, the cavern was soon +sufficiently lit up to show us its extent. On one side, a fountain of +pure water spouted from the rock; on the other, a quantity of wood was +piled up; and in some oven-shaped buildings, I found was stored a +quantity of corn. + +It is impossible to conceive a place more impregnable by nature. The +summit of the cliffs, I afterwards found, was perfectly inaccessible; +while below they extended in a perpendicular wall to a depth of four +hundred feet at least. In front the valley widened out to a +considerable extent, the opposite cliff being also almost inaccessible, +so that the only possible approach was by the narrow ledge along which +we had come. Indeed it seemed capable of holding out against any +besiegers, as long as the provisions within might last. + +As soon as we entered, Ned placed Nita on the ground, and Manco, faint +with loss of blood, as well as with fatigue and agitation, sunk down by +her side. Taking the infant from him, she handed it to Ned, whose +honest countenance had won her confidence. She then placed her +husband's head in her lap, and bent over him in silence, expressing her +grief neither in tears nor cries. + +"Come, don't be cast down, Missus," said Ned, his kind heart moved by +her sorrow. "Better times may come, and your good man isn't going to +slip his cable, I hope. I say, mate, she don't understand my lingo," he +continued, turning to me; "just you tell her what I say. It'll cheer +her up a bit." + +I saw that words could bring no comfort to the poor creature, but that +our attention might be more effectually employed in binding up Manco's +wounds. Telling Ned this, we set to work in as scientific a way as we +were able. Some of the Indians brought us water, and Nita, when she saw +what we were about, aroused herself to help us. We had scarcely +finished the operation, when a cry from Pedro called us to the +assistance of Don Gomez, who had likewise fainted from the pain of his +wound and loss of blood. My attention had, indeed, been so completely +occupied with my Indian friend, that I had forgotten that the Spaniard +had been hurt. Pedro was kneeling by his side, and supporting him with +a look of interest and anxiety, which I at first was at a loss to +understand. + +"O come, my friend, come and help him, or he will die!" he exclaimed. + +Ned, who had seen many a gun-shot wound, and had often assisted the +surgeons to doctor his shipmates, examined the Spaniard's hurts. + +"It's a bad job, mate, I'm afraid," he observed, pointing to his side. +"The ball is in him somewhere, for there's the place it entered, and I +can find no hole where it could have got out again. I've been feeling +for it all round his back, but there's no sign of it. How he came on so +far as this without dropping, I don't know. It was his spirit kept him +up, I suppose." + +Finding that we could do nothing else to relieve the unfortunate Don +Gomez, we washed and bound up his wound, and then laid him on a bed of +some straw and skins, which we found in the cavern. The same care had +been taken of Manco. The Indians, meantime, had lighted a fire in the +mouth of the cavern, and were seated round it in moody silence, brooding +over their defeat and the death of many of their comrades and friends. +We found some brandy among the stores, and after Don Gomez had swallowed +a little of it, which we gave him with some water, he revived, and +beckoned Pedro to him. + +"You were telling me, as we came along, a strange tale of your life, +young man," he said, in a feeble voice. "It served to sustain me, when +otherwise I should have sunk with pain. Can I believe you?" + +"Indeed, Senor, I have only told the truth," replied Pedro. "I was +found by the Indians, when an infant, alone in a wood. My complexion +shows that I am Spanish; and see, the crucifix and chain which were +around my neck when I was discovered, I have ever since worn." + +"Merciful Providence, what do I behold?" exclaimed the wounded man, +starting up and gazing eagerly at the ornament Pedro exhibited. "It +is--it is! Come to my arms, my son, my son! I have found you, alas! +but to quit you too soon again." + +Pedro had thrown himself upon his father's neck, for such there could be +no doubt Don Gomez was. + +"Oh, do not say so, my father, whom I have so long sought. Do not say +that you must quit me!" he cried, in an agony of tears. + +"Alas! it is the climax of my destiny," answered the Spaniard. "I have +longed to discover you, and now that my wishes are fulfilled, death +claims me as his own. Such has been my fate through life. I cannot +even leave you the wealth I have amassed, for of that also I have been +deprived." + +"O do not think of that!" exclaimed Pedro. "It is sufficient for me to +know that you are my father; and do but recover and I will learn to work +for you and support you. Say that you will not die, and I shall be +happy." + +I need not further describe the scene. Pedro sat by his father's side, +and deep and earnest was their conversation. Ned and I left them alone +and joined the Indians at their fire, for we saw that we could render no +further assistance to our patients. The Indians had brought food with +them, and as there was a supply of maize and dried meat and cocoa in the +cavern, we had no reason to complain of hunger. + +Manco had given orders that one of the Indians should at all times be +stationed at the bridge I spoke of, leading to the ledge, to give notice +of danger; and they regularly relieved each other at the post, though +few would have ventured to cross that rocky ledge even in broad +daylight, much less at night, uncertain what reception they might meet +with at its termination. The night passed slowly, though I managed at +intervals, as did Ned, to obtain some sleep. I after a time got up and +stood at the mouth of the cave, looking up at the dark sky studded with +thousands of stars, and then glancing down into the obscure depths below +my feet. The air was perfectly still, and I fancied that I could hear +the roar of cannon and the rattle of musketry echoing among the +mountains. + +At length I perceived a ruddy glare extending over the sky. I thought +at first that it must be a sign of the rising sun, but, as I watched, it +grew brighter and brighter, but did not increase in extent, and then by +degrees it faded away before the genial glow of the coming day appeared. +I guessed, too truly, that it arose from the burning of the village, +which the Spaniards had attacked. I did not, however, inform my +companions, for I felt that I should only add to their grief by so +doing. The Indians continued sleeping till a late hour. They seemed to +have the power of thus steeping their misery in oblivion. A night's +rest had somewhat restored Manco, but he was evidently fretting at the +thought of the inactivity to which his wound would consign him. "But +what would you do if you were able to move about," I asked. "The Inca +is a prisoner, and will, I fear, suffer death, for you cannot hope to +rescue him." + +"The Inca never dies," he answered, lifting himself up on his arm, and +looking me earnestly in the face. "The young Andres is still in arms in +the south, and may yet be victorious. Should the Spaniards add a deeper +dye to the crimes they have committed, by the destruction of the Inca, +he will succeed; and should he too be cut off, I and that infant +sleeping by my side must succeed to the title. Little did the Spanish +soldiers dream whom they were yesterday pursuing, when Nita fled from +them with our babe in her arms." + +Hope still I saw supported my friend, and I would not deprive him of it, +little as I entertained it myself. Don Gomez had not improved. He was +feverish and weak, and I fancied that I saw death on his countenance; +but he was happy at having his son by his side, and I was unwilling to +warn Pedro of his danger. Several days passed away without the +appearance of an enemy in the neighbourhood; and at length the Indians +began to grow uneasy at confinement. We also were anxious to obtain +information as to the state of affairs. It was just possible that, as +Manco hoped, the Spaniards might have been driven back. And that we +were shutting ourselves up for no object. The difficulty was to decide +who was the most proper person to go in search of information. An +Indian would, to a certainty, have been kept prisoner and publicly +executed; Pedro could not leave his father; and when I proposed going, +Ned declared that I should be either recognised as having escaped from +prison, or treated as a spy. + +"For my part I don't mind going myself," he observed. "I've no fancy +for being cooped up here any longer; and if I'm asked any questions, all +I shall say is, that I've got away from the Injuns, and want to get back +to my own country." + +Very unwillingly I at last yielded to all the arguments he used to let +him go instead of me. I was also afraid that it might have been +suspected that he had assisted us to escape from prison; but he +overruled that objection by saying that it was a very long time ago, and +that it was not likely any of those who had seen him should be at Cuzco, +or remember the circumstance. To prevent the risk of his falling into +the hands of any Indians, Manco ordered one of those with us to +accompany him to the neighbourhood of the capital, where he was to be +hid till his return, and then to bring him back safe. It was with a +heavy heart that I saw Ned set out. Still I was very anxious to +commence our journey eastward, and without knowing the state of affairs, +I could not quit my friend Manco, nor could we venture to move Don Gomez +into the city. I watched Ned as he passed under the cliff, and saw him +wave his hat as a sign that he, at all events, feared none of the +dangers of his expedition. + +Meantime the Indians ventured out a short distance across the mountains +to hunt for game. Several of them were always stationed on the +surrounding pinnacles of rocks, whence they could watch for the approach +of danger. Now and then they killed with their arrows a _tarush_, an +active and timid little roe which frequents the higher forests which +skirt the Andes. At night they used to set snares made of horse hair, +at the mouths of holes inhabited by little animals like rabbits. These +were called _viscachas_ and _chinchillas_. The skin of the latter +supplies the beautiful fur so much prized in Europe. Their colour and +form resembles the rabbit, but they have shorter ears and long, rough +tails. As, however, we had an abundant supply of _charqui_, which is +the name given to dried beef in the Andes, we were not dependent on the +success of our huntsmen for food. Pedro employed all his time in +reading to and conversing with his father; and I observed that a very +satisfactory change had taken place with regard to his state of mind. +He had now learned to bow to the decrees of Providence without repining, +and to acknowledge that whatever the great Ruler of the universe orders, +is for the good of His creatures. The event I had foreseen was fast +approaching. Every day Don Gomez had grown weaker and weaker, and he +could no longer raise himself on his bed of straw. One evening he +called Manco and me to his side after he had made Pedro aware that his +speedy death was inevitable. "You have both been friends of my son," he +said. "Most deeply do I thank you, though I have no means of showing my +gratitude; indeed, I must call on you still further to befriend him. I +found him poor, and may leave him so, unless the power of Spain is +re-established in Peru. In either case, you can serve him. In the one, +still support and protect him; and in the other, witness that I have +acknowledged him as my son, and enable him to regain the property which +was mine. There is a certain Father Manuel in Cuzco, who knows my +signature, and is cognisant of all the particulars of my history. Let +him see the papers I have left, should he have escaped the death which +has overtaken so many of my countrymen, and he will assist him to the +utmost of his means in his object. May Heaven help him to obtain what +by right is his!" + +We promised the dying man to obey his wishes to the best of our ability, +though, as we could not venture to present ourselves in any city of Peru +as witnesses, I had very little expectation that Pedro would ever +recover his property. That night Don Gomez breathed his last. I will +not speak of the bitter anguish poor Pedro suffered, at the death of a +parent so lately found and so soon lost. The Indians made a grave in a +green mound on the neighbouring mountain; and there we buried the +unfortunate man. + +Several days more passed away; and at last one of our scouts came +hurrying in, to give notice that he had seen some persons approaching +along the valley, in the far distance. On the edge of the ledge, and at +the mouth of the cavern, stones had been piled up, to hurl down on the +heads of any who might appear in the guise of enemies. I looked eagerly +out, for I hoped they might prove to be Ned and his guide; for I had +begun to be very anxious for my friend's safety. As the persons drew +near, to my great satisfaction, I recognised Ned and his guide. They +appeared footsore and weary, and came on very slowly. I went out to +meet him at the bridge. + +"I can't say a word, mate, till I've had some food and rest," he +answered. "And this poor fellow here, he's worse off than I am." + +After Ned and the Indian had eaten, they lay down to sleep, and it was +four hours before the former awoke and gave me an account of his +adventures, which I translated to Manco and Pedro. + +"Well, mates," he began, "I'm glad to get back with a whole skin on my +body; and never may I have to see again the sights I've witnessed since +I've left this place. The sooner, for my part, we get out of the +country, the better. It was all very well when we had to climb up and +down the mountains; I didn't mind that; but as soon as we got down into +the plains, we couldn't go a hundred yards without meeting with the dead +bodies of our fellow-creatures--Red-skin or White-skin, it's all the +same to me. I can't bear to see men, women, and young children murdered +like sheep and lambs. The Spaniards had cleared out and burnt every +Indian village on the road. We had to pass near the place where the +battle was fought, and there were thousands and thousands of bodies of +Indians. The birds and beasts of prey could scarcely consume them. At +last we got near the city, and my Red-skin mate there stowed himself +away under a rock in a thick wood; and taking the bearings of the place, +I went on by myself. I met no one till I got to the walls, for the Dons +still kept inside, afraid of the Injuns, though they'd killed so many of +them. When the guards at the gates asked me what I wanted, I said I'd +come from the mountains, where I'd been hiding away during the row, and +that I was looking out for a night's rest in a civilised place, before I +set out back to my own country; which was true enough, you know. They +then took me to the governor of the city, and he questioned me right and +left; but I stuck to my story. So when he found he could get nothing +out of me, he let me go, telling me to come and see him in a couple of +days or so. I found there were to be great doings the next day, and +what do you think they were? Why, these Christians were going to burn +the Inca and his whole family, because they tried to get back their +rights. It wasn't a sight I wished to see, you may depend on it; but I +couldn't help myself. Well, in the morning there was a large crowd in +the great square; and in the middle there was a quantity of stakes and +wood piled up, and near them a high platform. Presently a number of +Indian people were brought out of the prison--men, women, and children-- +and were marched up to the stakes, and bound to them with cords. Last +of all came a man, whom I soon saw was the Inca, for he was dressed as +he was on the day of the battle, and looked a real king, every inch of +him. They made him stand up on the platform, and look down on what was +going on below. + +"They first shot all the children, and then they set fire to the wood, +and burnt the women, and then the men; and, would you believe it, among +them was the wife of the Inca, and his children, and his brothers, and +nephews and nieces. He didn't utter a cry or a groan, but kept looking +on as if his eyes would start out of his head; but they, poor creatures, +shrieked out for mercy from men who hadn't got any in their natures. + +"When the rest were dead, they put some faggots under the platform, and +burnt the brave fellow where he stood. The people shouted and rejoiced +as if they had done something to be proud of. I couldn't stand it any +longer, so I hurried away from the place; for I heard that all the +Indian prisoners in the city were next to be shot, and that there were +some hundreds of them. I got into talk with a number of people. From +some I heard one thing, and from some another; but what I made out was, +that young Andres, the Inca's son, with several other chiefs, were still +in arms in the south; but that the Spaniards had sent for troops from +all parts of America; and that, by fair means or foul, they were +resolved to destroy every Indian, till the war was finished. When I +found that I could learn nothing more, I waited till night, and climbed +over the walls. I then ran on as fast as my legs could carry me, till I +got back to the wood, where I found my guide. Thinking I might be +pursued, as I have no doubt I was, we made a very roundabout course, and +kept a bright look-out for enemies on every side. We managed to keep +clear of them, however, but were very hard up for food; and I'm not +sorry, let me tell you, mate, to find myself safe back again here." + +Such was the substance of Ned's account. Prepared, as in a great degree +Manco had been, he was dreadfully affected by it, and for some time +could come to no resolution what course to take. Had he been alone, he +would at once have decided to join Andres, and endeavour still to make +head against the Spaniards; but Nita and his child were in the other +scale. At last he announced his resolution of quitting that part of +Peru, and taking refuge far beyond the borders of civilisation among +some of the wild tribes of the interior, in regions where the foot of +the white man had not yet penetrated. + +"There I will remain," he said, "till a more favourable opportunity +occurs for rescuing my country from the oppression of the stranger. Be +assured that time will come. My boy may have grown to manhood, and my +hair may have turned grey, or we may both have passed away; but Spain +cannot for ever keep her iron yoke on the necks of our people. In the +meantime we shall have collected arms, and have learned the art of war +from our conquerors; and avoiding the errors which have now overcome us, +we shall be able to cope with them successfully." + +He promised, moreover, to accompany us till we should be fairly embarked +on the great river of the south. I then asked Pedro what he proposed +doing. + +"I will go with you, my friend," he answered at once. "I have no hopes +of obtaining my father's property, and I cannot quit you; I will share +your dangers, and accompany you to your native land." + +I rather doubted whether it would not be wiser for him to try and reach +Cuzco, and put himself in communication with the Father Manuel, to whom +his father had referred him; but he adhered to his resolution of +accompanying me. + +"I have no friends among my countrymen; I care not for wealth; and I +long to obtain that knowledge which here I cannot hope to find. I wish +also to see the world, and more than all, David, I would not be parted +from you." + +So it was arranged; and Manco having sent out the Indians as scouts in +all directions to ascertain whether any Spaniards were in the +neighbourhood, we made instant preparations for our departure. + + + +CHAPTER NINETEEN. + +OUR WONDERFUL ADVENTURES AND ESCAPES. + +During our long stay in the cave, my mind often turned to the future, +and I was sorely puzzled to know by what means, without funds of any +sort, we should find our way to England. Ned, as a sailor, would have +no difficulty; but Pedro and I, from our ignorance of nautical affairs, +would be totally unable to work our way. One day Manco asked me what I +was thinking about. I told him. + +"Let not that distress you, my friend," he answered. "If gold could +restore happiness to our country, I could fill this cavern with it. I +will show you where you may supply yourself with all you can require; +you will spend it well, and therefore I do not hesitate to confide to +you the secret of our hidden wealth." + +Two nights after this, as I was about to throw myself on my bed of +leaves to sleep, Manco came to me. + +"We will at once set forth to obtain the gold I promised," he said. +"Pedro and your countryman may accompany us to carry what we find. We +must return before the morning, lest we encounter any of the Spanish +forces, who are ravaging the country on every side." + +A few words served to let Pedro and Ned understand what was to be done, +and providing themselves with two bags, they instantly declared +themselves ready to proceed. Manco had provided torches, one of which +we each of us bore; but he told us not to light them till we should +reach the spot to which he was about to conduct us. As we were setting +out, he also distributed among us two spades and crowbars, and a +pickaxe. He led the way along the ledge and across the bridge; we +following in silence. He then descended the mountain, and proceeded +down the valley for some distance, when he once more began to ascend. +The ground was rugged and difficult in the extreme, and path there was +none, so that, had we desired it, we could not again have found our way. +For two hours we toiled on, up and down hill, following close upon the +heels of Manco, who seemed to know the road by instinct. At length we +reached a valley, the hill on one side of which was covered completely +with buildings, one rising above the other, and some apparently hewn out +of the solid rock. The moon, which had lately risen, lighted up the +scene, and increased its wild and mysterious appearance. Not a sound +was heard, not a human being appeared from this city of the dead. Manco +stopped and gazed up at the city. + +"Two centuries ago, thousands of human beings, full of life and +activity, thronged those walls," he remarked. "All are gone, and of +descendants they have left none. All, all have been victims to Spanish +cruelty. Follow me." + +He moved on, and led us into several. Some had two and even three +stories, and the floors of slabs of stone or slate still remained. We +at last reached a house larger than the rest, with a number of windows. +Manco stopped in the centre of the chief hall, and said, stamping his +foot, "Dig there." Lighting our torches, we stuck them in the ground, +and set to work. After digging about two feet, we came to a mass which +proved to be the body of a human being, swaddled up in bandages of +cloth, and in good preservation. It was in a sitting posture, with the +knees drawn up to the chin. Placing it on one side, we dug on. +Clearing away another stratum of earth, we reached a collection of +household utensils, which at first I thought were of copper and clay; +but as Ned was examining them, he exclaimed-- + +"They are gold, every one of them!" + +"Dig, dig," said Manco; "you have more to find." A third layer of earth +was now removed, and we came upon a number of idols, all of gold or +silver, and surrounding them a quantity of bars of pure gold. None of +us had ever seen so much wealth in one mass. "There, take what you can +carry, and cover up the rest," exclaimed Manco. "You call that wealth," +he continued, as if divining our thoughts; "yet of what use is it to +mankind thus locked up from sight? Now hasten, or daylight will +surprise us before we can reach the cave." + +Following his direction, we loaded ourselves with as much of the pure +gold as we could carry; and then replacing the body as we found it, we +again covered up the grave. Then extinguishing our torches, we set out +to return to our cavern, which we reached in safety. It was with very +great satisfaction that I bade adieu to the cavern which had for so long +a time been our home. We had three horses, on one of which Nita was +mounted, and the other two were loaded with a supply of provisions; each +of the Indians, besides, carrying enough for his own wants, till a part +of the country should be reached where more could be procured. Manco +took every precaution for our safety which prudence could suggest. He +sent the Indians on ahead as scouts to inspect the country before we +advanced, and to bring us timely notice of the approach of an enemy. At +that time it was difficult to know who were friends and who were not, +for many of the Indians had gone over to the Spaniards, in the hopes of +saving their lives and property; and others, still worse, we had too +good reason to know, were ready to act the part of traitors, and to +deliver up their countrymen for the sake of the reward they expected to +receive. + +We proceeded for some way along a series of wooded ridges, called by the +Spaniards _Ceja de la Montana_ (the Mists of the Mountains), on account +of the thick mists which, rising from the rivers in the valleys below, +are attracted by the trees, and hang over them in dense clouds. In +summer these mists are absorbed by the sun's rays; but in winter they +discharge themselves in endless torrents of rain. At night we took up +our abode in some deserted hut; but never, if we could avoid it, did we +rest in the abode of man, and whenever we did, Manco kept three or four +of our allies watching at a distance outside; and we always again +started at early dawn. As we reached the extreme eastern edge of the +_Ceja_, we looked down on an interminable extent of forest, composed of +trees of a height with which few in other parts of the world can vie. +These wooded plains are called Montanas, which is the name given to the +whole of the country eastward of the Andes. + +As we advanced, our ears were saluted by the cries of numerous birds and +animals. Sometimes I thought I heard the roaring of a bull at a +distance, when I found it to proceed from the black ox-bird; and at +others the grunting of a hog sounded close to us; and a beautiful bird +called the _Tunqui_, like a cock with a tuft of red feathers, and an +orange bill, started up and astonished us with the contrast between his +gruff note and gay plumage. In the evenings, groups of the +pheasant-like _Hachahuallpa_ summoned their distant companions with the +cry of _Ven aca, ven aca_--Come here, come here; and owls and bats flew +out with noiseless wings to pounce on their unwary prey. Bears and +ounces, pumas and tiger-cats crossed our path; and stags started from +their thickets, where they had sought shelter from some of those +above-named enemies. Monkeys chattered at us, and squirrels leaped +among the trees; rats and mice were found in the huts, and _argutis_ in +the maize-fields; snakes crawled along the ground, and birds of prey +circled high above our heads. But in truth it would be impossible to +describe one-tenth of the beasts, the birds, and reptiles we encountered +in our journey; though I shall mention those I had opportunities of +examining. + +We approached one evening the farm of a cacique, who, with most of the +men of his village, had marched to join the army of Tupac Amaru. The +women only, and some of the old men and children, remained. It was on +the extreme borders of the country inhabited by Christian Indians. +Beyond all was totally unknown to the white men, and but seldom visited +by the civilised natives. + +Manco sent on a messenger to give notice of our approach, and to crave +the hospitality of the cacique and his family. He returned shortly, +saying that the females only were at home, and that as yet they had +received no account of the result of the expedition; but that they bade +the strangers welcome. + +"Alas!" said Manco, "we are, I fear, the bearers of evil tidings. Had +the cacique escaped, he would have returned ere this." + +We proceeded on, and in a space cleared of trees, we found a collection +of low buildings. The walls were constructed of reeds, the interstices +being filled up with loam; and the roofs were covered with palm leaves. +On one side of the house was a coffee plantation, and on the other some +fields of maize, with fruit-trees growing round them. At a little +distance, on some marshy ground, was a field of sugar-canes; and by the +side of a brook a row of the useful banana. The poor woman came out to +receive us as we approached. Her first inquiries were for her husband. +Manco had seen him and all his people cut to pieces. She did not faint +or shriek out, but retired into an inner room, sat herself down on the +ground, surrounded by her women, and groaned bitterly all the night +long. We did not see her again; but after a time one of her females +came out and set food before us. Our Indian companions found shelter in +some of the huts of the village; and one belonging to the farm was given +up to Ned, Pedro, and me. We had Indian corn bread, and cakes made of +the juice of the sugar-cane, called _chancacas_; potatoes, bananas, +oranges, and pine-apples, and several varieties of dried meat; with a +liquor also made from the sugar-cane, called _guarapo_: indeed we had no +cause to complain of any want of provisions. As we were safe here from +all risk of pursuit, Manco proposed to remain for some days, that we +might recruit our strength before prosecuting our journey. + +The cacique had been accustomed to increase his wealth by buying from +the wilder tribes the celebrated Peruvian bark. In the month of May, a +number of Indians set out together, some of whom, of greatest +experience, who are called _cateadores_, or searchers, climb the highest +trees to spy out the _manchas_, or spots where the _chinchona_ groups +are growing, distinguishing them merely by a slight difference in the +tints from the dark-green of the surrounding foliage. When the +_cateador_ has discovered a group, he leads his companions to it with +wonderful precision through the almost impenetrable forest; a hut is +built, the trees are felled, and incisions are made in the bark, and +after a few days, as it dries, it is stripped off and placed in the huts +to dry still more. It is then packed in bundles, and sent to market. + +A party of Indians came one day to the village, on their way across the +Andes, from the more distant forests to the east, laden with balsams and +odoriferous gums, which they had collected from a variety of resinous +plants. They were ignorant that the war had broken out, and when they +heard of it, they were unwilling to venture further, and returned, to +their own country. The men who carried the loads had on merely a piece +of cloth round the waist; but the women who accompanied them wore a +loose tunic without sleeves. Their legs were bare, but painted with the +juice of the huito, which made it appear that they had on half-boots. +The object was to protect their legs from the stings of insects. I +found that they professed Christianity. They were regular medical +pedlars; for they had powders, salves, plasters, seeds, and roots of +every description; claws of the tapir, as a remedy against the +falling-sickness; and the teeth of poisonous snakes, carefully stuck +into rushes, as specifics against head-ache and blindness. Manco had +purchased a sufficient number of horses to mount all our party, and to +carry such provisions as we required; though, from the abundance of game +to be procured in the forests, we had no fear of being in want of fresh +meat. Still, however, as there was no notice of the approach of the +Spaniards, he thought it better to remain a few clays longer, to recruit +our strength, before we recommenced our journey. Three of the Indians +only had remained with us, the rest having departed to their homes in +the south. Pedro, Ned, and I employed our time in wandering about the +neighbouring country, under the guidance of one of the Indians; but we +were charged by Manco not to go far from the village. + +I can scarcely venture to describe the magnificence of the vegetation of +that region. There were numerous ferns and nettles growing in the form +of large shrubs; wonderful bignonias and gigantic orchids drawing their +nourishment from the air; with every variety of climbing plants, +throwing their thousand tendrils round the trees which gave them +support. I could not but admire the various forms of the stately palm, +the thickly-leaved balsam-yielding leguminosae, the luxuriant laurels, +and the solaneae, with their numberless flowers of vast size. Further +on, again, on the flat lands towards the east, the mighty trees rise to +an immense height from the humid soil, without a flowering plant or +shrub below their branches, forming a canopy almost impervious to the +light of day. + +One day we had gone farther than usual from home, when we reached a +narrow lagune, overspread by the boughs of the gigantic trees which grew +on either side of it. The air and earth were teeming with animal life. +Birds of beautiful plumage, and every variety of note, were perched on +the branches, or flying above our heads; butterflies of many hues were +flitting about in all directions; and reptiles and insects innumerable +were crawling along the ground. More beautiful than all were the +humming-birds, which, like flashes of coloured light, appeared and +disappeared as they flew by us; and surpassing his brethren in +gorgeousness of hues, was the golden-tailed humming or fly bird, numbers +of which haunted every glade we passed. From many of the shady branches +hung nests built by the pouched starlings, four or five feet long, and +swinging to and fro with every breath of wind. Flocks of green parrots +were chattering on the higher boughs, and preparing to seek their +night--quarters in the higher parts. Our guide called them _jornaleros_ +(day-labourers), and told me that the name was given them because, on +the return of every day, they come back at the same hour from the +mountains, where they sleep, to gather their food in the lower forests. +I had shot several birds, and was aiming at one, when he seized my arm, +and implored me not to fire. + +"Do you not hear its note, Senor?" he exclaimed. "If you were to kill +that bird, Heaven would afflict you with some dreadful disaster. +Listen: does it not say, _Dios te de_ (May God give it thee)?" + +The bird, as he rested on a branch before me, threw back his head and +rocked his body, and certainly uttered a note which might easily be thus +translated. + +I had got close to the lagune, and was watching a bird which, with +fluttering wings, was hovering in the air a short distance from me, when +our guide forcibly drew me back, whispering, with a look of terror, "Did +you not see the _Yacumaman_? Would you venture within the mighty coils +of the Mother of Waters?" + +At first I did not know what he could mean, till, creeping back, I saw +what I had at first taken for the root of a tree, but which I now +perceived to be an enormous serpent. Its body was wound in several huge +coils round the stem of a decayed tree, while it bathed its tail in the +waters of the lagune. Its head was now thrust forward, as with +glittering eyes it watched an opening in the forest. Presently a slight +rustling was heard, and a beautiful stag came to quench its thirst after +the heat of the day. It came up fearlessly, and dipped its head to +drink. Again it lifted it up, and looked around. On a sudden it caught +sight of those beautiful eyes. Instantly its limbs began to tremble. +It seemed to have no power to fly, but stood looking with mute wonder at +the object which fascinated it. The monster uncoiled itself, and glided +from the tree. Still the stag did not attempt to fly, yet in fleetness +it could have outstripped the wind. There it stood, a willing victim. +In another moment the serpent had sprung upon it, and encircled it in +its monstrous folds. As we could not rescue the stag, and had no wish +to interfere with the serpent, we hurried from the spot. We were +already later than it was wise to remain from the village, but we could +not help stopping to listen to the delicious notes of a cinnamon-brown +bird, with head and neck of dark olive, which was perched on a bough +overhanging our path. Never from a feathered songster had I heard notes +more sweet or harmonious. + +"It is the _organista_," said our guide. "Hurry on, Senores, hurry on, +his note forebodes a coming storm; and, from the glimpses I have caught +of the sky between the trees, I fear that we shall have one before we +reach the village." + +We took the Indian's advice, for a storm in that wooded region was an +event to be avoided, and walked as fast as we could over the soft ground +towards home. We had not got far, when a cry from Pedro, who was a +little in our rear, made us stop. As we hurried back to him, we saw +that he was limping along as if in great pain, and trying to overtake +us; and at the same time I observed a snake winding its way along among +the trees at a rapid rate from us. It was about two feet long, and +covered with the most brilliant stripes of deep red, yellow, and black. +The Indian caught sight of the reptile at the same time. + +"Ah! mercy, Heaven, mercy!" cried poor Pedro. "I have been bitten by +that deadly snake, and in a few minutes must die. Farewell, my friends, +farewell!" + +"Courage, Senor, courage!" exclaimed the Indian; "I have some huaco cake +with me. Eat, eat, and you may yet live." + +Saying this, he produced from his pocket some cake of the huaco leaves, +a piece of which he put into Pedro's mouth, and spreading some more on +the wound, pressed it with all his force.--A litter was soon formed, on +which we placed him and carried him along, for the pain was too great to +allow him to walk. After a time, however, he declared that the pain was +gone, but that he felt as if his leg was made of lead. We hurried on, +for we had no time to lose. Thunder was heard rolling through the sky; +and distant flashes, seen through the trees, showed that the storm was +approaching. Suddenly a tremendous crash was heard close to us; and, +looking back, a tall tree, one of the giants of the forest, appeared +riven from the crown to its roots, and a vast branch lay across the path +we had just passed. Nothing now was required to expedite our steps. +The wind roared, the mighty trees rocked to and fro as if they had been +reeds, the thunder rattled in deafening peals, and the lightning, in +zigzag form, rushed down the stems of the trees, running like serpents +along the ground, and flashed vividly in every direction. The storm I +had witnessed in the Cordilleras was grander, but it was scarcely so +terrific in its effects. We got under shelter in the cottage before the +tempest had reached its height. Pedro was instantly placed in bed, +when, after a time, a profuse perspiration came on. Some cooling drink +was given to her, and a pumpkin poultice was applied to the wound. + +The huaco plant grows in the woods. The leaves am half an inch long and +half an inch broad, of a solid texture, the upper surface being of a +dark-green, with purple veins running through it. The stem is slender, +hard, ribbed, and of a bluish colour; and the leaves grow singly, two +being placed opposite to each other. It is said that the natives +discovered its qualities by observing that a bird called the huaco, +which feeds on snakes, whenever it was bitten flew off and ate some of +this plant. I have heard that the harmless snakes are great enemies to +the poisonous ones, and will attack those much larger than themselves. + +It took two or three days before Pedro had completely recovered from the +effects of the bite. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY. + +SPANIARDS PURSUE US--ATTACKED BY WILD INDIANS. + +"Up, up, my friends!" exclaimed Manco, rushing into our hut one morning, +just before daybreak. "The Spaniards are traversing the mountains with +fire and sword, and we must haste away from this." + +We all instantly sprung to our feet, and without exchanging many words, +packed up our goods. By the time we were ready, the horses were caught +and saddled, and we were soon mounted and ready to proceed. Our party +consisted of Ned, Pedro, and I; Manco, Nita, and their child; and three +Indians, of a tribe with whom the latter were going to take up their +residence. We had, besides, two other horses laden with clothing and +provisions. Bidding adieu to our unhappy hostess and the villagers, our +cavalcade was put in motion, and we plunged into the interminable +forest. Without the assistance of our Indian guides, we could not +possibly have found our way among the gigantic trees which shot up like +tall masts from the level soil, often branchless till near the summit, +where their boughs intertwined, and formed a canopy which the rays of +the sun could scarcely penetrate. + +"On, on, my friends!" cried Manco; "the enemy may be on us before we are +aware of their approach. They have traitors with them, and will +certainly despatch a force to search us out." + +This was sufficient to make us urge our horses to their utmost speed; +and all day we rode on, halting only now and then for a very short time, +to rest our animals or to take food. At night we encamped in the +forest. For our shelter we cut a number of canes which grew near a +stream, and with them formed some huts, which we thatched with palm +leaves. We had supplied ourselves with grass hammocks and Indian +mosquito curtains, and by hanging them up in our huts we obtained very +comfortable quarters. We frequently had streams to pass, which feed the +great arteries running into the Amazon. They were in most instances too +deep to be forded, so we had to wait till we could construct rafts to +convey ourselves and our luggage, our horses swimming alongside. We +took care to make a great noise to keep the caymans at a distance, lest +any of them should think fit to grab at our animals' legs. We had the +satisfaction of feeling sure that, should we be pursued, our enemies +would take much longer time to cross than we did. Still, however, we +pushed on as fast as the nature of the ground would allow. We were now +approaching the river Ucayali, at a spot not far from the banks of which +Manco intended to make his abode. He might, of course, have found +numberless places among the Andes, where the Spaniards could not have +discovered him; but so many of his brother chieftains had already been +betrayed by their own countrymen, that he had resolved to remove himself +far beyond the reach of treachery, among savages who, if they had not +the virtues, were free from the vices of civilisation, and were too +independent to be tempted by a bribe to deliver him into the hands of +his enemies. + +Though in general the country was level, here and there mountains and +rocky ledges crossed our path, the far-stretching spurs of the Andes. +We found the country very thinly populated, though we occasionally fell +in with small parties on their hunting expeditions. The first infidel +Indians we met somewhat raised our curiosity. They were short in +stature, and had swarthy complexions and long black hair, without any +beard on their chins. They wore a long frock without sleeves, and when +we first saw them we took them for women. They were armed with bows and +arrows. They had never seen any white men before, and were at first +very much frightened and inclined to run away; but our Indians, who +spoke their language, that of the Panos, assured them that we would not +injure them, and they became very communicative. When they heard where +we were going, they entreated us not to proceed, assuring us that we +should encounter numbers of cannibal Cashibos, who would to a certainty +kill and eat us. + +"Tell them that we fear not the Cashibos nor any other wild men," said +Manco. "If they molest us, we will treat them as the beasts of the +forest, though we would willingly pass them peaceably." + +As we rode along after we had parted from our little friends, I asked +Manco who were the dreaded Cashibos; and he told me that they were the +most savage and warlike of all the wild tribes in the Pampa del +Sacramento, between the rivers Ucayali and Hualtaga. "We must be on our +guard against them, for they are equally cunning as fierce, and I truly +believe that they really do eat those they can take prisoners." + +Our own Indians were evidently very much afraid of these Cashibos, and +kept a much more watchful guard than heretofore, both as we rode along +and after we encamped for the night. Several days after this we were +approaching that part of the Ucayali, where we proposed to embark. I +longed to reach it almost as much as did Ned. "Ah, mate," he exclaimed, +when I told him that we had little more than one day's journey more on +horseback to perform; "let us once get our craft built and afloat, and +we may snap our fingers at the Cashibos, and any other enemies to boot." + +It was necessary, before embarking, to lay in a supply of provision, +that we might not be impeded in our passage down the river; and as our +Indians observed signs of an abundance of game, we halted much earlier +than usual to hunt. Ned remained with Pedro and Nita to build the huts +and look after the horses; while Manco and I, with our three Indians, +set out for the chase. At some distance off, between us and the river, +was a lofty, rocky hill, which served as our land-mark; and by taking +the bearings of it with two other heights still farther off, I hoped to +be able easily to find my way back to the camp. Manco and I had the +rifles, the Indians their bows and arrows. While wandering among the +trees, which were here more than usually interspersed with shrubs and +creepers, I very soon got separated from my companions. This did not +alarm me, as I was certain that I could without difficulty find my way +back to the encampment. I soon fell in with a pathway, which I +recognised as one formed by the peccary or wild hog, which traverses the +forests in droves consisting of two or three hundred. I stopped and +listened, for I thought I heard a grunting sound, which showed that some +were not far off. I was not mistaken, for the noise increased in +loudness, and I satisfied myself of the direction from which it was +coming. Hiding behind a tree, I stood ready to fire, in the hopes of +killing one of the leaders, and having time to load and take a second +shot before the herd passed by. As soon as they appeared along the +path, I singled out one and let fly; but my aim was not steady, and I +only wounded the beast. At the same time I had, I suppose, exposed +myself to view; for the whole herd, led by their wounded companion, came +rushing towards me with furious grunts of rage, evidently with the +intention of destroying me. To hope to escape by flight was out of the +question, for they would soon have overtaken me. Fortunately I had +observed a tree, with branches which I could reach; and retreating to +it, I had climbed up a few feet from the ground before the furious herd +reached me. When they found themselves disappointed of their prey, they +dashed their snouts into the ground round the tree as if they would tear +it up by the roots, and thus get at me. They worked so perseveringly, +that at first I had some little apprehension that they would succeed, +and I began to consider how, if the tree fell, I should manage to escape +my assailants. On climbing higher, I saw that the boughs of the tree I +was on interlaced with another, and that I might, by catching hold of +the latter, save myself, should the peccaries succeed in their attempts. +The peccaries grunted and dug away below, and I climbed up higher and +higher. At last I reached a branch on which I could conveniently sit +and load my gun. "Stop," I thought to myself; "before I take more +trouble, I may as well shoot some of these gentlemen. They cannot carry +off their dead, and when they go away, as I suppose they will do some +time or other, they will leave them behind for me." + +The execution followed the thought. I tumbled one of my enemies over, +and his companions finding that he was dead, set off to escape from a +similar fate. I had, however, time to load and fire again, and killed +another hog. As the one I had at the first wounded was by this time +dead, to my great satisfaction, the herd scampered off, leaving three of +their number behind. I fired a fourth time, but missed, and then +descended from the tree. How to get the peccaries to the camp was now +my puzzle, for one of them was rather too heavy a load for me to carry, +and I had no knife with me to cut them up. If I left them where they +were, in all probability they would be eaten up by some beasts or birds +of prey before I could return to them. To save them from the former, it +occurred to me that I might hang them up on the branches of the tree +which had enabled me to escape from becoming their food, instead of +their becoming mine. + +There were a variety of creepers, out of which I could form ropes; and +selecting some of the toughest and most pliant, I secured them to the +peccaries, which I dragged under the tree. Having, with no little +satisfaction, hoisted up my spoils, I set out to return to the camp. On +my way I stopped to look at a tree which seemed to bear a great variety +of leaves. On examination, I discovered it to be a _mora_, round the +stem of which climbed a number of creepers. On the summit grew a +fig-tree, fully as large as a common English apple-tree; and from its +branches again hung pendant a number of vines, both fig-tree and vines +bearing a quantity of fruit; but the parent _mora_, from the undue +exhaustion of its sap, was already giving signs of decay, and in a short +time both fig-tree and vine, I saw, would inevitably follow its fate. A +little farther on, a couple of sloths were making their progress through +the woods. I watched them passing from one tree to the other, as the +branches met, stirred by the breeze; and having hitherto seen them +hanging lazily by their claws to boughs, I was surprised at the rapidity +of their movements. I have often heard people assert that the sloth +spends his torpid existence in a perpetual state of pain, from the +peculiar sighing noise he makes, and the slowness of his movements when +placed on the ground. In the first place, I cannot believe that God has +created any animal to pass an existence of pain. The fact is, that the +sloth is formed to live in trees, to climb, and to feed on leaves, and +not to walk on the ground. Though he cannot be called a frisky animal, +he certainly does not deserve the name given to him, as, when he +chooses, he can move, as I now had proof, at a great rate. Dogs bark, +donkeys bray, and cocks crow, and the sloth sighs, when he wishes to +speak; while, from his long arms and short legs, with his sharp claws, +he by nature is intended either to be climbing, or, if asleep, hanging, +with his back perpendicular to the ground. I shot one of my friends, +and hanging him over my shoulder, carried him towards the camp. +Scarcely had I resumed my walk, when I saw a large grasshopper, as I +thought, playing about a bush, and on the point of settling. As I was +passing near it, I was about to put out my hand to catch it, to examine +it more minutely, when, just in time, I sprang back; for there I beheld, +to my horror, the head and crest of an enormous rattlesnake. In another +instant I should have been his victim. I did not stop to see what way +he went, but hurried on as fast as my legs would carry me. I listened, +as I advanced, to the notes of the various birds which filled the +forest, and sometimes to the cries of beasts; and I fancied that I heard +others answering them from a distance. + +By some means or other I missed the path I intended to follow, and found +myself in a thick mass of trees. In trying to get out of it, I entirely +lost the line I was pursuing; and at length finding a tree I could +climb, I mounted to the top of it, to look out for my land-mark. While +I sat on a bough, concealed by the thick foliage, I found that I had a +view of an open space at some little distance off, a mass of low trees +only intervening. I was about to descend, when my eye caught sight of a +figure moving through the glade. Presently another, and then another, +followed. The stopped and listened attentively, as if they had heard +something to interest them. They were tall men, dressed in long tunics, +and had beards and lank black hair. Each man carried a club by his +side, and a long spear in one hand, and a bow, with an arrow ready for +use, in the other. As one of them turned his face, I saw that he was a +Red Indian; and by the peculiar expression of his countenance, I felt +certain that they must belong to the dreaded _Cashibos_. I trembled for +the safety of Nita and my two friends, for I could not doubt that many +others were in the neighbourhood; and I could scarcely dare to hope that +they could fail to discover our camp, or to fall in with Manco and the +Indians. + +They were evidently intent on taking game, for they sounded the notes of +several birds in succession, to try if any were in the neighbourhood. +Two or three answered, and shortly making their appearance, fell, +pierced by the Indians' unerring arrows. Again they sounded their +notes, which were answered from a distance, but no game appeared. + +I must own that I was far from comfortable all the time, and afraid to +move or almost to breathe. Every moment I expected to see them turn +their heads, and to be discovered by their sharp eyes; and from the +account I had heard of them, I could hope for nothing better than to be +shot, and cooked forthwith for their suppers. After waiting, however, a +short time, I saw them dart among the trees, and, to my great relief, in +an opposite direction to the camp. Instantly I hurried down from my +lofty perch, and made the best of my way towards the camp, keeping a +bright look-out, lest any of their friends should catch me unawares. + +I ran in breathless haste, anxious to warn my friends in the camp. +Twice, in my hurry, I missed my way, and found myself going in the very +direction the Cashibos had taken. At length I saw a column of smoke +curling up among the trees. I felt certain that it must proceed from +the camp; yet, as I got nearer, a horrid idea seized me, and I fancied +that I must be mistaken, and that I might find instead, the cannibals +seated round one of their dreadful banquets. Still I went on, advancing +as cautiously as I could, and taking care to leave as little trace of my +course behind me as possible. After going on in this way for some time, +my ear caught the sound of singing; and looking between the bushes, I +saw a fire burning with a spit before it, and on the spit there was +roasting what I might have mistaken for a small baby, had not my friend +Ned been officiating as cook; and I guessed that it was a monkey which +had been prying too near the camp, and had been shot either by him or +Pedro. The scene I looked on was one of perfect quiet and repose. The +three huts were finished; Nita was concluding some arrangements in the +interior of hers, and her infant lay in a basket at the entrance. Ned, +as I said, was acting as cook, and Pedro was attending to the horses +which were picqueted around. I was very unwilling to be the bearer of +bad news to my friends; but there was no time to be lost, so I walked in +among them. + +"Ned," I said, "we must be on our guard, there are Indians in the +neighbourhood; they are fellows who would eat us if they could." + +"They must catch us first," said Ned coolly. "If they do, they'll find +some of us tough morsels, I calculate." + +On seeing me, Nita rushed out and inquired for her husband, being +alarmed at my having returned alone. I somewhat tranquillised her by +explaining that I had been separated from the rest; but still she saw +that all was not right. Though I was anxious to bring in the peccaries, +Ned agreed with me that it would be imprudent to leave the camp, for we +could not escape being discovered before long by the Cashibos. After a +time I told Nita quietly that I had seen some strange Indians, and that +I thought it wise to be on our guard against them; indeed, as we might +possibly find a large party of them, and be obliged to retreat in a +hurry, it would be better to pack up and be prepared for a start, as we +were not in a spot where we could well defend ourselves if attacked. +Nita agreed with me in the wisdom of this proceeding, and accordingly we +packed up our goods, and saddled and loaded our horses. I loaded my +rifle, and Ned his pistols and musket; and Pedro and Nita got the bows +and arrows and spears ready. I expressed a hope that all this +preparation would not be required. + +"So do I," answered Ned; "but you see, mate, a good seaman always gets +his ship snug at night if he thinks a storm is brewing, because he can't +see exactly the time when it may come. So I think we are right to get +ready, for the savages, who may pay us a visit when we least expect +them; and as just now, you see, if the rest don't come back, and we've +only got you and I, and the young Don and the woman and the child, who +won't be much help, the odds will be rather against us. Looking at +these things, I think if we were to build up a bit of a fortification +like, it would be some aid to us in case of need." + +Ned's advice was too good to be neglected, and accordingly we set to +work and cut down some young trees and branches; and taking the huts as +a centre, we threw up a sort of breast-work, sufficient to assist in +protecting us while we knelt down to fire. + +We had by this time become very anxious at the prolonged absence of +Manco and the Indians; and I greatly feared that they might have been +surprised by the Cashibos, and murdered. The sun was casting the tall +shadows of the trees across the forest glades, and still they did not +come. At length I determined to mount one of the horses and go in quest +of them. Just, however, as I was putting my foot in the stirrup, a shot +was heard close to us, and then another, and several arrows came +glancing between the trees, but falling short of the camp. Directly +afterwards one of our Indians burst through the brushwood, an arrow +sticking in his side. With a look of terror, he pointed towards the +point from which he had come, uttering the words "Cashibos--Cashibos." +Having broken off the head of the arrow, and drawn out the shaft, I told +the poor fellow to run into the camp; I sprung on my horse, and dashing +forward with my rifle in my hand, I saw Manco and the two other Indians +contending with a dozen or more Cashibos. Manco had shot two of them; +but the rest, undaunted by the unexpected effect of the new instrument +of death he held in his hand, were on the point of rushing in upon him +with their clubs. I saw there was not a moment to be lost, and forcing +my way through the tangled mass of creepers and shrubs which lay between +us, I reined up for an instant, and took a steady aim at the leading +savage. He fell to the ground with a yell of rage, and I then, without +stopping to load again, dashed on towards the next. + +"Well done, mate, well done," I heard Ned shouting behind me. "Knock +the rascals on the head; that's the way to settle them." + +So astonished were the savages with the sudden apparition of me and my +horse, that I had struck one fellow to the ground before he had time to +defend himself. Ned took aim at a third, and wounded him; but the +savages, rendered more furious, still came on with menacing gestures. +Manco had during the interval reloaded his rifle, and singling out +another savage, brought him to the ground. This made the rest once more +halt, and seeing me loading, they were on the point of taking flight, +when some loud cries resounded through the woods, and gave them notice +of the approach of some more of their companions. + +"To the camp, to the camp, my friends!" exclaimed Manco, when he was +aware of this; and obeying his order, we all retreated at once towards +the huts. The Cashibos had received too strong a taste of our quality +to follow at that instant, and allowed us to reach the camp unmolested. +We instantly held a council of war, and at first Manco, when he saw the +fortification we had thrown up, proposed waiting where we were to +receive the attack of our enemies; but he soon agreed with me and Ned, +that it would be wiser to escape while we could, on horseback. We could +not tell how many Cashibos there might be, and they would probably +collect ultimately in such numbers as to overwhelm us, even should we at +first succeed in beating them off. Our Indians, I found, were fully +expecting to see their companion drop down dead, from the effects of the +poison they supposed to have been on the arrow; but either it had not +been poisoned at all, or the poison had dried and peeled off, for the +man did not seem to suffer more than from an ordinary wound. + +The advantage of our having made our preparations for moving beforehand +was now apparent, and to it we probably owed our safety; for, without +the loss of a moment, as soon as our plan of proceeding was settled, we +mounted and rode off at a rapid rate through the woods. The Cashibos +caught sight of us, and saluted us with loud shouts and war-whoops, and +a flight of arrows came whistling after us; but we were already beyond +their reach, and it only made us gallop the faster. + +"Sing away, old fellows!" shouted Ned; "though you've lost your supper, +we've saved ours," and he held out the monkey at the end of the spit +which he had snatched from the fire as we were mounting, and brought +along with him. + +Fortunately the country before us was tolerably free of trees, and the +rock I have mentioned served to guide us; but the sun soon sunk below +the horizon, and left as for a time in darkness. The sky was clear, and +a bright star soon came out, by which we steered our course towards the +river. The chief danger now to be apprehended, was from the fallen +trunks of trees, or any soft bogs into which our horses might sink. +After a time the moon got up, and showed us more clearly our way. On we +pushed, therefore, for though the Indians might not follow us in the +dark, we were very certain that they would directly it was day; and our +great aim was to get to some rocky spot by the bank of the river, where +we might, by having the stream on our side, the more easily defend +ourselves. Vampire bats and owls, and other night-birds flew by; and +snakes and noxious reptiles crossed our path as we rode on; but nothing +stopped us. + +We pulled up when we reached the rock which had at first guided our +course, and consulted whether we should take up our position there for +the night, and prepare to defend it against the savages; but it was +finally agreed that we would travel on till we reached the river. The +journey would knock up our horses, but as we should have no further need +of them, that could not be taken into consideration. Nita bore up very +well; indeed she seemed to suffer from fatigue as little us any of us. +Sometimes her husband carried her child, and sometimes Ned took charge +of it. About midnight a halt was called, on an elevated spot, whence we +could command a tolerably clear view on all sides. We required to rest +and feed our horses as well as ourselves, though we could not venture to +light a fire, which would have betrayed our position to our pursuers. +While we rested and ate, we kept a vigilant watch; for though it was not +probable that the Indians would have followed close to our heels, it was +just possible that they might have done so, as in consequence of the +numerous impediments in our way, a quick-footed man might have gone +almost as fast as we did. + +While I was gnawing away at the leg of the monkey, and looking out at +the same time into the darkness below, I saw something move across an +open glade. It came nearer, and stopped at a spot where the moonbeams +streamed full upon it, when I saw that it was a large jaguar. He sat +upon his hind-legs and looked at us very wistfully, as if he should like +to secure one of us for supper. Presently he moved again and came a +little nearer, when he sat down to look at us as before. I was going to +have a shot at him, but Manco restrained me, observed that it might be +heard by the Cashibos, and lead them to us. Still the jaguar crept +nearer, and once more stopped to watch us. If he was hungry, we must +have been very tempting to him. Our Indians at last thought it was no +joke, for in another moment the jaguar might have picked one of us off; +so they set up so loud a scream that they made him turn about in a +fright, and scamper off into the forest. As this would to a certainty +have led the Cashibos to us, if they were in the neighbourhood, we once +more mounted and continued our journey. Sometimes I thought I heard the +savages behind us; but the sound proved to be the cry of some bird or +beast of prey. + +No other adventure occurred, and, as day dawned, the calm waters of the +river appeared shining brightly through the trees. A little further on +rose close to the stream a high rock, the river face of which was almost +a perpendicular precipice, while that inland was steep and rugged in the +extreme. The top was of sufficient extent, it appeared, to enable us to +pitch our huts on it, and to keep our horses there, it necessary. +Having surveyed it, we discovered a path by which we could hope to lead +up our horses, every other side being too difficult for men, even +unencumbered with burdens, to climb up. After some trouble, we reached +the top, whence we found a fine view up and down the river, and over a +wide extent of forest on either side. + +"The sooner we turn this place into a castle, the better for us, mate," +observed Ned. "What say you? We must get some trees down first, +though." + +I told Manco what the sailor said, and he instantly agreeing, we set to +work forthwith to cut down all the trees which grew around, and which +might serve as a covert to the enemy, and would form palisades for us. + +We set to work with a will with hatchets and knives, and in an hour had +cut stakes enough to fence in the whole rock. Where the soil was of +sufficient depth we drove them into it; and at the other places we piled +up stones, which we brought up from the margin of the river. We gave +ourselves not a moment's rest; even while we were eating we were +sharpening the stakes. Ned set the example, and we all imitated him. +In more important points, as a leader. Manco showed himself fit to be a +chief; but the British seaman, where manual work was concerned, was his +superior. By noon we had a very respectable stockade run up, such as +might withstand an attack for a short time from any ordinary enemy not +possessed of firearms. All the trees and shrubs on the sides of the +rock had been cut away, and stones had been piled up near all the more +accessible points, to serve as a rampart, or to be used as weapons of +defence. + +"Now, mates," exclaimed Ned, after he had walked with an air of +satisfaction round our fortifications, "the work is done, so let's pipe +to dinner." + +To dinner, accordingly, we went; and one of our dishes was the sloth I +had shot, and we had some more monkeys, and several birds, which we had +brought hung on to our saddles. We were obliged to light a fire, and we +did not fear to do so, as we knew that in daylight the Indians would +just as easily track us without its guidance as with it. After dinner +we began to construct our huts in a more substantial way than usual, as +we should be compelled, we knew, to live here some time to build our +canoe. Everything depended on the rapidity with which we could work, so +as to be in perfect readiness to receive an attack from the cannibals, +should they have ventured to follow us. It was night before all our +arrangements were concluded; and as during the whole time we had not +given ourselves a moment's rest, we were well nigh worn out. It was +necessary, however, to keep a watchful guard during the night, for which +purpose we divided ourselves into three watches. We slept with our +weapons by our sides, ready for instant use. When it came to my turn to +watch, I walked round the ramparts to keep myself awake, for I was well +aware of the cunning of the Cashibos, and that they always make their +attacks at night. As I stopped for a moment, a long, shrill plaintive +cry came through the night air, followed by three others of the same +length, gradually deepening in tone, and which had a peculiarly +melancholy expression. At first I thought the cry must have arisen from +some human being in distress. I remarked it to the Indian who was +watching with me. + +"Ah, that sound comes from a little bird," he answered. "We call it the +_alma perdida_. It is bewailing the dead, and good cause has it now to +sound its notes--_Aye de me_!" + +The night passed on, and though on several occasions I fancied that I +could distinguish the forms of the savage Cashibos skulking round us, +none appeared, and daylight once more returned. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY ONE. + +CONCLUSION. + +VOYAGE ON THE AMAZON--PARA--SAIL FOR RIO DE JANEIRO--ALL'S WELL THAT +ENDS WELL. + +Our first care in the morning was to search for a tree which might serve +us to scoop into a canoe, till lower down the Amazon we might fall in +with one large enough to convey us to Para. Fortunately we discovered +one to suit our purpose close to the rock, and we instantly set to work +to bring it to the ground. Thanks to Manco's forethought in providing +us with good hatchets, in the course of three hours it lay prostrate on +the ground, a piece of about thirty-five feet long being marked off to +form the canoe. All day we worked at it, one man at a time being +stationed on the highest point of the rock to give notice of the +approach of an enemy. Before night we had made some progress in +fashioning the bow, and in scooping out the inside. The night passed +off as before, and we began to hope that the Cashibos had had a +sufficient taste of our quality, and did not intend to attack us. Ned +expressed his opinion that it would be necessary to build up some sides +to our canoe; and as we had no means of sawing planks, we looked out for +some tough smooth bark to answer the purpose. The Indians sewed the +pieces we stripped from the trees neatly together; and afterwards they +collected a quantity of black bees' wax, with which to cover the seams. +An Indian occupies the greater part of a year in making his canoe: we +calculated that we could do the work, with the aid of our iron tools, in +ten days or a fortnight. Three days had passed away, and still no +Cashibos had appeared. + +"They will, I suspect, not come at all," I remarked to Manco. + +"Do not be sure of that," he answered. "You do not know their savage +and revengeful natures. They will lie in wait often for weeks or months +together, to destroy an enemy. I'm afraid that they have only gone to +collect their friends, and will be down on us in greater numbers." + +The fifth night passed away, and the sixth night came. Our canoe, +though far from complete, was sufficiently hollowed out to form a boat, +and Ned had that day shaped some paddles; but we had still to build up +the sides, and to pay over the whole with wax, to make it water-tight; +also to put in seats, and half-decks to the bow and stern, as well as to +provision her, to make her fit for our voyage down the river. It was my +watch, and Pedro and one of the Indians were with me. + +"Hist, Senor!" said the latter. "I hear an enemy's footsteps on the +ground. The sound comes down upon the wind. They think we are asleep, +or they would be more cautious. Lie down, and we will not undeceive +them till they are close to us." + +"You are right," I answered; and I crept silently to where Pedro was +standing, and told him what the Indian had said, desiring him also to +rouse up the rest to be ready for action. + +In another minute all hands were at their posts. We were only just in +time; for presently we could distinguish through the stockades a number +of tall savage-looking figures collected among the trees; and an arrow, +with a burning head, was sent flying into the centre of our fort. It +stuck in the ground, and did no damage. Instantly it was followed by a +whole flight, and the most terrific yells and cries rent the air, as +some hundreds of the fiercest-looking savages were now rushing on +towards the fort. + +"Now, be steady, and fire," cried Manco. + +We did, and each of us hit his man; our Indians at the same time sending +their arrows from their bows as fast as they could draw the string, +returning those which the _Cashibos_ had sent. Several of our enemies +had fallen by the time they had reached the foot of the hill. Still +they came on, and began to climb the rocks. If they succeeded in +getting up, and climbing over the stockades, we saw we should to a +certainty be overwhelmed. On they came with terrific cries and yells. +Again and again we fired, and rarely missed; but their numbers were so +great, that little impression was made on them. They found, however, as +they got higher up, their difficulties increased. Our Indians plied +them rapidly with arrows, and at intervals tumbled down the stones on +their heads, and we continued loading and firing without cessation. We +could almost reach them with our spears; and so crowded together were +they, that they impeded each other's movements. This gave us a great +advantage, of which we did not fail to profit; and seizing the largest +stones at hand, we dashed them down on their faces, and knocked them off +the cliff. Their places were, however, speedily supplied by others, and +at length some of them succeeded in reaching the stockades. Now came +the tug of war; for the fighting was hand to hand, where numbers would +have the advantage. Just then I recollected the effect our horses had +had on them before; and calling Manco, we mounted two which stood behind +the hill, ready saddled, and dashed forward at the enemy with our spears +in our hands, uttering loud shouts. The apparition so startled the +foremost ranks, that they turned round to fly, hurrying those behind +them back also. Seeing the success of our manoeuvre, we told the rest +to follow our example. Nita, who had been by the side of Manco, leaped +on a horse. Ned took hold of her baby; and the Indians, leading the +baggage-horses, we prepared to gallop down the rock, and to charge the +main body of the _Cashibos_. It seemed an act of desperation, but it +was our only chance. Our arrows and stones were exhausted, and our +ammunition would not have held out much longer. Our enemies, seeing us +coming on with so bold a front, were seized with a panic; and, with loud +cries, they all turned round and fled into the woods, leaving some dozen +or more of their number dead on the field. + +"We may now rest where we are, I suppose," I observed to Manco. + +"No, no!" he answered. "They will go away, and hold a war council, and +return again before long. We must get away from hence, and put the +river between us before daylight, or we shall suffer from it." + +Accordingly we descended from our rock, and security the horses to the +trees, we united our strength, and launched our unfinished canoe into +the water. The wood of which she was composed was so light that she +floated high; but to give her greater buoyancy, we secured a quantity of +dry rushes round the gunnel; and we found that when our stores were in +her, there was room for all the party. + +"Come, mates, it's time to be under weigh, if we are not to wait till +the Injuns are back upon us," shouted Ned. But one of our Indians was +missing. + +While I was looking round for him, a bright light shone from the top of +the rock, and soon afterwards he made his appearance. I found that he +had gone back to light a fire, to make the _Cashibos_ suppose we were +still on the rock. Ned's voice again summoning is, we embarked in the +canoe; and the horses being fastened to their halters, plunged into the +water after us, encouraged by the voices of the Indians. Ned, Manco, +Pedro, and I seized the paddles, and away we went down the stream, +gradually edging over to the opposite side. The horses, having been +accustomed to cross rivers, swam well; and for half an hour we continued +our course, till we reached a convenient landing place. Our poor horses +were very much exhausted; but we reflected that had we left them on the +other side, they would have fallen into the hands of the _Cashibos_. +Our intention had been to have sent them back with the Indians; but the +men had petitioned so hard to be allowed to accompany Manco, that he +could not refuse them; and we, therefore, were compelled to turn our +animals loose, with a hope that they might escape being devoured by +jaguars or shot by Indians. + +We had landed in a little bay, the entrance of which was concealed, from +the opposite shore. By aid of our horses, we dragged up our canoe, +which already had begun to leak from want of caulking. Close to us was +a rock, very similar to the one we had left, and to this we resolved to +fly if we were again attacked; but Manco and the Indians expressed an +opinion that the _Cashibos_ would not attempt to follow us across the +stream. + +As soon as daylight returned, all hands set to work to finish the canoe. +Some went to collect more bees' wax and bark, others fastened the bark +to the part scooped out, and others put in the seats and decks, Ned +acting the part of master-shipwright, and directing the whole, being +actively employed with his own fingers at the same time. Three more +days were occupied in finishing the canoe. At night we were afraid of +lighting a fire, lest we should show the Cashibos our position, or we +should have worked even then. We slept as before, with our arms ready +for instant action. Our Indians shot some monkeys and three peccaries, +with some birds, which served us for provision for some days; but we had +no fear of being in want of food, as we were certain of finding an +abundance of turtle on the banks of the river, and further down, of +being able to purchase from friendly Indians, plantains, bananas, +guavas, granadillas, pine-apples, water-melons, and many other fruits +and vegetables. We waited till morning, and having bade farewell to our +poor horses, we launched our canoe, and stepping into her, pushed off +into the stream. We were but just in time to escape our enemies, for as +we passed down we saw the shore lined with the Cashibos, who were +launching a number of balsas and rafts with the evident intention of +crossing to destroy us. They sent a flight of arrows after us, but as +the river was here though somewhat shallow, yet very broad, by keeping +over to the opposite bank, we escaped them. We had now paddles for all +hands, and we plied them vigorously. Pedro and I found it at first very +tiring work; but Manco, Ned, and the Indians were accustomed to it. The +scenery we passed was often very fine, when the river ran between high +rocks and ranges of hills. From the character of the country we felt +sure that we should far outstrip any pursuers. To make certain, +however, we paddled on the greater part of the night, the sharpest-eyed +of the Indians being stationed at the bow to warn us of any danger we +were approaching. Towards the morning we pulled into a little sandy +bay, where we landed, and threw ourselves down wrapped in our cloaks, to +obtain some rest. Scarcely was I asleep when I felt something pitch +down upon my nose. I looked up, but no one was near me. I went to +sleep again, when my head got a disagreeable thump, and so it went on. +At last I shifted my position, but still the knocks continued, though I +was too sleepy to heed them. Awaking at daylight I looked up, and in +the trees overhead I discovered a large family of monkeys, who had, I +doubt not, thus been amusing themselves at my expense. We were speedily +again under weigh, and the stream running rapidly, we made, I dare say, +from forty to fifty miles a day. We passed two or three rapids, down +which we had to lower our canoe, and to carry her cargo by land. One +was so dangerous that we judged it safer to haul her on shore, and to +drag her over the ground to the lower side. This we did by means of +rollers placed under her bottom, but the operation occupied us a whole +day, and so weary were we, that we were very thankful the Indians did +not think of attacking us that night. After this, the river became deep +and free from obstructions of all kinds, so that we were able to allow +the canoe to drop down the stream at night, two at a time only paddling, +while the others slept. In this manner we made rapid progress. +Sometimes, when there were no signs of natives, we landed, and built +huts to rest in at night. We generally took these occasions to catch +turtle, while our Indians went to hunt in the neighbourhood, and never +failed to bring us back a supply of game. In about ten days after our +escape from the Cashibos, we sighted a village built close to the banks +of the river. It consisted of only eight or ten houses, but then each +house was of great extent, with many divisions, and was the habitation +of a considerable number of families. The sides were of cane, without +any cement between the interstices, and the roofs were neatly formed of +palm leaves. A turn of the river brought us upon it before we had time +to pull to the opposite side, when a number of the inhabitants came +forth with _pacunas_, their deadly blow-pipes, in their hands, prepared +to shoot at us. Our Indians instantly hailed them, and informed them +that a great chief was in the canoe, and entreated their hospitality. +After a short consultation a friendly reply was given, and we pulled to +the shore. As soon as we landed they came down and led us up to their +houses. + +There was something agreeable in their countenances, though their +flowing hair and painted faces and legs and bodies gave them an +extravagantly savage appearance, increased by their teeth being +blackened, and by the bead ornaments which they wore round their necks, +ankles, and wrists. The men wore a long loose robe, and the women one +of shorter dimensions. There was little neatness in the internal +economy of their dwellings. At the end farthest from the door was the +fire-place, surrounded with pots and jars of many sizes. On each side +were raised platforms for bed-places, and pieces of beaten bark for +bedding, covered with musquito curtains. Bows, arrows, lances, +_pacunas_ or blow-pipes, were hung to the posts or rafters, an axe and a +knife in some cases: bowls made from calabashes, earthen jars to hold +chica, water and young turtles; a few blocks of wood for seats, a few +baskets, a ladder to reach to the roof, a wooden trough in which +_masata_ is made, and a rude sort of loom, complete the furniture; from +which list must not be omitted the lady's dressing box which contains +her paints and brushes, as well as her trinkets. The centre of the +house is always left unoccupied, as beneath it are buried the members of +the family who die, the living thus becoming the guardians of the dead. +They gave us an abundant repast off _vaca marina_ or _manatee_, called +in English a sea-cow (a curious fish which I must describe), turtle, +monkeys, and a variety of vegetables and fruits. + +Our friends were great fishermen as well as sportsmen. The next morning +I accompanied some of them in their canoes to catch a _vaca marina_. +They watched for the animal till his snout appeared above water, when +they killed it with their spears. In appearance it was something like a +huge seal; but it has no power to leave the water. It was about twelve +feet long, with a large muzzle armed with short bristles, and small eyes +and ears. It had two thick fins and a longish thick tail; was very fat, +and of a dark blue colour. To bring it home a canoe was sunk under its +body; and when bailed out, it floated it up with perfect ease. The meat +was in taste something between pork and beef. A large quantity of oil +was extracted from the blubber. + +Turtle flesh forms one of the principal articles of food of the people +living on the banks of the rivers; and a very valuable oil is also +extracted from the eggs, of which one female lays a hundred and fifty in +a season. It is used instead of butter. + +The fiercest inhabitants of the Amazon, and of its large and numerous +tributaries, are the _lagartos, caimanes_, or alligators. In some parts +they are seen basking in the sun, like logs of wood thrown up by the +tide, with their enormous mouths kept open ready to catch the flies +which settle on their lower jaw. Alligators lay eggs, and it is said +that as soon as they are hatched the young ones try to run on to their +mother's back, and that the male alligator, who has come for no other +purpose, eats all which fail to take refuge there, aided by the +gallinasos and other birds of prey. Their natural food appears to be +fish; and the Indians say that they will make a party of twelve or more, +and that while one division blockades the entrance of a creek, the other +will swim down, flapping their tails, and drive the fish into the jaws +of their devourers. When they cannot procure fish, they will land and +destroy calves and young foals, dragging them to the water's edge to eat +them. When once they have tasted human flesh, it is asserted that they +will take great pains to obtain it, upsetting canoes, and seizing people +asleep near the banks, or floating on their balsas. I have seen an +Indian attack and kill an alligator in the water with a sharp knife. +The Indian in one hand took a a fowl, and in the other his knife. He +swam till it got opposite the alligator, when it made a spring at the +fowl. On this he left the fowl floating, and diving below the surface, +cut the belly of the monster open with his knife. I have seen one +twenty feet long; and what with his enormous head, and horrid eyes +almost projecting out of his head, the impenetrable armour which covers +his body, the red colour of his jaws, his sharp teeth, and his huge paws +and tail, make him certainly a very hideous monster. + +The most deadly weapon the Indian of the Pampas uses is his _pacuna_ or +blow-pipe, out of which he sends his arrows, dipped in the fatal +_wourali_ poison. The poison takes its name from the wourali vine, the +scraped wood of which, and some bitter roots, form the chief +ingredients, boiled together. The rites and incantations employed, and +the numerous other articles added to the poisonous cauldron, may remind +one of the weird sisters' concoction in Macbeth. The _pacuna_ is +composed of a very delicate thin reed, perfectly smooth inside and out, +which is encased in a stouter one. The arrows are from nine to ten +inches long, formed of the leaf of a species of palm, hard and brittle, +and pointed as sharp as a needle. At the butt-end some wild cotton is +twisted round, to fit the tube. About an inch of the pointed end is +poisoned. Quivers are made to hold five or six hundred of these darts. +The slightest wound causes certain death within a few minutes, as the +poison mixes with the blood, and completely paralyses the system, +causing, probably, little or no pain. The _pacuna_ is very similar to +the _sumpitan_, used by the inhabitants of Borneo and other people in +the Eastern Archipelago, though the latter are not acquainted with the +wourali poison. + +I must hurry on, I find, with my adventures. For several days we +proceeded down the Ucayali, till we arrived at a point where a small +river, called the Shaunga, falls into it. The stream was broad and +tranquil, and vast trees grew down to the water's edge; while in the far +distance, to the south and east, rose ranges of lofty mountains, +reminding us of the distant Andes in miniature. Manco pointed them out +to Nita. + +"There," he said, "is our future home, till the Spaniards have learned +not to despise the Indian race. Then we will return, and once more +endeavour to regain liberty for Peru, and to restore the dominion of the +Incas." + +We here landed, and built some huts to last us a few days, while Manco +sent one of our Indians as an ambassador to the chiefs of the villages, +to crave the hospitality of the tribe. We employed the time till the +return of the messenger in fishing and shooting, and in preparing the +canoe for a longer voyage; for which purpose we fitted her with a mast +and sail, a very patch-work affair, made out of our saddle-cloths and +some bits of cotton stuff, which Manco had brought with him. + +One day about noon, the sound of an Indian trumpet was heard; and soon +afterwards, a dozen warriors appeared, their faces and bodies highly +painted, and adorned with a profusion of beads. They were clothed in +the usual loose tunics, and armed with shields and clubs, ornamented +with the antlers of a stag and richly tinted feathers, one end being +sharp, to use as a spear; as also with bows and arrows, and lances. +They were, I found, of the Sencis tribe. These people live in good +houses, cultivate the ground, and use canoes, and are a very intelligent +and warlike people. + +The present party came to welcome Manco to their country, and to express +their willingness to afford him an asylum as long as he chose to remain +among them, it was with deep regret that we parted from him and Nita and +their child. He was too sensible to ask me to remain with him, feeling +that, as a civilised man, I had my vocation elsewhere. + +"I hope to be of some use to these poor people in improving their +condition," he observed with a sigh. "The employment will serve to +soothe my weary exile." + +Manco, and Nita with her child in her arms, stood on the shore, as, +hoisting our sail, we steered our course down the river. I watched them +with aching eyes and a sad heart, till they faded from my sight. Many +years since then have passed away, but I have never received any account +of my brave and noble friend. He may have returned to Peru, when the +War of Independence broke out, and the Creoles threw off the yoke of +Spain. At that time a large number of Indians joined the liberal party, +under the idea that if the Spaniards were driven out, their freedom and +ancient institutions would be restored; but they found that under the +new republic their condition was but little if at all improved. Many, I +am told, however, still look forward to the time when Manco or his son +shall appear, and the Inca and his race shall rule the land. + +I wish that I had space to describe our very interesting voyage down the +Amazon. I saw enough to convince me of the fertility of the soil, and +the vast number of productions to be found in its neighbourhood, and on +the banks of the many rivers which run into it. + +After some weeks we reached the station of a Portuguese missionary +priest, who received us most hospitably; and finding that he was about +to despatch a vessel to Para, we were glad to abandon our canoe, and to +embark in her. She was about thirty feet long and eight broad, the +after part being decked with a house thatched with palm leaves, which +served as the cabin for the passengers. In the fore part was a +frame-work, covered also with palm leaves, under which the crew stood to +paddle. In the centre was a mast, with a large square sail set on it. +We had received as gifts several monkeys and parrots, and other birds +and beasts, which now served to amuse us, as our own toils were over. +Some parts of the Amazon, down which we sailed, were three miles wide, +and appeared like large lakes. For many hundreds of miles steamboats +might penetrate into the interior of that magnificent region; and I hope +that the enterprise which is every day making new fields for its +employment, may be directed ere long to that direction, to carry the +advantages of civilisation among the numerous interesting tribes who +inhabit its shores. + +It was with much satisfaction that we reached the Portuguese city of +Para, situated on the river of that name. From the sandy nature of the +soil, and the steady trade-winds which blow from the east, the city, +though but little above the level of the sea at high water, is perfectly +healthy. There are a good many public buildings, and several largos or +open spaces in the city; but the private residences have little +pretension to beauty, though they are constructed with a due regard to +afford as much shade and coolness as possible. We remained here but two +days; for, finding a schooner sailing for Rio de Janeiro, and there +being no chance of a vessel direct to England for many months, we +resolved to go in her. + +I shall never forget the intense delight with which Ned walked the deck +as he once more found himself afloat on the open ocean. + +"This is what I call life, mate--true life," he exclaimed; "and it will +be a long time before you find me out of sight of blue water again." + +Our schooner, the "Felicidade," had a rapid passage to Rio de Janeiro. +I cannot stop to describe that city, which has now become the capital of +an empire. Indeed I saw very little of it. Nor can I picture its +magnificent harbour, large enough to hold all the navies in the world. +My first care, on going on shore, was to learn what ships were about to +start for Europe. I found that one was sailing the very next morning. +Ned, on hearing this, said he would go on board and look at the craft, +while Pedro and I waited for him on the quay. He soon came back, and +said that the "Susan" was a fine large brig; that he liked her +appearance, and as she was short of hands he had engaged for the passage +home at good wages. There was, he understood, an English family going +home in her; but as she would have room for two more passengers, he +advised me to return with him to secure berths for Pedro and myself. +We, accordingly, forthwith went on board. + +"Your name, sir," said the master, when I told him my object. + +"David Rexton," I replied. + +"Rexton! that is very extraordinary," he replied. "Why, that is the +name of my other passengers." + +Oh! how my heart beat with strange, wild, fearful, yet hopeful emotions +at these words. I should have fallen on the deck, had not the +kind-hearted man supported me. + +"Where are they?" I at length found words to say. + +"In the cabin at this moment," he replied. "But stay, I have heard much +about them, and suspect who you are. Do you go forward with my mate +there, and stay quiet for a little time; while I go and prepare them for +your appearance. By-and-by we will introduce your friend here, and he +can tell them he has seen you alive and well." + +I put myself under the good master's directions; and I need scarcely say +that Heaven had mercifully preserved my beloved parents, and thought fit +to re-unite me to them. The very night the village, where they had +taken refuge, was attacked, the faithful Ithulpo had warned them in time +to enable them to fly to the mountains, where they had concealed +themselves in the hut of an aged Indian. Ithulpo had, unfortunately, +quitted them, to look for some of their horses; and they had seen no +more of him. From the hut of the Indian, after a detention of some +weeks, they succeeded in reaching the coast, and getting on board a +merchantman, engaged in smuggling. She directly afterwards sailed; and +rounding Cape Horn, they put into the magnificent harbour of Rio de +Janeiro, for water and provisions. Here my father found that the +affairs of a branch of their house would much benefit by his presence. +He accordingly had remained, till I so fortunately arrived. + +We finally reached England in safety. Ned refused to touch any of the +gold given to us by Manco; and I, feeling that I could do no less than +follow the noble fellow's generous example, devoted it to the service of +Pedro, who was thus enabled to obtain the best education England could +afford. Some years afterwards he went to Peru, and succeeded in +recovering the larger portion of his father's property. He fought in +the War of Independence, when his native country threw off the yoke of +Spain; but deeply disappointed in the result of that struggle, he lived +in retirement on his estate, devoting himself to doing good to the +surrounding population. + +He wrote me word that he had made every inquiry for Manco, but could +hear nothing of him. The Inca noble probably perceived that the War of +Independence could do little to ameliorate the condition of his people, +and refused to leave his retreat. + +My tale is ended. Since the period of my adventures in Peru I have +visited many countries, and witnessed many strange scenes; and this I +can assert, that every event of my life has tended to confirm the +lessons given me by my father, to increase my reliance on God, and to +convince me more and more that He orders all things for the best; and +that when He thinks fit to afflict His creatures, He has some wise +object in view, even though we may not be able to discover it. +Therefore, I say to my young friends, learn what is right to be done, +and do it, fearless of consequences, and trusting in Heaven. Seek not +for the reward of man, and be assured that God will care for you here, +and more than amply repay you hereafter. + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Manco, the Peruvian Chief, by W.H.G. Kingston + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MANCO, THE PERUVIAN CHIEF *** + +***** This file should be named 21397.txt or 21397.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/3/9/21397/ + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |